diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-0.txt | 4749 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 72501 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 629398 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/44631-h.htm | 4765 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 86736 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-039.jpg | bin | 0 -> 51764 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-039f.jpg | bin | 0 -> 94124 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-171.jpg | bin | 0 -> 93905 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-171f.jpg | bin | 0 -> 75433 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-emb.png | bin | 0 -> 8319 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg | bin | 0 -> 58655 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg | bin | 0 -> 94109 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631.txt | 4750 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44631.zip | bin | 0 -> 72126 bytes |
14 files changed, 14264 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/44631-0.txt b/old/44631-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8cf9ef --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4749 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Dare Boys with General Greene, by Stephen Angus Cox + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Dare Boys with General Greene + +Author: Stephen Angus Cox + +Illustrator: Rudolf Mencl + +Release Date: January 9, 2014 [EBook #44631] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + +[Illustration: Dick was taken by surprise.] + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + The Dare Boys + with + General Greene + + BY + STEPHEN ANGUS COX + + Illustrations by Rudolf Mencl + + NEW YORK + A. L. CHATTERTON CO. + PUBLISHERS + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + THE DARE BOYS + + Stephen Angus Cox, the author of the Dare Boys Series is + specially equipped through long study and research to write upon + the life and adventures of these two daring sons of the + revolutionary period. Every item of historical reference is + absolutely correct. The trials and inherent bravery of the + sturdy warriors of this epoch are always subjects worth while, + but here the dash and bravery of the two Dare boys adds + immeasurably to the interest. + + THE DARE BOYS OF 1776 + THE DARE BOYS ON THE HUDSON + THE DARE BOYS IN TRENTON + THE DARE BOYS ON THE BRANDYWINE + THE DARE BOYS IN THE RED CITY + THE DARE BOYS AFTER BENEDICT ARNOLD + THE DARE BOYS IN VIRGINIA + THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE + THE DARE BOYS WITH LAFAYETTE + THE DARE BOYS AND THE “SWAMP FOX” + + Illustrated, Cloth 12mo. Price per volume 50 cents. + + Copyright, 1910 + BY + The A. L. Chatterton Co. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + CONTENTS + + I. The Dare Boys and the Indians 9 + II. Peaceful Valley 18 + III. Riding the Flood 26 + IV. Dick and the Indians 34 + V. Gabe Gurley 42 + VI. In the Cabin 50 + VII. Tom Tries Woodcraft 57 + VIII. A Battle with a Wolf 63 + IX. In Search of Tom 70 + X. At Fort Ninety-Six 78 + XI. At the Stake 84 + XII. Fritz and the Indians 90 + XIII. Tom and the Redcoats 96 + XIV. Friends in Need 105 + XV. Preparing for Trouble 111 + XVI. The Search for Dick 121 + XVII. Ben Reconnoiters 129 + XVIII. Dick and the Panther 137 + XIX. The Settlers’ Retreat 143 + XX. Dick Appears 151 + XXI. In the Fort 157 + XXII. Tom Makes a Discovery 164 + XXIII. The Siege 175 + XXIV. Lively Work 182 + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE + + + CHAPTER I + + The Dare Boys and the Indians + + +Three youths of perhaps twenty years of age were making their way +through the forest. The locality was about fifty miles from Ninety-Six, +in South Carolina, and Ninety-Six was so called because it was +approximately that number of miles from Fort Price George. This was the +nearest fort of any size. + +The three youths were no others than Dick and Tom Dare, and their +comrade, Ben Foster, who had been members of the patriot army of America +for a considerable period--for it was now May of the year 1781. + +These youths, who had done brave fighting, were also famous for having +done much good work as scouts, messengers and spies, and they were now +on a scouting and spying expedition, ordered by General Greene, their +company having been sent down from Virginia into South Carolina to help +General Greene. The objective point was Ninety-Six, but there had been +lots of fighting to do with parties of British and Tories, and the +advance southward had been slow. Hearing that the Cherokee Indians were +on the warpath, having been incited thereto by the British, and that +they were committing a good many depredations and killing patriot +settlers, were burning and pillaging, General Greene had sent the youths +to learn the actual facts, for, if the Indians were committing as great +a havoc as had been stated, he would push on down into that region as +quickly as he could move his forces, and try to put a stop to their +depredations. + +So here the youths were, and they were moving slowly and cautiously; +indeed a settler that they had met a few miles back had told them that +the Cherokees were in this vicinity, and had advised the youths to be +very careful or they would be interfered with. + +They came to the top of a knoll, and pausing, looked ahead with keen and +searching gaze. At first they saw nothing noteworthy, but presently, +Dick uttered a low exclamation indicating interest and indicating with +his extended arm, said: “I believe I saw an Indian over there!” + +“Where?” asked Tom, eagerly. + +Dick pointed in the direction in which he thought he had seen the +Indian, and the three youths all gazed eagerly. For a few moments they +did not make out any sign of a living being, but suddenly out from +behind a tree about a hundred yards distant appeared a bronzed face. The +head was covered with thick, straight hair, and topped, it was seen, +with eagle feathers. + +“There he is!” exclaimed Tom, excitedly, but in a low voice. + +“Sh,” cautioned Dick. They stood perfectly still, and hoped that because +of the fact that they were pretty well hidden behind the underbrush upon +the top of the knoll, they would not be observed. They did not know how +keen-eyed a Cherokee Indian was, however, for suddenly a loud, thrilling +war-whoop escaped the lips of the redskin, and then from several +different directions the whoop was answered. + +“He’s calling his companions!” exclaimed Ben. “We are in danger of +capture, Dick!” + +“Yes, I guess we had better get away from here.” In a moment he added, +“Follow me, boys.” + +Then Dick turned and started swiftly down the slope, Tom and Ben keeping +close at his heels, and from behind them came the wild, thrilling +war-whoops of the redskins. + +“They’re surely after us!” exclaimed Tom. + +“Yes. We’ll have to make good time if we get away from them,” said Dick. +“They may be spread out, I should judge so from their calls, and it may +take them some time to get together.” + +The patriot youths ran rapidly and glancing back over his shoulder, Dick +saw that at least one of the redskins was coming after them as fast as +he could travel. The brave patriot youth realized that they were going +to have a much harder time shaking these Indians off their trail than +they usually had with the redcoats. The British soldiers were rather +clumsy and slow, but these redskins were lithe as panthers, and as +speedy, almost, and could continue running for hours. + +“Do your best, boys,” he told his companions. “For I believe that they +are gaining on us.” + +“Run as fast as you can, Dick,” panted Tom; “we’ll keep up with you.” + +“We’ll try, at any rate,” said Ben. + +On they dashed, and after them, whooping in a manner that would have +filled the hearts of less brave youths with terror, came the Indians. +Doubtless the red fiends thought they would easily surround the +fugitives, and make escape impossible. Presently Dick and his party came +to a deep gulch or ravine. The wall on their side was nearly +perpendicular, and they could not descend it. Here was a predicament +indeed. They paused, irresolute, and looked to the right and to the +left, only to see that the wall of the gulch was as steep everywhere +within sight. They could see for quite a distance too in either +direction, as the point where they were standing rather projected out +toward the other side. + +The yelling of redskins determined the fact that they were within a few +hundred yards and swiftly cutting down the distance. And, too, they were +spreading out, fan-shape, with the evident intention of hemming the +youths in and preventing them from going up or down the edge of the +gulch. Of course they knew full well the contour of the land and thought +they had their intended prey, as it were, in a trap. + +“There doesn’t seem to be any escape for us, Dick,” said Ben. + +“Gracious,” cried Tom. “Look at that black cloud to the north.” It had +not attracted their attention before, but now they saw that a terrible +storm was impending. + +Dick looked eagerly around, and suddenly he pointed to a very tall, +slender tree, of some growth he did not recognize, that stood close to +the edge of the precipice. The rains had washed out the earth from about +the roots and the tree was inclined at an angle well out over the +ravine. + +“Quick!” he cried. “Let’s climb that tree and swing over the precipice. +It will bend and will let us down I think to within twelve or fifteen +feet of the bottom of the gulch.” + +“That’s an idea worth trying,” cried Tom, and he was first to tackle the +task and was quickly followed by Dick and Ben. + +The three occasionally assisting one another made rapid progress and +Dick meantime further explained his project. Their united weight would +bend down the long slender trunk and at his command all were to drop at +once into the depth beneath. Where would they land? There was not time +to think. + +While the Indians were yet at some distance, the youths found that their +weight was effectively bending down the tree into the ravine. The change +was gradual at first, and then the more slender wood gave quicker +response to the strain, so that finally it bent so low into the depths +below that the boys instead of climbing up were sliding down toward the +tree top. Before the Indians reached a point where they could observe +the boys they had disappeared below the level of the ground which marked +the margin of the declivity. + +Down, farther and farther went the patriot youths, and as the redskins +came upon the scene they saw their intended victims slipping out of +their hands in a most peculiar manner. They gave expression to their +chagrin in yells of rage, brandished their tomahawks, and threatened to +discharge arrows, but did neither. It seemed evident, from this, that +they wished to capture the youths alive. Doubtless they knew the three +were newcomers in that region, and wished to find out why they were +there. Possibly they were working in co-operation with the British and +had been instructed to capture any strangers seen and bring them to the +officer in command. + +Anyhow, they did not discharge any arrows or throw any tomahawks, which +probably saved the youths’ lives, for the Indians, being expert in the +use of those weapons, could hardly have missed at so short a range. + +Down lower and lower swung the three youths, and presently they came to +a point beyond which Dick deemed it not prudent to test the strength of +the wood. They were now within perhaps nine or ten feet of the bottom of +the gulch. “When I count three, let go and drop, boys,” ordered Dick. +“The fall won’t hurt us,” he added encouragingly. + +One. + +Two. + +Three. + +The boys let go at the same moment and down they dropped, striking on +the rocks of the gulch-bottom with considerable force, and dropping to +their hands and knees, but they were not injured, excepting that they +were jarred somewhat. + +Then the Indians repeated their wild yells, and two of them began +climbing the same tree, it having sprung back to its original, more +nearly perpendicular, position. It was evidently the intention of the +redskins to duplicate the feat of the youths. + +“Quick, let’s run down the gulch, till we come to a place where we can +climb the wall,” ordered Dick. + +“Look!” suddenly yelled Tom, pointing up the gulch in the direction they +had before noticed the cloud denoting an impending storm. + +Dick and Ben looked, and saw a wondrous sight, a wall of foaming water +coming rushing down the gulch toward them at terrible speed. + +“There has been a cloud-burst up the gulch!” exclaimed Dick in dismay. +“We will be swept away in that torrent!” + +There was no time to say much, let alone do anything, for the torrent +was sweeping toward them with the speed of the wind, and as it advanced, +it roared like thunder. The youths now saw that there were logs in the +advancing waters, swirling and pounding, and grinding against one +another. + +The Indians that had started to climb the tree had slid back down to the +earth, and all stood at the edge of the precipice, staring down upon the +youths, whom they doubtless believed to be doomed. + +And there was reason for their thinking thus, for there was terrible +force in the volume of water sweeping irresistibly upon them. + + + + + CHAPTER II + + Peaceful Valley + + +In a beautiful little valley of some three miles in length by perhaps a +little less width, several farmers were at work. They were plowing up +the ground and getting ready to plant a crop. + +Over at one side was a little group of log houses, ten in number, these +being the homes of the families living in Peaceful Valley. The settlers +had built the houses near together, for protection against the Indians. +And in the center of the settlement was a very strong log building, +surrounded by a thick stockade wall, with a strong gate, and the +building in question was intended as a sort of fort, to retreat to, in +case of an overwhelming attack by Indians. In the building there was +kept constantly a goodly supply of provisions, so that it would have +been possible to stand quite a siege. + +When we introduce the scene to the reader’s notice, the farmers were +working steadily, and quietly, and while they were on the alert, as was +their custom, they were not expecting trouble, for they had not heard of +any Indians being in their immediate vicinity, though there had been +depredations fifteen or twenty miles farther south. + +But suddenly a party of Indians numbering thirty or forty put in an +appearance and made an attack on the settlers, who seized their +rifles--which they always took to the field with them--and firing at the +redskins a few times, they ran to the settlement as fast as possible, +the Indians following, yelling in a blood-thirsty manner. + +The women and children at the houses had seen what was going on, and had +hastened to the fort, carrying such of their household goods as they +could manage handily, and they held the gate open for the men to enter. +Then, when all were within, the gate was closed quickly, and fastened. +The women and younger children entered the building, while the men +climbed to a platform that was built along the stockade-wall, on the +inside, and perhaps five feet from the top of the wall. From here they +could fire over the top of the wall, at the redskins, and then drop down +to avoid the arrows of the Indians. + +The redskins, finding that to attempt to break down the gate, or to +scale the wall would be to lose a number of their braves, turned their +attention to the houses, and began helping themselves to the contents. +When they had taken everything that they cared for, they set the houses +on fire, and the settlers were forced to stand there and see their homes +go up in flames. + +“The fiends!” growled James Holden, the leader of the colony. “Why +couldn’t they have let the houses stand? They got most of our goods. +They might have been satisfied with that.” + +“They’ll stay till after dark and try to get in here at us, likely,” +said Henry Perkins. “I know these Cherokee Injuns. They are mean when +they get their mad up, and these seem to be very much in earnest.” + +“Yes,” said Holden. “We wounded several of them when they were chasing +us into the settlement. This naturally aroused their anger.” + +“It was bad enough to have to live in a neighborhood where there are a +good many Tories, without having to be bothered with the Injuns too,” +said another of the settlers. + +“The redcoats have put them up to going on the war-path,” said Perkins. +“It was a mean trick to do, to get them started.” + +“You’re right,” agreed Holden, “but look at that terribly black cloud +over to the north. There is going to be a storm and that right quick or +I miss my guess.” + +The Indians, having finished setting fire to all the houses, retired to +a little distance, squatted down on the ground, and watched the +structures burning. + +Then, when the buildings had burned down, the redskins began dividing +the plunder they had secured from the houses, and when this was +finished, they advanced as close to the fort as they dared. Here they +stopped and held a council, of some sort, evidently trying to decide +upon some plan for getting into the fort and at the settlers. + +They talked and gesticulated at a great rate, and were apparently not +agreed, or at a loss to determine upon any further procedure. + +“I don’t think there is much danger of their making an attack during +daylight,” said Holden, when they had watched the redskins a while. + +“No, but they’ll try to get into the stockade to-night, without any +doubt,” said Perkins. “Unless,” he added “that storm drives them away. +Somehow the Indians don’t seem to notice its coming at all.” + +“They are lower down in the gulch and perhaps do not see about as well +as we do up here,” said another. + +The other men all thought the same, but while they did not expect an +attack before nightfall, yet they did not relax their vigilance. They +kept their eyes on the enemy. + +“I wish that General Greene would come down this way, with his army,” +said another of the settlers. + +“Mebby he will come down here,” said another. “I heerd that he is up in +North Caroliny.” + +“There are going to be terrible times around in the neighborhood of +Ninety-Six, pretty soon, I think,” said Holden. “And it would be a good +thing if General Greene came here.” + +“He’d put a stop to the Injuns’ doin’s, mighty quick,” said another. + +The others agreed that General Greene’s army would be able to put a stop +to the depredations of the Indians, and then make it exceedingly hot as +well for the redcoats in Ninety-Six and vicinity. + +Then they ceased talking for a few minutes, while they watched the +redskins, who had taken seats on the ground, with their faces toward the +fort. They were about three hundred yards distant, and behind them, at +about the same distance, was rough, broken country, with a deep gulch +running through it, the mouth of the gulch being almost opposite the +Indians’ backs. + +Suddenly, one of the settlers, who happened to glance toward the mouth +of the gulch, exclaimed, excitedly: “Look yonder! Look at the mouth of +the gulch!” + +The others turned their eyes in that direction, and saw a sight that +made them all give vent to exclamations of astonishment. They saw, +indeed, an avalanche of water at least ten feet in height coming +sweeping down the gulch, foaming and, as it neared the end of the gulch, +roaring at a great rate. + +The Indians heard the sound, and leaped to their feet and turned, and +when they saw the wall of water rushing toward the mouth of the gulch, +they gave utterance to wild yells and started to run, to get out of the +path of the flood. + +They could not succeed, however, for the torrent came pouring out of the +mouth of the gulch and dashing on across the level, spreading as it +came, and before they could get out of reach, the water was upon them, +and had them in its swirling embrace. + +Some of them were struck by the logs and knocked senseless, and two or +three were drowned. Others were swept onward and landed against the +stockade-wall around the fort, while others still were carried past and +went on across the valley, with the waters. + +The settlers and the women and children, had watched this strange +happening with wondering eyes, and with a kind of pleasure, too, for it +had put an end to a problem that had been bothering them, had put the +Indians to utter rout, at least for the time being. + +“There must have been a cloud-burst up the gulch,” said one of the men. + +“Yes, that was what happened,” said Holden. “Well, it was a good thing +for us, for it has put the redskins to flight.” + +“It has put some of them to death,” said Perkins. “I see three bodies, +yonder.” + +“They were hit by the logs, and then drowned afterwards,” said another. + +“Yas. Well, it saved us the trouble of shooting them.” + +“So it did,” said Holden. + +“But, our houses are burned down!” murmured one of the women. “They have +burned our homes, and the flood has spoiled the ground that had been +fixed for planting.” + +“Oh, well, we can do the work over again,” said Perkins. “And we can +build new houses.” + +“Yes, that’s so,” said Holden. “I’m mighty glad the flood happened along +and drowned a few of the redskins and scared the others away.” + +By the middle of the afternoon the ground was dry again, the sun having +come out and shone brightly, and the settlers went out and buried the +three dead Indians. Then they returned to the fort, and when nightfall +came, they placed two men on guard, for they thought it possible that +the Indians might come back again. + + + + + CHAPTER III + + Riding the Flood + + +When the flood of foaming, seething water swept over Dick, Tom and Ben +and engulfed them, they thought at first that their time had come; but +Dick shouted; “Grab hold of a log and stick to it if possible.” Each +managed so to do and by holding to the logs tightly, they were born +along with the rushing flood. They swallowed a good deal of water but +escaped being drowned. As the boys disappeared beneath the onrush of the +torrent, the Indians standing on the edge of the precipice, gazed down +with a look of awe on their bronzed faces. + +Onward down the gulch the boys were carried, however, with great speed, +and when they had gone what seemed like two or three miles from the +point where they had been overtaken by the flood, they came to a point +where the gulch split, becoming two gulches, one going off at right +angles while the other turned slightly to the left. As the one leading +to the right was wider, had lower banks and the water was not swirling +at such a terrible rate, the three youths were able to guide the logs +into the gulch on that side, and were soon being borne onward at a more +moderate pace. + +Onward they were swept, until finally they suddenly shot out from the +mouth of the gulch and found themselves in a good-sized river. + +They let go now their holds on the logs, swam to the shore and clambered +out upon the bank, which was low and sloping, and dropping down on the +sand, they lay there, panting and resting. + +“Well, didn’t that beat any experience that we have ever had since we +joined the patriot army?” cried Tom, presently, when he had become +rested and was breathing normally again. + +“It wasn’t a very pleasing experience,” said Dick. + +“I should say not,” remarked Ben. + +“That torrent certainly carried us away from the vicinity of the +redskins very quickly,” said Tom. + +“Yes, it did that much good, anyhow,” agreed Dick. + +“I wonder where we are,” said Ben, presently. + +“In the land of the living,” replied Tom, with a laugh. “And that is +more than I expected would be the case, an hour ago, when that torrent +struck us.” + +The youths now doffed their outer garments, wrung them out and spread +them out to dry. By the time they were ready to wear, they themselves +were rested, and putting the clothing on again, they set out through the +forest, heading in a direction that would take them to about the same +point they were aiming for before they ran into the Indians. + +Till evening they tramped along, and they were beginning to think they +would have to sleep out in the woods, when they caught sight of a light +ahead of them. The next moment they emerged into open country, and made +their way toward the light. + +Presently they came to what looked like a fort, as seen in the +starlight, and they made out that there was a high stockade-wall around +the building. + +“Well, I’m glad we’ve found some place to stay for the night, anyhow,” +suggested Tom. + +“Who comes there?” cried a voice, from above their heads. + +“Friends,” replied Dick. He did not know that the inmates of the fort +were friends, but he thought it likely they were patriots, and hoped +that such was the case. + +“How many are there of you?” was the next question. + +“Three.” + +“Who are you? You are not British, and of course not Indians?” + +“No, we are strangers, who were caught in the torrent from the +cloud-burst and have had a terrible time. Will you kindly let us in?” + +There was the sound of low conversation, and then the voice spoke up +again: + +“Yes, we’ll let you in.” + +Then a few moments later they heard the squeaking of the gate as it was +opened and they hastened around there and entered the stockade. + +The man that had admitted them, Mr. Holden, fastened the gate and then +said: “Come with me.” + +He led the way into the fort, where the youths found themselves the +center of interest. The men, women and children of the families of the +settlers looked at the youths wonderingly and inquiringly. + +“You are strangers, sure enough,” said Mr. Holden. + +“Yes,” said Dick. “Are you folks patriots?” + +Holden nodded. “We are,” he said. + +“Good. I’m glad of that. We are patriots also, and members of the army +of General Greene, who is about one hundred miles north of here.” + +“Ah, we are glad to hear that,” said Holden. “I wish that General Greene +would come down here and give the Indians a thrashing.” + +“That is what he is figuring on doing if there is need,” said Dick. + +“He sent us to do some scouting and reconnoitering,” put in Tom. “He had +heard that there were lots of Indians down here, and that they were +murdering patriots and burning their homes, and if we learned that this +was the case, he would come down here and put a stop to their work.” + +“Well, you can return to him and tell him that his presence in this part +of the country is sorely needed. The Indians are pillaging and burning +homes, and they have committed a number of murders. They attacked us, +here in Peaceful Valley, this afternoon, and drove us to the shelter of +this fort and then burned our houses.” + +“That was bad,” said Dick. + +“Yes, but they were overtaken by the flood, while they were sitting on +the ground, about halfway between here and the mouth of the gulch, and +three of them were struck by logs and knocked senseless, and were +drowned.” + +“That was good,” said Tom, his eyes shining. + +“We were in the flood, too, as we told you before you let us in,” said +Dick. “We were chased by Indians, and were trying to escape. We swung +down on the end of a tall tree, and dropped into the gulch, then +suddenly a torrent came rushing down upon us and bore us a considerable +distance before emptying into a river several miles from here. We swam +ashore, dried our clothes and then came here.” + +“You were fortunate, in that you were not hit by any of the logs,” said +Mr. Perkins. + +“Yes, so we were,” said Dick. “We grabbed hold of logs, and kept from +being swept underneath the water and drowned.” + +There was some further talk, and then the youths were given something to +eat, after which all settled down to take matters as easy as possible. +The settlers rather expected an attack, but were prepared to offer +battle, and did not doubt but what they could drive the redskins away, +unless they came in much stronger force than when they made the attack +in the afternoon. + +Dick asked the settlers many questions, and gained a good knowledge of +the situation in that part of the country. He learned that Ninety-Six +was garrisoned by about five hundred British and Tory soldiers, and that +they were inciting the Indians to attack the patriot settlers, and when +he had gathered all the information possible, Dick said that he would +take his leave about midnight and start northward to carry the report to +General Greene. + +“Hadn’t you better let me take the news to General Greene, Dick?” said +Ben. “You might be able to do good work here, scouting and spying on the +Indians, redcoats and Tories.” + +“No, I guess I will take the news to the general,” said Dick. “It is +going to be exceedingly dangerous getting back through the lines of the +Indians, and I have had more experience in woodcraft than you have, and +think I can slip through with greater ease and safety than you could.” + +“I’ll go, Dick,” said Tom. “I can slip through the Indians’ lines, all +right.” + +“No, you and Ben stay here,” said Dick. “I’ll take the news to General +Greene, and we’ll be back here pretty quick, with the army, and then the +redskins, redcoats and Tories will have to look out.” + +“Good!” said Mr. Holden. “The quicker the soldiers get here, the better +it will be for the patriots in this part of the country.” + +Shortly after midnight Dick said good-by to Tom, Ben and the settlers, +and passing out of the stockade he stole away in the darkness. + + + + + CHAPTER IV + + Dick and the Indians + + +Dick Dare had not gone twenty yards before he became convinced that +there were Indians in the vicinity. At once he realized that he would +have to be very careful, or he would be unable to get through the lines +without being captured. He had been successful, always, in getting +through the lines of British sentinels, but these redskins were a +different proposition. They were perfectly at home in this region, and, +too, they were used to being about at night. They possessed the ability +to know what was going on around them, even in the darkness, they +seemingly having the catlike faculty of seeing in the dark. + +But the knowledge that he was going to have a hard time getting past the +Indians only made Dick the more determined to do so. He was eager to +prove that he was a good scout and spy, and if he could get through the +Indians’ lines without being discovered or captured, then he would have +done something to be proud of. + +So he settled down and began advancing very slowly and cautiously. He +would advance a few feet and then stop and lie flat on the ground, and +listen intently. Several times, while lying thus, silent and motionless, +he heard sounds in various directions that he knew were not made by wild +animals of the forest, but were made by Indians, without doubt. + +He heard the calls of night birds, which, so his keen and well trained +ear told him, were not made by birds, but were simply good imitations, +made by the redskins. Dick could imitate the majority of the birds of +the forest, in their calls to one another, himself, and so was able to +determine that these calls were not genuine. + +And this made him exercise the greatest possible care. He could tell, by +the various directions the sounds came from, that the fort was +surrounded, and he did not doubt but what an attack was contemplated. He +would have gone back into the fort and told them what he had learned, +had he deemed it necessary; but he knew that sentinels were posted, and +that the redskins could not spring a surprise on the settlers, so he +felt that it would do no good to take this trouble. It was more +important that he get through the lines and then hasten to reach General +Greene with the news that he was needed down in that part of the +country. + +Presently he discovered, by hearing a call close at hand, that at least +one Indian was almost in front of him. He paused and lay silent and +motionless for a few moments, and then he began moving around, in a +semi-circle. + +Cautiously he proceeded, and his every nerve was tense and ready for +instant action, in case his presence was discovered and he was attacked. +He had gone perhaps twenty yards, and was about opposite the point where +he had heard the sound that indicated the presence of the Indian, when +he heard a slight rustling, as of a body moving toward him, through the +grass. He listened, and became convinced that an Indian was approaching +him, and he guessed that the redskin had heard him. + +Dick lay still, his mind working swiftly. What should he do? Should he +wait and engage the redskin in a combat, or should he leap up and take +refuge in flight? + +It was a difficult question to answer, and as he was turning the matter +over in his mind, he heard the rustling coming closer and closer. He +must act quickly, or the Indian would be upon him. + +He suddenly decided that the best thing for him to do was to take refuge +in flight. True, he realized he might run right into the arms of the +Indians, but on the other hand, if he remained where he was, and was +attacked by the redskin, the sound of the combat would bring a score of +Indians to the spot quickly, and he would be captured. + +Having made up his mind, Dick acted. Leaping to his feet, he dashed away +at the top of his speed, and instantly he heard the sound of pursuit and +knew that the Indian he had heard slipping up on him had given chase. + +On the youth ran, and suddenly a peculiar, quavering cry went up from +his pursuer’s lips. It was evidently a signal telling his brother braves +that a man from the fort was among them, and for them to try to capture +him. Realizing this, Dick was on the alert, and expected every moment to +feel himself seized by the hands of the redskins. + +He had reached the heavy woods, however, before he became aware of the +near presence of any redskins, and then he thought he heard several +right in front of him. + +Whirling, he ran toward the left, at the top of his speed, and then +began such a game of hide and seek as Dick had never engaged in before. +His quick ears would tell him when there were Indians in front of him, +and he would turn in some other direction, with the result that in going +a distance of two or three hundred yards, he must have gone at least a +mile. + +Two or three times he had felt hands clutching him, but he had managed +to tear himself loose, and finally he was enabled to continue his flight +straight ahead, not hearing any sounds to indicate the presence of +redskins in front of him. + +Behind him he heard the sounds of pattering feet, however, and the +guttural exclamations of the redskins, and knew he was being pursued. He +felt that now that he had succeeded in getting through their lines +without being captured he could escape, however, and did not feel very +much alarmed. + +[Illustration: “So ye think ye’re safe, do ye, hey?”] + +Dick was an exceedingly swift runner, and it was to this that he owed +his success, so far, and to this fact he finally owed his good fortune +in getting away from his pursuers, for he gradually drew away from the +Indians, and when they had followed him a mile or so, they gave up the +pursuit and turned back. Doubtless they decided that it was of more +importance to be ready to attack the fort when the time came than to +keep on in pursuit of a fugitive that could run like the one they had +been after. + +And when he was certain that the redskins had ceased pursuing him, Dick +slackened his speed to a walk, went onward at a moderate pace, and +presently paused and stood listening intently. + +He did not hear a sound in the direction from which he had come, and he +drew a breath of relief, and murmured aloud: “They have given up the +chase and gone back. That is good. Now I am safe, and will take it a +little easier.” + +“So ye think ye’re safe, do ye, hey?” exclaimed a voice almost in Dick’s +ear, and then he felt a pair of exceedingly strong arms encircle his +body, pinioning his arms to his side. He struggled fiercely, but could +not break the hold of the person who had seized him. + +“Oh, thar ain’t no use tryin’ to git loose,” chuckled a gruff voice. +“I’ve got ye, an’ ye kain’t git erway.” + + + + + CHAPTER V + + Gabe Gurley + + +About two hours after Dick Dare left the fort, the Indians made the +attack. They tried to take the settlers by surprise, by slipping up to +the fort, but were discovered and fired upon, and then they uttered wild +yells and made a desperate attack. + +The settlers made a strong and determined defense, firing as fast as +they could reload their rifles, and the calls of the redskins were +varied by yells and shrieks of pain, proving that some of the bullets +found lodgment in the bodies of the redskins. + +Then, suddenly a cry went up from the settlers, for they saw that the +stockade-wall was on fire. The Indians had not been able to break the +wall down, or to scale it, so they had set fire to it. + +There was a well inside the enclosure, however, and the settlers began +carrying water and pouring it down on the fire, from the platform on the +inside of the fence, and two or three of the settlers were wounded by +arrows while engaged in this work, but they finally succeeded in putting +the fire out. + +The Indians, disappointed, repeated their war-whoops and yells +betokening anger. Then they withdrew, having given up the attack, at +least for the present. But that they had given up the matter permanently +was not likely. + +The settlers were glad of the cessation of hostilities, however, and it +afforded them an opportunity for reloading their rifles, and, for needed +rest, a watch was set so as to be ready for another attack, if it was +made. + +Morning came at last, however, without a renewal of the onslaught, and +the settlers took a look around. They saw that the fort was surrounded +by at least a hundred redskins, and they realized that the Indians +intended to stay till they captured the fort. + +“They will put in the day planning, and to-night they’ll attack us +again,” said Mr. Holden, after looking at the Indians a while. + +“Yes, that’ll be their game,” said Mr. Perkins. + +“But they can’t capture the fort, can they?” asked Tom Dare, who was +standing on the platform, beside the two men, taking a look at the +Indians. + +“I don’t think they could capture the fort,” said Perkins, “but likely +they’ll lay siege to it and try to make us surrender, arter our grub +gives out.” + +“But you have enough to last quite a while, haven’t you?” + +“Two or three days, I guess.” + +“Well, Dick will be back with General Greene and his army in four or +five days, I think.” + +“Maybe we can hold out till then,” said Mr. Perkins. + +“I think we can,” said Holden. + +“We can fight them off, I feel certain,” said another of the settlers. +“So all we will have to do will be to go easy on the rations till +General Greene gets here.” + +“Yes, that is what we’ll do,” said Perkins. + +Tom and Ben were greatly interested. This was the first time they had +ever had anything to do with fighting Indians, and they were glad that +they had come down into this region of the Cherokees, for there was a +peculiar glamour to this kind of warfare that did not attach to fighting +against the redcoats. + +“Dick will miss most of the fighting by going on the trip,” said Tom. + +“Yes, but there will be plenty of Indian fighting after he gets back,” +said Ben. + +“Yes, likely. And it will be a great relief to the people of this part +of the country when the patriot soldiers get down here and get after the +redskins.” + +“Yes, so it will.” + +About the middle of the afternoon there was seen to be considerable stir +among the Indians to the northward, near the edge of the forest, and Mr. +Holden, who, with Perkins and two or three others of the settlers, and +Tom and Ben, were standing on the platform, watching, said: + +“Look. There’s that renegade-Tory, Gabe Gurley.” + +Sure enough, a white man was seen standing among the redskins, and it +could be seen that he was an exceedingly large man, a giant in size, in +fact. He was talking to the Indians, and gesticulating, and they were +listening with evident interest. + +“What a big fellow he is!” exclaimed Tom. + +“And a big scoundrel,” said Perkins. + +“Yes, he’s worse’n the redskins,” said another of the settlers. + +“I don’t like to see him there among the redskins,” said Mr. Holden, a +sober look on his face. “He may put them up to some scheme to enable +them to capture the fort before General Greene and his army can get +here.” + +“We’ll have to be on our guard, sure enough,” said Perkins. + +“I hope Dick didn’t meet him,” exclaimed Tom, + +“It isn’t likely that he did,” said Ben. + +Presently the renegade, Gabe Gurley, ceased talking to the Indians and +came striding toward the fort, holding up his hand, with the palm toward +the settlers. + +“He wants to talk to us,” said Perkins. + +“Yes,” said Holden. “I s’pose we might as well hear what he has to say.” + +“Yes.” + +Gurley advanced till within about fifty feet of the stockade-wall, and +then stopped. “How are ye, Holden? How are ye, Perkins?” he called out. + +“What do you want, Gabe Gurley?” asked Holden, rather gruffly. + +“I’ve come to ask ye to surrender,” was the reply. + +“Then you are wasting your time, Gurley.” + +“Ye mean thet ye won’t surrender?” + +“Yes.” + +“Ye’d better. We can stay here till yer grub gives out, an’ then ye’ll +have to surrender, an’ ye might as well do et now.” + +“We have provisions to last us till--” + +Holden hesitated, but Gurley finished: “Till Gin’ral Greene an’ his army +gits here, ye was goin’ to say, hey?” with a grin. “Well, they won’t git +here as soon as ye think, I can tell ye that.” + +“Why won’t they?” asked Holden. + +“Because I captured ther young feller what ye sent frum here last night, +to bring Greene, an’ I’ve got ’im a pris’ner, an’ so he won’t carry the +news, as ye expected, an’ Greene an’ his army won’t be here--not for a +good while, anyhow.” + +An exclamation escaped the lips of Tom Dare. “You big ruffian!” he +cried. “You say you captured my brother?” + +The giant looked at Tom and grinned. “I don’ know whether I captured +your brother or not, but I do know that I captured a young feller what +was on his way to bring Gin’ral Greene here.” + +“That was my brother,” cried Tom, angrily. “Where is he, now?” + +“Oh, he’s where I can put my han’s on ’im whenever I want to,” was the +reply. + +Tom jerked a pistol out of his belt and leveled it, and would have fired +at the ruffian, had not Mr. Perkins caught him by the arm. “Don’ shoot, +my boy,” he said. “Gurley’s a villain, and needs shootin’, but he’s +there under a truce, and we must not shoot him.” + +“Oh, all right,” said Tom. “That’s so. I won’t shoot him now, but he +made me forget myself when he said he had my brother a prisoner.” + +“An’ that’s another reason for not shooting him, Tom. If you only +wounded him, he’d most likely take revenge on your brother.” + +“That’s so. I never thought of that. But I’ll get even with him for +capturing Dick.” + +Gurley had watched this little episode with a slight show of alarm, at +first, but when he saw that the youth was not going to fire, he grinned, +and said: “Lucky ye didn’t shoot, youngster.” Then to Holden he went on: +“What about it? Are ye goin’ to surrender?” + +“No,” was the decided reply. + +“Ye’ll have to sooner or later, ye know.” + +“No, you won’t,” said Tom, in a low, eager voice. “I’ll go out and away +to-night, and will try to find and rescue Dick. But if I can’t find him, +I’ll go and bring General Greene and his army.” + +Holden nodded to Tom, and then replied to Gurley: “We will not +surrender, so you might as well go back to your friends, the redskins, +and tell them so.” + +“Oh, all right,” growled Gurley. “But, ye’ll be sorry ye didn’t +surrender, Holden.” + +“I don’t think so.” + +With an angry exclamation, the renegade turned and strode back and +rejoined the Indians, to whom he talked energetically, gesticulating +vigorously the while. + +Then the Indians shook their bows and tomahawks at the settlers and gave +vent to a series of wild, thrilling war-whoops. + + + + + CHAPTER VI + + In the Cabin + + +Dick Dare was unable to break the hold of the man who had seized him. He +struggled fiercely, but as the man was a giant in size, and very strong, +he was thrown upon the ground and was utterly helpless. The man held the +youth without seemingly having to exert himself very greatly. + +“Who are you?” pantingly asked Dick. “And why have you seized me?” + +“My name is Gabe Gurley,” was the reply. “I’m a loyalist, an’ as I know +ye have been runnin’ frum ther Injuns, what are helpin’ the British, ye +must be a rebel, an’ so I’ve grabbed ye, an’ll hold ye till I fin’ out +about ye.” + +“You had better let me go,” said Dick sternly. “You have no right to +hold me.” + +“Wal, I’m goin’ to hold ye ennyhow. I’ll jest bind yer arms, an’ then +ye’ll come with me to my cabin.” + +The fellow then bound Dick’s wrists together, with a piece of rope that +he produced from a pocket, after which he allowed him to rise, then he +took hold of his arm and conducted him through the woods a distance of +nearly a mile, when they reached a rude cabin that stood in the depths +of a thick growth of bushes and timber. + +The fellow lighted a candle, and then Dick saw that his captor was a +ruffian in appearance, a huge giant of a fellow, who looked capable of +murder, if he took a notion. + +“He’s a regular desperado,” thought Dick. + +The ruffian turned and surveyed his prisoner. “Humph,” he grunted +presently. “Ye’re a youngster. Who are ye, ennyhow?” + +Dick decided that it would be best to give a fictitious name, so he said +that his name was Dick Fenton, and that he lived about one hundred miles +to the northward and was on his way to visit relatives who lived about +fifty or seventy-five miles farther south. + +“You have made a mistake in making a prisoner of me,” he said. “I was +running from the Indians, awhile before you stopped me, true, but +anybody would run from a gang of Indians on the warpath.” + +“Yas, thet’s so,” was the reply. “But I guess I’ll hold ye a while, +ennyhow, till I fin’ out whether ye are tellin’ the truth or not.” + +“How long will that be?” asked Dick, with a sinking of the heart, for he +did not like the idea of being delayed from reaching General Greene with +the news that the patriot settlers were needing his help. + +“I don’ know. Ye’ll stay here till I tell ye ye may go, ennyhow, so ye +might as well make up your mind to thet.” + +“I don’t see any sense in such a proceeding on your part,” said Dick. + +“Uv course ye don’,” with a grin. “I wouldn’t expect ye to. But I do, +and here ye stay. In the mornin’ I’ll take a stroll an’ see if I can +find out anythin’ about ye, an’ then we’ll see about lettin’ ye go.” + +He put a bar across the door, and then, pointing to a bunk in one corner +of the room said: “You can sleep there. I’ll lay on a blanket on the +floor.” + +Dick knew it would do no good to argue with the ruffian, so he got into +the bunk, and lay down, after which Gurley blew out the light and lay +down on a blanket, and was soon snoring. + +Dick did not get to sleep. In fact, he began trying to get his hands +free, for he was eager to make his escape and go on his way to carry the +news to General Greene. + +Gurley had tied his wrists so securely he could not get them free, +however, and finally the youth gave up the attempt, and eventually +slept. + +Next morning Gurley cooked some corn cakes and potatoes for breakfast, +and after he had eaten, he untied Dick’s wrists and gave him some of the +food. Then he bound the youth’s wrists again, but not so tightly as +before, for the reason that Dick held his wrists in such a manner that +he could move them into a different position and the rope would be +loosened somewhat. + +An hour or so later Gurley said he was going away, and did not know how +long he would be gone. “As I can’t fasten the door,” he went on, “I will +tie yer feet, an’ then ye won’t be able to git away while I’m gone.” + +He got another piece of rope and bound Dick’s ankles, and then took his +departure. + +As soon as he was sure that Gurley was gone, Dick began working at the +rope binding his wrists. If he could get his wrists free, the rope about +his ankles could be quickly loosened. + +He worked hard at the rope binding his wrists, but was unable to make +much headway. The knots were tight, and the rope would not stretch. He +kept at it, however, and was pulling and tugging at a great rate, when +there was a thump against the door, and it flew open and into the room +came a huge timber wolf. + +At sight of the animal, Dick’s heart sank, and a feeling akin to fear +took hold upon him. It was not pleasant to be lying there, bound hand +and foot, and a huge, hungry wolf sniffing about within a few feet of +him. + +Dick guessed that the wolf had been attracted by the smell of the food +Gurley had cooked for breakfast, and that the animal was hungry was +evident by the way it nosed around for edibles, and snapped up several +small scraps of food that had fallen on the floor. + +Then, presently the wolf approached the bunk, in which Dick was lying, +and sniffed at him. Dick lay absolutely still, till he felt the animal’s +nose against his leg, and then, fearing he might be bitten, he gave his +leg a jerk, and yelled at the wolf: “Get out of here! Go away!” + +The wolf was startled into a snarl of surprise and fright, and leaped +backward to the middle of the floor, where it stood, glaring at Dick, +its eyes looking vicious indeed, its bared teeth showing. + +Again Dick yelled at the animal, and moved his legs in a threatening +manner, and the wolf shrank back somewhat, but after a few moments no +harm coming to him it began moving slowly forward, growling and showing +its teeth. + +Dick realized that he was in great danger, for the wolf was a big +fellow, indeed, and would have given the youth a good fight, even had +his hands and feet been free. As it was, with both hands and feet tied, +Dick felt that the chances were that he would be chewed up. + +Closer and closer came the wolf, and although Dick kept yelling at him, +and moving his legs as threateningly as possible, the animal would not +retreat. Closer and closer he came, until his nose was within six inches +of the youth’s body; then, as he seemed on the point of springing upon +him, Dick pushed out his arms suddenly, in an effort to frighten the +wolf away. Instead, however, the wolf made a quick snap, and seized the +rope in its teeth. In some manner the teeth became fastened in the rope, +and as the animal leaped backward, in alarm, Dick was pulled off the +bunk, and came to the floor with a thump. + +This frightened the animal still more, and he went clawing backward +across the room, trying to get his teeth loose, and presently his teeth, +being sharp, cut through the rope, weakening it so that Dick was able to +snap the remaining strands, and his arms were free. + +The wolf, however, angered, again sprang at Dick, and the youth, being +unable to get out of the way owing to his feet being tied, seized a +stool that was at hand and struck at the wolf, causing the animal to +struggle back, with a snarl of rage. + +Then ensued a battle such as is seldom seen--a youth with his ankles +bound, fighting against a hungry wolf, his only weapon being a clumsy +stool. + +Snarling, snapping, springing at the youth, the now infuriated animal +kept at work, and Dick rolled over and over, now and then striking at +the wolf with the stool, hitting it too occasionally, but this seemingly +only serving to make the animal the more fierce and angry. + +It was indeed a fierce battle, and there was no telling how it would +end, for the gaunt, hungry wolf was a very dangerous antagonist. But +Dick fought on with desperate energy. + + + + + CHAPTER VII + + Tom Tries Woodcraft + + +The settlers in the fort watched the actions of the Indians and the +renegade with some anxiety. They realized that unless General Greene and +his army came to their assistance, they would sooner or later either be +captured, or else would have to surrender, owing to running out of +provisions. + +And, if Gurley told the truth, Dick Dare had been captured and would not +be able to carry the news to General Greene. + +They discussed the situation, and Tom Dare reiterated his statement that +as soon as it was dark he would leave the fort, attempt to slip through +the lines of the Indians and go in search of Dick. Failing of finding +his brother, after a reasonable length of time given to searching, he +would then go on to the encampment of the patriot army and tell General +Greene of the predicament of the patriot settlers, and get him to come +to their relief. + +“Very well,” said Mr. Holden. “We shall be glad to have you do as you +suggest, my boy. But, it will be a difficult and dangerous matter +getting past those redskins. They have the fort surrounded, and will be +on the alert to prevent anyone getting away from here.” + +“I think I can succeed, sir,” said Tom, confidently. + +“I hope so, I am sure. In the meantime I will tell you as nearly as I +can where you will find Gurley’s hut, for there probably is where your +brother is held prisoner.” + +The rest of the afternoon passed quietly, the Indians making no move to +attack, but there could be little doubt but what they would make their +plans to execute some maneuver during the night. + +Soon after dark, Tom got ready to start on his dangerous undertaking. +Ben asked to be permitted to accompany him, but Tom said no, that he +could do better by himself. + +“I think I can get through the lines of the redskins, Ben,” he said. +“Don’t worry about me.” + +“All right. But you must be careful, Tom.” + +“I’ll be careful. Good-by.” + +“Good-by,” said Ben, as they shook hands, “and good luck.” + +Tom said good-by to the others, and then slipped out through the gate, +and stole softly away through the darkness. + +“Now, I will have to exercise care,” said Tom to himself. “It is not +going to be very easy to get through the lines of the Indians, for they +are better woodsmen than the redcoats.” + +He moved slowly and cautiously, till he was nearly to the edge of the +forest, and then he dropped onto his hands and knees and crawled +forward, slowly, pausing every few moments to listen. + +Finally he reached the margin of the woods without having heard any +sound of the redskins. Here he paused for a few minutes, leaning against +a tree, and listening intently for some sound from the Indians. + +He knew there must certainly be some of the redskins near at hand, and +so when he started onward again, he went slowly and exercised great +caution. He knew that the least sound would be heard, and he was careful +not to make any noise. + +On he went, moving as silently as a shadow, and without hearing any +sound to indicate the presence of the Indians. It was indeed trying to +his nerves, but Tom was a brave youth, and did not falter. + +How long it took Tom to make his way through the lines of the Indians he +did not know, but it seemed to him that several hours had passed by the +time he was at a point beyond the encircling line of redskins. Had he +not moved exceedingly slow, however, he would surely have been +discovered, and likely would have been captured. + +Rising to his feet, he moved onward, still slowly and cautiously, but he +did not hear any sounds to indicate the presence of Indians, and kept +steadily onward. + +When he had gone about half a mile, he paused and uttered a peculiar, +quavering whistle, low but penetrating in the stillness of the night. It +was a signal that he and Dick and Ben often used, when separated at +night. If Dick were within a radius of two hundred yards, he would hear +the whistle, and of course would answer it, unless gagged. + +Tom sounded the whistle three or four times, without receiving any +response, and then moved onward perhaps a quarter of a mile. Pausing +again, he sounded the signal as before. And as before, there was no +reply. He was not able to locate, in the dark, the cabin Gurley +occupied. + +So Tom moved onward, with occasional trips first to one side and then +the other, repeating the signal whistle, but he did not receive any +response, and finally decided that it would be useless to continue the +attempt to find Dick. + +“I would like to find him,” murmured Tom, “but it is like looking for a +needle in a haystack, and so I guess I will head for the patriot +encampment, and carry the news regarding the danger of the settlers in +the fort, to General Greene. Then, if Dick isn’t there, I will hasten +back and continue the search for him.” + +Having so determined, Tom set out in as direct a course as he could +follow, and walked swiftly. On he went, keeping it up till morning, when +he came to a cabin in the woods, and stopped and asked the man, who +looked to be a hunter, if he could get breakfast there. + +“I reckon so,” was the reply. And then the hunter asked, curiously: +“Whar ye goin’, young feller?” + +“To see some friends about seventy-five miles north of here,” was the +reply. + +“What’s yer name?” the fellow asked. + +“Tom Dare,” was the reply. + +“My name is Jeff Harkins. Come in an’ set down. I’ll hev the grub ready +purty soon.” + +Tom entered and took a seat, and when the food had been cooked and was +on the table, they sat up to the rude board and ate heartily. + +Just as they had finished, into the cabin walked six British soldiers, +and they leveled pistols at the heads of the two, and their leader, a +lieutenant, cried sternly: + +“Surrender, in the name of the king!” + + + + + CHAPTER VIII + + A Battle with a Wolf + + +The battle between Dick Dare and the wolf went on fiercely, in the old +cabin in the forest. The wolf was lithe and nimble, and evaded the +majority of the blows aimed at it by the youth, but at the same time it +dared not get close enough to bite, for fear of getting hit. + +Had Dick’s ankles been free, he would have been able to defend himself +much easier, and could soon have landed some telling blows, but his +ankles were tied, and he could not get around very well, having to stay +in one position, and merely keep turning his face toward the animal as +it made its rushes toward him. + +Finally, however, the youth managed to land a hard blow on the head of +the wolf, with the heavy stool, which knocked the animal off its feet. +Seeing his advantage, Dick threw himself forward, and struck the wolf +several blows, till finally the animal stretched out, apparently +lifeless. + +“Thank goodness!” murmured Dick, dropping to a sitting posture, and +panting at a great rate. “That was about the fiercest battle I ever had. +Now, to get my ankles free.” + +He drew a clasp-knife from his pocket and cut the rope binding his legs. +Then he sat down and chafed his ankles, till he got the blood to +circulating again. This done, he went to the door and looking out, saw +that the coast seemed to be clear. + +“I guess Gurley won’t be back for quite a while,” thought Dick. “I will +set out at once and make my way to the patriot encampment.” + +Dick left the cabin and made his way through the forest, heading +northward, and hastened onward as rapidly as he could. He had already +lost considerable time, and he was eager to reach the patriot encampment +as quickly as possible, and get General Greene and his army started to +the rescue of the settlers in the fort in Peaceful Valley. + +At noon Dick stopped at the house of a settler, and ate dinner there. He +learned that the settler was a patriot, and told him where he was going, +and why, and the settler told him he could have one of his horses to +ride. + +“Thank you, sir,” said Dick. “That is kind of you. I’ll leave the horse +here as we come back.” + +“That’s all right, Dick Dare. I am a patriot an’ want to do all I can to +help get help to the patriot settlers in Peaceful Valley.” + +Dick thanked him again, and a few minutes later was mounted on a horse +and riding northward proceeding now at a rapid pace. He believed that he +would be able to reach the patriot encampment by noon of the next day, +and by pushing onward nearly through the night, he was enabled to do so. + +As soon as he reached the encampment, he went to the headquarters tent, +and found General Greene and some of the other officers there, among +them Captain Morgan, of Dick’s own company. + +“Ah, Dick, how are you?” greeted the general, shaking the youth’s hand. + +“I am feeling well, sir,” was the reply. And then Dick, after shaking +hands with the other officers, said: “I have important news for you, +sir.” + +“Let’s hear the news, Dick?” eagerly. + +“Very well, sir.” And then Dick told about the desperate needs of the +settlers of Peaceful Valley, whose homes had been burned by the Indians, +and who were now in the little fort, surrounded by the Indians, who +would undoubtedly capture the patriots soon if help was not vouchsafed. + +“How far is the fort from here?” asked General Greene. + +“Nearly a hundred miles, I should judge.” + +“A good three days’ march from here,” said the general. “I think we had +better break camp and start with the entire force. Give the orders to +your respective companies, officers. We will move at once.” + +The officers saluted and hastened out, and Dick remained to answer the +questions that General Greene wished to ask about the location of the +fort, the number of the settlers, and particulars concerning the +Indians, etc. + +Within an hour after dinner, the little army was ready to start, and at +the word from General Greene, it set out on the march. + +In the lead rode General Greene and some of the officers, and Dick, +while behind came the soldiers, marching steadily, and with a grim, +determined look on their faces. They knew that they were going to the +rescue of a party of settlers surrounded by redskins, and were eager to +reach their destination and get a chance at the Indians. + +When evening came, they stopped for a brief interval on the bank of a +little stream. Here they built campfires, cooked and ate supper, and +after resting an hour, set out again, it being moonlight till after +midnight. + +They marched till the moon went down and it grew so dark they could not +see to make their way onward. Then they stopped and went into camp for +the rest of the night. + +They were up early next morning, however, these hardy patriots and after +having eaten breakfast, again set out, marching steadily onward till +noon, stopping then less than an hour, to eat a cold bite for dinner. + +They kept up the march till near midnight, again, with stops for supper, +and to rest a few minutes at a time. Then slept four or five hours, and +were up and away again. + +They arrived in the vicinity of Peaceful Valley about the middle of the +following afternoon, and stopped about a mile away, while Dick went +forward to reconnoiter and see what the Indians were doing, to ascertain +if they were still there and the fort had not been captured. + +Dick advanced at a moderate pace, keeping a sharp lookout around him, +till within about a third of a mile of the edge of the valley, and then +he made his way forward at a slower pace, pausing frequently, to look +about him, to see if there were any signs of redskins in the vicinity. + +Presently he paused and took a position behind a tree, gazing steadily +ahead. He had caught sight of the Indians. He got down on his hands and +knees and crawled forward, till he reached a point from which he could +see the fort, and after a careful survey, he came to the conclusion that +the Indians had not succeeded as yet in making the settlers surrender. + +“Good,” thought Dick. “I’ll return and make my report to General +Greene.” + +As he started to turn, however, to make his way back to where he had +left the patriot soldiers, he heard a rustling sound, and the next +moment he was confronted by seven or eight Indian warriors, who had +appeared from behind trees. + +Dick was taken by surprise, but did not intend to permit the redskins to +capture him, if he could help it, and drawing his pistols, he fired two +shots quickly, dropping one Indian, dead, and wounding another. Then he +sprang forward, in an attempt to make his escape, but the redskins, +giving utterance to thrilling war-cries, leaped upon him and bore him +struggling to the ground. + +He fought fiercely, for he wanted to make his escape and get back with +the patriot soldiers and help make the attack on the savages, but the +redskins were too numerous and too strong. He presently, therefore, +found himself made a prisoner, his wrists being bound with a piece of +thong. + +Then he was dragged forward into the presence of the main party of the +tribe, who had appeared in all directions when they heard the shots and +yells, and were advancing toward the spot where the encounter had taken +place. + +Dick was a prisoner in the hands of the redskins, within a few hundred +yards of the settlers in the fort, and also within half a mile of the +patriot soldiers. + + + + + CHAPTER IX + + In Search of Tom + + +Dick’s capture by the redskins resulted in making it possible for the +patriot soldiers to advance till close to the Indians without being +discovered, owing to the fact that the redskins were giving their +attention to their prisoner and were not keeping as sharp a lookout +around them as usual. + +When they did discover the soldiers, the latter were already within +range, and as the Indians started to flee, Dick, with rare presence of +mind, threw himself flat on the ground, at the same time yelling at the +top of his voice. “Fire, comrades! You won’t hit me.” + +The next moment a volley rang out, and ten or twelve of the Indians fell +dead or seriously wounded, while several of those who were able to run, +were wounded less severely. + +Then the soldiers came forward on the run, firing their pistols, and the +Indians fled at the top of their speed, their yells of fear, dismay and +anger commingled. + +They did not try to take their prisoner with them. Those unharmed were +glad to get away with their lives, and Dick’s comrades quickly freed his +arms, as he explained how he came to be in the hands of the redskins. + +“Your shots were the signal for us to advance,” said General Greene. “We +guessed that you had gotten into trouble, and so we hastened forward as +quickly as possible.” + +The settlers now came forth from the fort, and greeted General Greene, +his officers and the army warmly. + +“We were about out of provisions,” said Mr. Holden, “and could not have +held the redskins at bay much longer.” + +“Wasn’t there a white man among those Indians?” asked General Greene. “I +thought I saw one, a big fellow.” + +“Yes,” said Holden, “that was Gabe Gurley, a renegade. He is helping the +redskins plunder the homes of the patriots in this part of the country.” + +“That’s the scoundrel that captured me,” put in Dick. “He left me a +prisoner in an old cabin, but I managed to escape.” + +“He said he captured a young fellow, who he guessed was on his way to +carry news to the patriot army,” said Holden. + +“Yes,” said Dick. And then he looked around, and not seeing Tom, asked +Ben where his brother was. + +“Tom left here the night after you did, Dick,” was the reply. “He said +he would try to find you and rescue you, but that if he failed in that, +he would go on and carry the news regarding the settlers’ danger to +General Greene. You didn’t see him then?” + +“No, I haven’t seen him since I left here.” + +A sober look settled on Dick’s face, and it was evident that he was +worried. Ben looked anxious, also. + +“Where can Tom be, Dick?” asked Ben, after a few moments. + +“I’m afraid he has fallen into the hands of the Indians, or of a gang of +Tories,” was the reply. + +Ben nodded. “I think likely you are right,” he agreed. “What are you +going to do?” + +“Hunt for him, Ben.” + +“When?” + +“I shall start at once.” + +“All right. I’ll go with you.” + +“I’ll explain matters to General Greene, and get permission to go in +search of him, Ben. I’ll be back in a few moments.” + +While Dick was talking to General Greene, Ben told the settlers about +Tom being missing, and that he and Dick were going in search of the +youth. + +The settlers, who had taken a great liking to the three patriot youths, +expressed sympathy, and several offered to accompany the two, but Dick, +when he joined them and they offered their services, said that he and +Ben would be able to find Tom, likely, without assistance, and then they +said good-by and set out, going toward the north. + +“I suppose we will return to Peaceful Valley, after we find Tom,” said +Ben. + +“Yes, Ben. General Greene said he would remain there a while, and make a +campaign against the Indians, so his army will be camped there for a +while.” + +“We may find Tom pretty quickly,” said Ben, hopefully. + +“I hope so,” said Dick. “But this is a big country, and if he has been +made a prisoner by Indians or Tories, we have no knowledge of the +direction the force might take.” + +“True,” said Ben. “Well, we’ll do our best to find and rescue him.” + +They proceeded northward, moving at a fair pace, and keeping a sharp +lookout all around them, for some signs of either redskins or Tories. + +They were sharp-eyed, and if there were any enemies, in view, they would +see them. + +When they had reached the cabin where Dick had been made a prisoner by +Gabe Gurley, they paused and rested a while, and Dick told Ben the story +of his fight with the wolf. + +They soon set out again, making an occasional inquiry and continued +onward till they had gone several miles farther toward the north. Then +they paused, held a council, and decided to turn to the left and go in +the direction of Ninety-Six. + +“It is likely,” said Dick, “that if Tom was captured by Tories, he would +be taken to Ninety-Six, and so if we go in that direction, we may +succeed in learning something regarding his whereabouts. We’ll inquire +at all the settlers’ houses we come to.” + +“That will be the best plan,” agreed Ben. + +They headed westward, now, and walked at a moderate pace, keeping a +sharp lookout around them, for they realized that every step they took +in this direction led them deeper into the enemy’s country. The nearer +they approached Ninety-Six, the more likely they would be to encounter +parties of Indians, Tories or redcoats. + +An hour or so later they came to a cabin in the woods, and knocked on +the door. It was opened presently, by a woman of middle age, who looked +at the youths somewhat wonderingly, and said: “How d’ye do?” + +“Good afternoon, ma’am,” said Dick. “I wish to know if you have seen a +party of Indians or British soldiers around here, any time to-day?” + +“Ye’re rebels, hain’t ye?” the woman asked, a hard look coming over her +face. + +“No, we’re not rebels,” said Dick, guessing that the woman was a +loyalist. “Will you kindly answer my question?” + +“No, I won’t,” was the reply. “I’m sure ye’re rebels, an’ ye ain’t goin’ +to get any information out of me.” Then she shut the door in the faces +of the youths. + +Dick and Ben looked at each other in rather a disconcerted manner, and +then Dick said: “Oh, well, perhaps we may secure some information at the +next house we come to.” + +Then they set out, and the house was soon out of sight behind them. + +The youths kept onward till they came to another cabin, which stood in a +little clearing in the forest, and a woman opened the door when they +knocked, as at the other cabin. But this woman answered Dick’s questions +without hesitation, stating that she had not seen any parties of Indians +or British soldiers. + +The youths then bought some provisions, and thanking the woman, went on +their way. They did not find another cabin before nightfall, however, +and went into camp soon after dark, on the bank of a little stream. + +They built a small campfire, cooked their supper, ate heartily, and +then, after sitting there, talking a while, Ben lay down and went to +sleep, while Dick sat up, it being their intention to take turns at +standing guard throughout the night. They were in a hostile country, and +might be approached and captured by redskins, Tories or redcoats while +they slept. + +Dick stayed awake till midnight, and then woke Ben and lay down in his +turn to get some sleep. + +Ben, although he had slept several hours, was still drowsy, and +presently he dropped off to sleep again--only to be awakened later on by +voices, and he looked up with a start, Dick awakening and rising to a +sitting posture at the same tune, and they gazed with consternation on a +party of redskins, fifteen or twenty in number, who had come upon them +unawares, and surrounded them while they slept. Their ugly, painted +faces looked fierce and threatening in the faint light from the moon, +which shone down upon the scene, through an opening in the trees. + +“Ugh,” grunted one of the Indians, grinning fiendishly, and brandishing +a tomahawk threateningly, “we got young white man heap plenty. No try +fight, or we kill, ugh.” + +The youths gazed at the redskins in silent dismay. + + + + + CHAPTER X + + At Fort Ninety-Six + + +The British soldiers had quickly tied the hands of Tom and Harkins, and +then set out through the forest with the two prisoners in their midst. + +“Where are you taking us?” asked Tom. + +“To Ninety-Six,” was the reply. + +“How far is that from here?” + +“About fifty miles.” + +“Why have you made us prisoners?” + +“Because you are rebels.” + +“Why do you think I am a rebel?” + +“We have known that Harkins is a rebel for quite a while, and the fact +that you were in his company proves that you are one also.” + +“That is poor reasoning,” said Tom. “I was on my way up north to see +some of my folks, and stopped at Mr. Harkins’ cabin for breakfast. He’ll +tell you that I am speaking the truth.” + +“Where do your folks live, that you were going to see?” + +“About a hundred miles from here.” + +The redcoat laughed derisively. “I think it more than likely that you +are a rebel spy,” he said. “We will take you to Ninety-Six in company +with Harkins, anyhow.” + +Tom realized that it would do no good to talk to the redcoat, so he +ceased, and walked onward in silence. + +All that day they continued a steady tramp, and camped that evening +beside a stream, remaining there till morning. Then they resumed the +journey, and reached the fort at Ninety-Six about the middle of the +afternoon. + +Tom, knowing that it was General Greene’s intention to attempt to +capture Ninety-Six, later on, took note of the surroundings with a keen +and critical eye, and he decided that it would be a difficult matter to +capture the fort, as it was strongly situated. + +“If they have a strong force in the fort, it will be a big job to get +the better of them,” he thought. “Well, I will try to learn all I can +while I am here, and then if I succeed in making my escape, I will have +some information to carry to General Greene.” + +Harking had not had much, to say during the trip to Ninety-Six, but it +was evident that he was not very well pleased at having been made a +prisoner. + +As soon as they were within the fort, the redcoats took Tom and Harkins +before the commander, Colonel Cruger, who eyed them sternly for a few +moments, and then said: + +“Who are these men, lieutenant?” + +“This man is Harkins, the outlaw that has been trying to organize a +company of rebels,” was the reply. “And this young fellow says his name +is Tom Dare, and that he was on his way to see some of his folks up +north a hundred miles or so. He was at Harkins’ cabin when we got there, +and so we brought him along.” + +“H’m,” said the colonel. Then to Tom’s companion he said: “I suppose you +are sorry, now, Harkins, that you took the side of the rebels?” + +Harkins, who was a quiet, determined man, shook his head. “No, I’m not +sorry,” he said. + +“You will be sorry that you’re a rebel, before we get through with you,” +sternly. + +“I am not a rebel.” + +“What are you, then, if not a rebel?” was the query. + +“A patriot,” was the dignified reply. + +“Bah,” sneered the officer, “a distinction without a difference.” + +“It makes considerable difference to me,” said Harkins. “I do not +consider that the patriots are rebels. They are fighting for their +independence, which they are entitled to, which doesn’t make them +rebels.” + +“Well, they’ll never get their independence,” was the colonel’s reply. +“They will lose the fight, and will have to again take up their +allegiance to the king.” + +“Perhaps, but I don’t believe it,” was the reply. + +“If you will join a company of loyalists that I have formed, here, I +will overlook your past actions in trying to organize a company of +rebels,” said the colonel. + +Harkins shook his head. “I will never take up arms in the service of the +king,” he said. + +“Very well, then,” exclaimed the colonel, angrily. “Take him to the +guard-house.” + +A couple of soldiers conducted Harkins from the room, and then Cruger +looked sternly at Tom, and said: + +“You are a rebel, are you not?” + +Tom shook his head. “No,” he said. + +“You are loyal to the king?” + +“I haven’t given the matter much thought,” said the youth. “I suppose I +am what would be termed neutral.” + +“Then you would have no objections to joining the company that I spoke +of to Harkins?” + +Tom was silent a few moments. He was doing some swift thinking. He +quickly decided that he could learn more regarding the strength of the +fort, if he were to have the freedom that would come with being a member +of the company in question; and also he would have a better chance to +make his escape. So he said, quietly: “I will join the company, sir, +unless you will let me go on my way up north to see my folks.” + +The colonel shook his head. “I think I shall hold you prisoner, unless +you join the company,” he said, “so you had better join.” + +“Very well.” + +The colonel then ordered that Tom be conducted to the quarters occupied +by Captain Kane and his company of loyalists, and soon the youth stood +in the captain’s presence. When the soldier that had conducted Tom +thither explained to Captain Kane that Tom was to be a new recruit, the +captain said: “Very well; glad to have all the recruits I can get. What +is your name?” + +“Tom Dare.” + +The captain wrote this in a book. Then he asked: “Where do you live?” + +“About fifty miles south of here,” was the reply. + +The captain then asked a few more questions, and told Tom he was a +member of the company and to make himself at home and get acquainted +with his comrades. + +“Very well, and thank you,” said the youth. + +Then he began mingling with the other members of the company and +engaging them in conversation, and quickly got acquainted with quite a +number. He was a good-natured, jolly youth, and could make friends +easily, and he endeavored to make a good impression, now, for he wished +to learn all he could about the fort, and its strength, and also its +weaknesses, with a view to carrying the information to General Greene as +soon as he could make his escape. + +His only worry was, what had become of his brother Dick? + + + + + CHAPTER XI + + At the Stake + + +Dick and Ben were horrified, as well as amazed when they were confronted +by the encircling gang of Indians. + +That they could not escape was evident, for the redskins had them at +such a disadvantage it would be folly to try to do so. They would be +either cut down by tomahawks or pierced by arrows before they could draw +their pistols. + +The Indian who had spoken first now said something to his companion +braves in a guttural voice, and a couple advanced and bound the arms of +Dick and Ben together behind their backs. + +Then they were encompassed about by the redskins and conducted away +through the forest. They traveled westward for a period of two or three +hours, and then they reached the camp of the Indians. + +Dick and Tom were placed in a wigwam near the center of the village, and +guards were placed about the wigwam. + +“Well, this isn’t very pleasant, Dick,” said Ben, when they were alone. + +“No, it isn’t, Ben,” was the reply. + +“I wonder what they’ll do with us?” + +“I don’t know. Hold us prisoners, I suppose.” + +“Do you think they are likely to burn us at the stake?” asked Ben, an +anxious note in his voice. + +“I hardly think so,” was the reply. “I haven’t heard that the Cherokee +Indians torture prisoners.” + +“Indians are not to be trusted,” said Ben. + +“Well, we’ll have to wait till morning and see what they intend doing,” +said Dick. Then presently he went on: “I wonder where Tom is?” + +“Possibly the Indians have got him a prisoner also, Dick.” + +“Possibly, but I hope not. We must try to find out.” + +They talked a while longer, and then lay down on the skins of wild +animals that constituted their beds, and presently went to sleep, and in +spite of their dangerous situation, they slept soundly till morning. + +Food was brought them, after a while, and a couple of braves stood guard +over them while they ate. Then their hands were bound again, and they +were left to themselves an hour or more. + +Then a couple of braves entered, and the two youths were conducted to a +point where a circle of Indians sat on the ground, while in the center +sat a big, ugly-looking Indian at least fifty years of age. This was the +chief, and the youths were taken in front of him. + +“Ugh,” he grunted. “Young white men cause a lot uv braves to die over in +Peaceful Valley. Young white men’s lives must pay for braves. You die +to-night, at the stake.” + +The youths glanced at each other, and then looked at the old chief +searchingly. They were trying to see whether he meant what he said, or +not. And from the grim look on his face, they guessed that he did mean +absolutely what he said. The part the youths had played in the affairs +at Peaceful Valley had angered the Indians, and they intended taking +revenge, now that they had the two captives helpless and in their power. + +“Take um away,” said the chief, with a wave of his hand, and Dick and +Ben were conducted back to the wigwam. As soon as they were alone, they +looked at each other for a few moments in silence, a look of dismay on +their faces. + +“The outlook is not very pleasing for us, Dick,” said Ben, presently. + +“You are right, Ben. I wonder if we could escape?” + +Ben shook his head. “Not much chance of that,” he said. “Our arms are +bound, and the wigwam is guarded. We couldn’t get away.” + +“I guess you are right. But I don’t relish being burned at the stake, +Ben.” + +“Neither do I.” + +“Perhaps we can make a break and escape as we are being taken to the +place where they intend to conduct the ceremonies,” said Dick, +thoughtfully. + +“I am for making the attempt, Dick.” + +“Well, we will do our best.” + +The time passed slowly, that day, but also it passed faster than the two +youths liked, for every hour that rolled away brought them nearer to the +torture-stake. + +After supper, that evening, they sat and waited in almost complete +silence. They did not exchange many words, for they did not feel like +talking. They reiterated their determination to try to make their +escape, however, if any opportunity presented itself. + +Presently it grew dark, and the youths heard considerable stirring +about. They judged that the Indians were getting ready for the ceremony +of burning them at the stake. + +Slowly the time passed, and then presently into the wigwam came four +Indian braves. They seized hold of the arms of Dick and Ben, and hustled +them out of the wigwam, and conducted them toward a point just outside +the edge of the village, where a fire was burning. As they drew nearer, +the youths saw that several piles of wood had been gathered, and they +knew that this was to be piled about them, and set fire to. In spite of +the fact that they were brave youths, they shuddered. + +They were led to a couple of tall, slender trees, about a foot in +diameter, and their backs were placed against the trees. The moment had +come when if at all the youths must make an attempt to get away, and +suddenly they gave a strong wrench and attempted to jerk away from their +captors’ grasp and make their escape, but they were quickly seized by a +number of strong hands and held against the trees, while they were +securely bound there with thongs. + +Then the Indians began piling the wood around them, against their legs, +while all the members of the band gathered around, to watch the +proceedings. + +Then brands from the fire were brought and stuck in among the dry wood +that had been piled around them, and soon the wood was on fire and +burning at a brisk rate. + +Dick and Ben looked at each other, with despair in their eyes. They +could see no possible chance of escape. + +Louder crackled the burning wood, and as the flames neared the limbs of +the prisoners, the redskins began chanting a guttural song of triumph. + + + + + CHAPTER XII + + Fritz and the Indians + + +General Greene had a council with his officers, and with the settlers of +Peaceful Valley, and mapped out a plan of campaign against the Indians. + +He decided to send out three forces of one hundred each, and have them +go to the south, and west, and look for the bands of marauding redskins. + +“We must put a stop to such work as has been going on here,” he said. +“Here in Peaceful Valley all the homes of the settlers have been burned +to the ground, and the Indians will be doing the same at other points, +unless they are prevented, and the only way to prevent them is to give +them such a rough handling that they will be glad to retire to their +villages and be peaceful and quiet.” + +The other officers and the settlers agreed with him, and General Greene +named three officers to take charge of the three parties of soldiers, +Captain Morgan being one of the officers named, and he would, of course, +take his company. + +“I wish that I had the Dare Boys here, to go with me,” he said. “I +always feel that I can get good reconnoitering work done if Dick Dare is +with me. But, it is not likely that he will be back in time to go with +my company.” + +“Likely not,” said General Greene, “but if he should come soon after you +leave, I will send him after you, if you wish.” + +The three officers after making preparations took their departure, with +their companies, and went in diverging directions, so as to cover as +large a territory as possible. + +The company with Captain Morgan made its way slowly westward, keeping a +sharp lookout ahead, and to the right and the left, looking eagerly for +signs of Indians, but evening came and they had not succeeded. They were +then about twelve miles from Peaceful Valley, and they went into camp on +the bank of a creek, in the midst of the woods. + +Sentinels were stationed, for there was danger of an attack in the +night, and the soldiers proceeded to cook and eat their suppers, they +having brought sufficient provisions to last them several days. + +Among the soldiers of this company were Tim Murphy, a jolly, +good-hearted Irishman and Fritz Schmockenburg, a Dutchman, and they were +great friends, though they quarreled good-naturedly a fair portion of +the time. They were great friends of the Dare Boys, too, and were never +so happy when Dick and Tom were not with the company. + +“How you vos lige dis Injun fighdin’, Tim?” asked Fritz, as they sat +beside each other on a log, eating their supper. + +“Foine,” was the reply. “It is more excitin’ than foightin’ ridcoats, +Dootchy. Don’t ye think so, yersilf?” + +“Yah, I lige id firsd rate. But they are ugliness to loog at, und dot is +so.” + +“The only t’ing Oi don’t loike about it, Fritz,” said Tim, with a sly +wink at some of his comrades nearby, “is thot av the ridskins catch ye, +they’ll scalp ye, an’ then they’ll tie ye up to a stake an’ burn ye, +sure an’ they will.” + +Fritz looked worried. “Dot vould not be pleasantness, alretty,” he said. + +“Oi should say not, Dootchy. Take care thot they don’t capture ye, +Fritz.” + +“I vill loog ouid dot dey don’t catch me, Tim Murphies.” + +“You had betther, me bye.” + +An hour or two after supper Fritz was sent to do sentinel duty, and he +took his station about one hundred yards from camp, and stood, musket in +hand, trying to peer into the darkness that encompassed him about. + +Fritz was not a coward by any means, but he was always a bit fearful of +being slipped up on by an enemy in the darkness, and so he stood there, +looking eagerly around, and listening intently. + +He heard occasional sounds, such as are usually to be heard in the +timber at night, and at each sound he would grip his musket tightly, and +face in the direction the sound came from, ready to fire if an enemy +appeared. + +After a while, however, he became somewhat used to the noises, and did +not start or show signs of nervousness. Still, he was not very well +pleased with the work of standing sentinel. + +“I haf heard dot der retskins are so slyness dot dey gan slip up close +midout anybody hearin’ dem,” Fritz muttered. “I vouldn’t lige to haf dem +slip up on me, dot vay.” + +Slowly the time passed, and Fritz was standing leaning against a tree, +after a while, resting his hands on the muzzle of his musket. + +He had been standing this way perhaps ten or fifteen minutes, when +suddenly he heard a terrible racket in front of him. It startled Fritz, +who thought that of course the noise was made by Indians, and he leveled +his musket and fired a shot as quickly as possible, and then ran toward +the encampment, yelling loudly: + +“Injuns! Der Injuns are comin’!” + +He did not stop till he was within the encampment, and the soldiers were +up, muskets in hand, and many asked eagerly where the Indians were. + +“Dey’re comin’ bretty quickness!” cried Fritz. “I shot some uf dem, und +der rest vill be here quick, alretty. Be ready to shoot dem!” + +The soldiers stood there, peering into the depths of the forest, but +could not see any signs of Indians; nor was there any sound to indicate +the presence of redskins. + +“What kind of a noise did you hear, Fritz?” asked one of the soldiers. + +“Oh, id vos a terrible racket, lige a lot uf Injuns fighdin’.” + +“Sure an’ Oi don’t belave ye heard inny Injuns at all, Dootchy,” said +Tim. “Come wid me, an’ we’ll find out phwat made the racket.” + +One of the soldiers seized a brand from the fire, and quite a number +made their way to the spot where Fritz had heard the noise, and there, +stretched on the ground, dead, they found a wildcat. + +“Ho, ho, ho!” laughed Tim. “Sure an’ it’s a woildcat ye wur afther +thinkin’ wur Injuns.” + +“He made a pretty good shot in the darkness, anyhow,” said another +soldier. + +“Veil, I am alvays a good shot, alretty,” said Fritz. “But der wildcats +made so much racket dot I though dere vos a lot uv redsgins comin’.” + +“If there were any redskins in the vicinity, you scared them away,” said +a soldier. + +“Yah, I guess dot dey vouldn’t come back tonight, alretty,” said Fritz. + +The soldiers jollied Fritz a while, and then went back to camp and lay +down and were soon asleep. + +Fritz remained on sentinel duty an hour or so longer, and then was +relieved from duty. But next morning the soldiers had quite a lot of +sport jollying Fritz about his wildcat that he thought was a gang of +Indians coming to surprise the camp. + + + + + CHAPTER XIII + + Tom and the Redcoats + + +The day after Tom Dare became a member of the company of British +soldiers, he went with a party of about twenty on a trip toward the +southward, where it was said the patriots were thick, nearly all being +patriots in fact. + +Captain Kane instructed Lieutenant Wicks, who was to have charge of the +party, to plunder the patriot homes and take prisoners, where the +patriots showed signs of resistance or anger. + +“Bring them here,” he said, “and we will make them join our force and +fight for the king.” + +“All right, Captain Kane,” was the reply. + +“I have heard,” went on the captain, “that General Greene is on his way +to Ninety-Six, with a force of about one thousand men, and if he has as +strong a force as that, then we will need all the men we can get, for we +have only about six hundred.” + +Then the party set out, and made its way toward the south. For several +miles their route was through a region where the majority of the +settlers were loyalists, and these were not bothered. + +“There is a settlement about twenty miles from here, in among the +mountains,” said the lieutenant to the soldiers nearest to him as they +made their way along, “and it is made up wholly of rebels. I have been +wanting to get a chance at them for a good while, and I am going +straight there. We will help ourselves to any of their belongings that +we care for, and will take the men prisoners and make them come back to +Ninety-Six and fight for the king when General Greene puts in an +appearance.” + +“I know where that settlement is,” said one of the soldiers. “They are +strong rebels, up there.” + +“Yes, but we’ll make them wish they were loyal to the king before we get +through with them,” said the lieutenant. + +Tom listened to the conversation of the lieutenant and the soldiers with +interest, and he began wondering if he could not manage to in some +manner get word to the settlers of their danger. + +“I’ll try to do so,” he decided. “If any opportunity is offered to me, I +will slip away and try to get to the settlement ahead of the redcoats +and warn the settlers.” + +The party of British soldiers did not hurry. They did not care to reach +the settlement until evening, anyway, and so they made their way along +at a moderate pace, and stopped an hour and a half at noon, and after +they had eaten, they proceeded at the same moderate pace, and it was +getting along toward evening when the lieutenant said they were within +two miles of the settlement, which was in a high valley, up in among the +mountains. + +At the point where they were when the lieutenant made this statement, +they were making their way along a path that wound around the side of a +mountain, and at one side the mountain stretched up hundreds of feet in +the air, while to the other side there was almost a precipice. The +descent for a hundred feet was quite steep, but not so steep but what a +man might descend it, by using care. Tom Dare, who had been trying to +think of some manner of giving the party the slip and getting to the +settlement ahead of the redcoats, decided on a plan. It was dangerous, +but he would try it anyhow, and his plan was to pretend to stumble and +then fall and go sliding down the declivity. He would then get to his +feet, make his way to the settlement and warn the settlers. + +He managed to work his way over till he was close to the edge of the +descent, and then suddenly he stumbled, gave a cry of seeming alarm, +fell and went rolling over and over down the steep mountain-side. + +The soldiers were greatly excited and yelled advice and encouragement to +the youth, but he was rolling so rapidly that their voices came to him +only in an inarticulate murmur. He did not understand their words, and +could not have acted on any of the suggestions had he done so. + +“Stop,” yelled one soldier. + +“Grab hold of something,” cried another. + +“Whirl your body around and stick your heels in the earth,” was the +suggestion from another. + +On rolled Tom, and although he did his best to lessen his speed, he +could do little, and he went down the side of the mountain with terrible +speed. Fortunately, however, he was able to grasp a long trailing vine +and this enabled him to twist himself into a more perpendicular +position. Presently, when about one hundred feet down, he shot over a +little precipice and went fifteen or twenty feet downward, directly into +the top of a stunted fir tree. On through the branches he went, being +buffeted first one way and then the other, and finally fell to the +ground alighting upon the mossy bank of a little rivulet. Had he had in +advance the slightest conception of the danger of his undertaking, he +certainly would not have made the venture. + +Luckily the branches of the tree had broken his fall considerably, and +although he was somewhat stunned by the fall, and dazed by the swift +whirling, he was not seriously injured, and in a few moments he was +enabled to sit up, and a little later he rose to his feet, shook +himself, and began figuring on getting to the settlement ahead of the +redcoats. + +Then to his hearing came the words, from the lieutenant: “Tom Dare! Are +you alive? Where are you?” + +“They’ll be looking for me in a few moments,” thought Tom. “I must hurry +away from here.” + +He set out in the direction of the settlement, picking his way along +carefully, and gradually he worked his way upward, and when he had gone +about a mile, he reached the path the soldiers had been following when +he rolled down the mountain-side. + +Tom looked back, but saw no signs of the British soldiers. He could see +only about two hundred yards, however, as the path bent around the side +of the mountain. + +Tom did not linger there, however, and after one swift glance back, he +set out along the path on the run, and in about ten minutes emerged from +the path into a high valley of perhaps three or four miles long and a +mile and a half in width. At a point near the center he saw a group of +log houses, and toward these he hastened. + +It was now about supper time, and Tom decided that the settlers were all +at their homes. This would be better than if the men were scattered +about, in the fields, at work, for they could make preparations for +defense quickly. + +Tom kept glancing back over his shoulder as he ran toward the houses, +and each time he looked, he expected to see the British soldiers coming. +He had gone about halfway to the houses, however, before he caught sight +of the redcoats. They were just entering the valley, and they must have +caught sight of Tom and guessed what he was intending to do, for a yell +went up from their lips that came to his hearing. + +“They have seen and recognized me,” thought Tom. “Well, I have the start +of them, and will reach the settlement in time to make it possible for +the men to get ready to show fight.” + +On ran the youth, and the redcoats could be seen to be running also, but +they were not so swift-footed as Tom, and he reached the settlement +while the redcoats were still more than half a mile distant. + +Tom stopped at the first house he came to, and opened the door without +ceremony and called out: + +“A party of redcoats is coming to attack the settlement, sir. Get the +men together quickly, if you want to make a fight.” + +A man came hastily to the door, and cried: “What’s thet you say, young +man? Redcoats comin’ here?” + +“Yes, sir. You can see them, yonder, and--” + +“Why, ye’re one yourself!” exclaimed the man, noting Tom’s British +uniform. + +“No, I’m a patriot that was forced to join their force. I was with that +party, but got ahead of them, and came to warn you. Get the men +together, quickly. How many are there in the settlement?” + +“About twenty-five.” + +“There are only twenty of the redcoats. We can whip them. Get the other +men at once.” + +“All right. I’ll go to part of the houses and give the alarm, you go to +the rest.” + +Then they hastened from house to house, warning the settlers, and in a +less number of minutes than it takes to tell, the men were gathered at +the edge of the settlement, rifles in hand, ready for the redcoats. + +The women and children were told to leave the houses and retire up the +mountain-side, in the shelter of the rocks, and they promptly did so. + +“We’ll protect ourselves by hiding behind the houses and fire at the +redcoats, and hold them back or drive them away,” asserted one of the +settlers, who seemed to be looked upon as the leader. “If we can save +our houses and household goods, we will do so; but if they are too +strong for us, we can retreat up the mountainside.” + +“We can drive them away, I think, sir,” said Tom. + +“I hope so, young man.” And then the settler added: “We thank you for +bringing us warning of the approach of the British.” + +“You are welcome, sir. I am a patriot, and a member of the patriot army +under General Greene, whose army is about sixty or seventy miles east +and north from here. I was captured by the British and made to join +their force, but did so with the intention of making my escape at the +earliest possible moment.” + +“Well, it is lucky for us that you brought us the news of the coming of +the redcoats just when you did.” + +“They are almost within rifle-shot distance now,” said one of the +settlers. + +“All right,” replied the leader. “Keep your eyes on them, and as soon as +they are within range, begin firing. Take aim, and make every shot +tell.” + +A few moments later, the British soldiers were close enough for the +bullets from the rifles to reach them, and the settlers began firing. + +Yells of anger went up from the lips of the redcoats. + + + + + CHAPTER XIV + + Friends in Need + + +Dick Dare and Ben Foster were never nearer death’s door than at the +moment when the flames of the fires built around them, as they stood +tied to trees, began to scorch their clothing. + +Both youths were very brave, but there was something so terrible about +being burned at the stake, that a feeling of horror took hold upon them. + +The Indians now leaped to their feet and began jumping about, and +uttering cries, evidently of enjoyment at the spectacle that they were +about to witness. + +Then, just as the flames were about to begin burning the clothing of the +youths, they felt the ropes that bound them to the trees loosen, and to +the ears of each came the words: “When I say, ‘now,’ leap away from the +tree and run for your life.” + +The voices were strange to the youths, but they realized that the words +were uttered by friends, and each replied, cautiously: + +“All right.” + +Smoke was going up from the fires, and when there came a moment that a +thick sheet of smoke lay for a few moments between the youths and the +redskins, they heard the word, “Now!” + +The youths acted instantly. They leaped out from the midst of the piles +of wood, and turned and ran with the swiftness of the wind in the +opposite directions from where the Indians were dancing and singing. + +Then the smoke lifted and the redskins caught sight of the vacant +positions so recently occupied by their intended victims. Instantly +their singing changed to wild yells of rage and chagrin, followed by +war-whoops, and then the braves dashed in among the trees, in pursuit of +the fugitives. + +Dick and Tom did not see anything of their rescuers. In fact, it was so +dark, in the midst of the timber, now that they were away from the light +of the fires, that they could not see anything, and they had to run at +random. In so doing, they ran against trees, through clumps of bushes, +and stumbled over fallen trees, but managed to make pretty good headway, +even under such circumstances. And they were urged on by the wild yells +of the pursuing redskins, who were wild with rage because of the +inexplicable escape of their intended victims. + +The youths kept together, and plunged recklessly onward. They were +determined to escape, if possible, for they realized that to be +recaptured would be to be again fastened to the trees and burned to +death. The Indians would keep them surrounded, next time, likely, and +thus prevent them from escaping again. + +On the two youths dashed, through the underbrush, and suddenly Dick felt +emptiness beneath his feet, and went plunging downward, alighting on +hard ground with a thump, his head struck something hard, causing him to +see a lot of stars and flashing meteors, and then he knew nothing. He +had been knocked senseless by the fall. + +Ben, running swiftly, did not miss his comrade at once, but when he had +gone perhaps fifty or seventy-five yards farther, and no sound of Dick +running near him came to his hearing, he stopped, listened a few +moments, and then called out, cautiously: + +“Dick! Oh, Dick! Where are you?” + +The sound of the shouting of the pursuing Indians came to his hearing, +but although he listened intently, he did not hear any reply from Dick. + +“Where can he be?” Ben murmured, anxiously. “Can anything have happened +to him?” + +Ben stood there a brief moment, called again, and then, not receiving +any response, he set out through the forest as fast as his legs could +carry him, and that, with a pursuing foe of savages determined upon his +life, was pretty fast. His idea and hope was, that Dick was still +hastening onward, and that he would escape from the disappointed +redskins. + +And Dick was lying senseless in a pit that had been made by hunters, for +the purpose of trapping wild animals, for food and skins. + +When Dick regained consciousness, he could not think for a few moments +what had happened to him. Then he remembered being tied to the trees in +the Indian village, with the fire burning about him, remembered having +been freed by somebody, and that he and Ben had been running for their +lives through the underbrush, pursued by the Indians, when he had taken +a tumble and had got a bump on the head that had rendered him +insensible, and the question now was: Where was he? + +And then the thought came to him: Where was Ben? + +He listened intently, but heard no sound to indicate Ben’s presence, nor +did he hear the yells of the Indians. He judged, from this, that he had +been in his present situation some time. + +He rose to a sitting posture, and reached out and felt around him. He +made out what seemed to be a solid wall of earth, at his back. Then he +rose to his feet, and reached upward, trying to stretch to the top of +the wall, but could not. Then he started to make his way along the wall, +feeling with his hand, for guidance, and he had taken only five or six +steps when he heard a low, menacing growl right in front of him. + +Dick paused and gazed ahead, trying to penetrate the darkness, and then +he saw what looked like two gleaming balls of fire, and then as another +low, fierce growl came to his hearing, he realized the truth--that he +was confronted by a wild animal of some kind, and from the sound of the +growl he judged that the animal was likely a panther. + +Dick had had considerable experience in hunting and trapping, and knew +that pits were often dug for the purpose of trapping wild animals, and +he guessed that he was in one of those old pits, and that he had for a +companion a wildcat or panther! + +Dick Dare realized that his situation was indeed a dangerous one. True, +he had the use of his hands and feet, but what could he hope to do +against the animal without weapons of any kind? + +He felt that his danger was great, that his situation was indeed +desperate, and he stood there, almost frozen to the spot, trying his +best to think what he should do. Truly he had fled one danger but to +encounter another. “From the frying pan into the fire.” + +Again the low, but fierce and threatening growl came to Dick’s ears. + + + + + CHAPTER XV + + Preparing for Trouble + + +Tom Dare and the settlers managed to hold their own against the +redcoats, and the latter, after two or three attempts at forcing their +way into the houses sheltering the marksmen, retreated about half a mile +and evidently held a council, for they gesticulated quite a good deal. +Then the settlers saw one of the soldiers take his leave, hastening down +the valley, and Tom Dare exclaimed: + +“He’s going back to the fort after reinforcements.” + +“Do you think so?” asked Mr. Hicks, the man who was looked upon as being +the leader at the settlement. + +“Yes, that is what he is going to do. They know that they can’t capture +the settlement with their present force, and as we have killed one or +two of them and wounded several, they are determined to capture the +settlement.” + +“Well, they will be able to do so, if they have a strong enough force, I +guess.” + +“Yes. And that fellow will bring enough soldiers so that they will have +no trouble in getting the best of you.” + +The settlers looked sober and thoughtful. They realized that while they +had gotten the better of the affair, so far, they would not be able to +hold their own against overwhelming odds. + +“What shall we do, anyhow?” remarked one of the settlers. + +“I’ll tell you what,” said Tom, who had been doing considerable +thinking. “Let’s take the offensive, and go out and attack those +redcoats and drive them out of the valley.” + +“What good will that do?” asked Mr. Hicks. “That soldier yonder will +return with a strong force, and then we will have to retreat into the +mountains.” + +“No, I think we can arrange a trap for them,” said Tom. + +“How?” with interest. + +“I’ll tell you. You know that the path leading into this valley extends +for several miles along the side of the mountain, with a steep descent +on one side, and almost a perpendicular wall at the other.” + +“Yes, we know that.” + +“So do I,” mused Tom, rubbing some of the sore spots resultant from his +precipitous departure from his British comrades. + +“Tell us your plan, Tom.” + +“Well, after we have driven these redcoats out of the valley and back +along that path, we will climb up to the top of the precipice-wall, and +will gather a large number of rocks of good size and place them right +along the edge of the precipice. Then when the redcoats come, we will +roll the stones down upon them.” + +The settlers looked at one another, and it was easy to see that they +thought the idea a good one. “That will likely be effective,” said Mr. +Hicks. “I believe that we can put a stop to the advance of any force, no +matter how strong, in that manner. We can move along the edge of the +precipice, keeping above the redcoats, and keep rolling rocks down on +them, till they are all annihilated or take the back track.” + +The others said they thought Mr. Hicks was right, and so they began +making preparations at once to attack the redcoats. They loaded their +rifles and as many pistols as they could find, and then they withdrew +from the houses, entered the woods and made their way along till they +were opposite the point where the redcoats were stationed. Then they +slipped to the edge of the covered wood land and suddenly rushed out +upon the British soldiers, firing as they went, and yelling at the top +of their voices. + +The redcoats, taken by surprise, were seized with a feeling of terror, +and sprang to their feet and ran toward the end of the valley at the top +of their speed, leaving two or three seriously wounded soldiers behind +them, however. + +The settlers pursued the fleeing soldiers, and kept after them till they +left the valley and were making their way along the path on the side of +the mountain. Then the settlers paused and held a council. + +“Now what shall we do next?” asked one of the settlers. + +“A few of us will stay here and guard the entrance to the valley,” +replied Tom. “And the rest will climb to the top of the precipice and +gather stones and place them where they will be handy to roll down on +the heads of the redcoats when they come.” + +“That is good advice, I think,” said Mr. Hicks. “We will do that.” + +Then he named six of the settlers, and told them to remain on guard at +the entrance to the valley, after which the rest of the party climbed to +the top of the precipice and began collecting rocks and placing them +along the edge of the precipice. + +“Those rocks will beat firearms as destructive weapons,” said Mr. Hicks. + +“Yes, I think so,” replied Tom. + +The soldiers who had been driven from the valley kept onward along the +path till they reached the fairly level country at the end, a distance +of about three miles, and then they stopped and went into camp, as the +reinforcements from the fort would not reach there till about noon of +the next day. + +The settlers worked hard the rest of the afternoon, and when evening +came they had a string of rocks piled along the edge of the precipice +for a distance of a couple of miles, and they felt that they were now in +a position to make it exceedingly hot for the British soldiers when they +put in their expected appearance the following day. + +The settlers now made their way back again and rejoined the six men on +guard at the entrance to the valley, and after informing them that they +would send six men to relieve them, so that they could come to the +settlement and get supper, the main party made its way to the +settlement. The women had supper ready, and the settlers ate, after +which six of their number went and relieved the six at the entrance of +the valley, and the three wounded redcoats were brought and placed in +one of the houses. Their wounds had already been dressed by one of the +settlers, an old man and a sort of doctor, who had not accompanied the +party in its attack on the British, so the wounded men had been taken +care of. + +The settlers felt very well satisfied with the situation. Two or three +had been wounded, but not seriously, and they felt that they had so far +had much the better of the fight. + +They got a good night’s sleep, and were up bright and early, ate +breakfast, and then got ready for the work that was to be performed that +day. Leaving the settlement, they made their way to the entrance of the +valley, climbed to the top of the precipice, and then proceeded to the +farther end of the string of stones, where they paused and settled down +to await the coming of the British. + +Tom Dare, however, who was never satisfied to remain quiet, said that he +would go and reconnoiter and see if he could locate the party of +redcoats that had been driven out of the valley. + +“Very well,” said Mr. Hicks, “but be careful, my boy. Don’t let them +capture you.” + +“I won’t, sir. I will keep my eyes open.” + +Then Tom made his way down the steep slope of the mountain, and into the +heavy timber, and he made his way along, slowly and cautiously, for he +believed that the party of redcoats was somewhere in the vicinity. + +Tom advanced a few yards at a time, pausing then to look all around him, +and when he had gone about half a mile he caught sight of the +encampment. + +“I thought I would find them somewhere around here,” thought Tom, “Well, +now by keeping watch on this party of redcoats, I will know when the +others join them, and when they start toward the valley, and can hasten +and warn the settlers and they can be ready to begin the bombardment +with the stones.” + +Tom selected a good place from which to keep his eyes on the redcoats, +and then settled down to take it easy. It was a warm morning, and Tom +presently became somewhat drowsy. He would watch the encampment a little +while, then he would nod slightly, but would presently rouse up again. +It was during one of his nodding periods that Tom suddenly felt strong +hands seize hold of him. Startled, he made an attempt to get free from +the grasp, but could not do so, there being two of his assailants, and +to Tom’s surprise they were Indians. + +“That accounts for their being able to slip up on me without my hearing +them,” thought Tom, with some bitterness. + +His hands were quickly bound together behind his back with a thong, and +then the Indians dragged Tom down to the British encampment, where he +was given a rather grim reception. + +“So, here you are again, eh, Tom Dare!” exclaimed Lieutenant Wicks. +“Good. I am glad to see you. You played us a nice trick when you +pretended to fall, rolled down the slope and then hastened on ahead and +gave the settlers warning, didn’t you. Very good, I will settle with you +for that, now that we have got you in our hands!” And he glared at the +youth in a manner that showed he was very much wrought up, as indeed he +had cause to be. + +The truth was, that he was one of those who had been wounded by the +bullets from the weapons of the settlers. His wound was not serious, but +it was painful, and did not have a good effect on his temper. + +“What are you going to do with me?” asked Tom, somewhat defiantly. + +“I’ll show you at the proper time,” was the reply. “You will be very +sorry that you acted as you did.” + +“Perhaps so, perhaps not,” replied the patriot youth. + +“You will find that it does not pay to try tricks on soldiers of the +king,” said the lieutenant, sternly. “You will wish that you had +remained a member of the British army.” + +“No, I won’t,” said Tom. “I am a patriot, and I wouldn’t fight for the +king.” + +“You will be glad to fight for the king, before I get through with you, +you blasted rebel!” cried the lieutenant, fiercely. Then he went on: +“Just wait till the reinforcements get here. We will return to the +valley and thrash the settlers and plunder their houses, and you are +going to go along and help. Do you hear?” + +“Yes, I hear,” replied Tom, “but I won’t do much helping, I can tell you +that.” + +He thought of the rocks that were to be rolled down on the redcoats, and +did not like the prospect of being taken along with the force when it +made its way along the path, in going to the valley. + +Would the settlers roll the stones down, he wondered? They would, unless +they knew that he was among the party. But would they discover this +fact? If they did not, Tom would likely be killed by a rock, the same as +if he were a redcoat. + + + + + CHAPTER XVI + + The Search for Dick + + +Ben Foster kept struggling on through the woods and darkness for quite a +while, and then, not hearing any sounds of pursuit, he paused and +listened intently for a few moments, after which he gave a low, but +penetrating whistle, the same signal that the three youths often used. +If Dick were within two or three hundred yards, he would hear and reply +to the signal. + +There came no reply, however, and after waiting a few minutes, Ben +whistled again, with the same result. + +Then he set out through the forest, but did not go far, before stopping +again. + +“I’m not going any farther till I know where Dick is,” he murmured, “He +may have gotten into trouble, may have fallen and knocked his head +against a tree and fallen into the hands of the redskins again. I’ll +stay here till morning, and then see if I can find him.” + +Ben found a place at the foot of a big tree, and lying down, was soon +asleep. He slept till morning, and then sat up and looked around him. + +All was quiet, and there were neither redskins nor redcoats in sight. + +Ben drew a sigh of relief. He had feared that he might see enemies in +the vicinity. + +But, what should he do? In which direction should he go? He did not know +where to look for Dick, and so he decided to start back in the direction +from which he had come in escaping from the Indian village. It would be +somewhat dangerous to venture back to the vicinity of the village, but +Ben was determined to find Dick, if possible. He feared his comrade had +been recaptured by the redskins, and if this were the case, it should be +his business to rescue him. + +Ben had taken only a few steps, however, when he caught sight of a party +of patriots coming toward him, as he could tell by their blue uniforms. + +“There comes one of the parties sent out by General Greene!” thought +Ben, with a feeling of delight. “Now I can guide them to the Indian +village, and they can put the redskins to rout and rescue Dick, if he is +there.” + +He hastened to meet the soldiers, and when he met them, he found that +one was his own company, under the command of Captain Morgan. The +captain was naturally somewhat surprised to see Ben, but was glad, and +asked if he could give him any news regarding the whereabouts of +Indians. + +“Indeed I can,” was the reply. “Dick and myself were captured by a party +of redskins, and they were about to burn us at the stake, but somebody +slipped up and cut the ropes binding us to the trees, and we managed to +get away. But we got separated in the darkness, and I don’t know where +Dick is.” + +“When was that?” + +“Last night.” + +“How far is the Indian village from here?” the captain asked. + +“About ten or twelve miles, I should judge, sir.” + +“You can guide us thither?” + +“I am sure that I can, sir.” + +“Very good, lead the way, and we will get to the village as quickly as +circumstances will permit. If Dick Dare was recaptured and taken back to +the village, he may be in danger, and we will endeavor to rescue him.” + +“True, sir.” + +They set out at once, with Ben in the lead, as guide. Captain Morgan was +right behind Ben, and then after them came the soldiers, Tim Murphy and +Fritz Schmockenburg being close to the captain and Ben. These two liked +Dick immensely, and were worried for fear something serious had happened +to him. + +After a walk of about three and a half or four hours, Ben called a halt +and said that the Indian village was within half a mile of the spot +where they were standing. + +“We had better advance slowly and cautiously,” he advised, and the +captain so ordered. + +Presently they came in sight of the village, and at the same moment they +were discovered and a wild yell went up from the lips of an Indian brave +that had been standing guard. This was the alarm signal to his fellow +braves in the village, and instantly there was a great skurrying around +among the redskins, as they hastened this way and that, trying to get +together for the purpose of offering battle to the soldiers. + +When they saw how large a number they had to contend with, however, they +quickly decided that prudence was the better part of valor, and took to +their heels, and after them went the patriot soldiers, firing as they +ran, and dropping quite a number of the savages, dead or wounded. + +The soldiers pursued the Indians as long as they could see any of them, +and then they returned to the village, and began looking in the various +wigwams, to see if Dick Dare was there, a prisoner. + +They did not find him in any of the wigwams, and when Captain Morgan +made inquiries of an old Indian, who had remained behind with the squaws +and papooses, and who could speak a few words of English, he was +informed that neither of the white young men who had been at the torture +stake the night before, and had escaped, had been recaptured. Captain +Morgan was somewhat relieved to hear this. But he was still anxious +regarding the fate of Dick. He felt that the youth had gotten into +danger of some kind. + +The soldiers buried the Indians that had been killed, carried the +wounded ones into the wigwams, and left them there for the squaws to +doctor up. Then the soldiers again set out, with the intention of trying +to locate Dick Dare, and rescue him, if he had fallen into the hands of +another party of Indians. + +They made their way slowly through the woods, and spread out, fan-shape, +so as to cover as large a territory as practical. If Dick were anywhere +in that part of the country, they would find him, they were certain. + +But although they put in the rest of the day, practically searching for +Dick, they did not find him, nor did they encounter any Indians. It is +likely that the redskins had heard about the attack on the village, and +kept out of the way. + +Ben was greatly worried about their failure to find Dick or learn +anything regarding his whereabouts. He was worried, too, about the +whereabouts of Tom. He and Dick had started out to look for Tom, and had +themselves been made prisoners, had very nearly been burned at the +stake, had become separated in their flight from the redskins, and now +Dick’s whereabouts was not known. Thus both the Dare boys were missing, +and their friends feared that both were in serious trouble, somewhere, +though where, was the difficulty. + +“Perhaps we may find Dick to-morrow,” said Ben. + +“Sure an’ Oi hope thot we may foind ’im, Ben,” replied Tim Murphy. “It’s +a foine bye Dick is.” + +“Yah, Dick and Tom are both fine poys, alretty,” said Fritz +Schmockenburg. “Und I hope dot ve find dem to-morrow.” + +“Oi wish we could foind thim as aisy as ye can foind woildcats whin +standin’ guard, Fritz,” chuckled Tim, and then he told Ben the story of +how Fritz had heard a noise, thought the Indians were coming to attack +the camp, and had fired a shot and rushed into the encampment, yelling +that the Indians were coming, and that when they had gone and looked at +the point where Fritz had fired the shot, they had found a dead wildcat. + +Ben laughed, and then said: “Well, if it had been an Indian, you would +have settled his account, Fritz.” + +“Yah, dot is so,” nodded Fritz, grinning. + +Next morning the patriot soldiers again began searching for Dick, at the +same time keeping their eyes open for Indians, but did not find either, +and after eating their luncheon at noon, they set out toward the patriot +encampment in Peaceful Valley, as they were expected to report there +that evening. + +It was almost dark when they arrived at the encampment, and the other +two companies were already there. They had found two or three Indian +villages, had killed and wounded a number of Indians and put the rest to +flight, as Captain Morgan’s force had done. They had not seen anything +of Dick or Tom Dare. + +General Greene was somewhat worried over the fact that Dick and Tom were +missing, for he liked the youths, and feared that they had met with +death at the hands of the redskins. + +“We will break camp here in the morning, however,” he told his officers, +“and will march upon Fort Ninety-Six. Possibly we may find the Dare Boys +somewhere in that neighborhood. Dick may have continued onward in that +direction to look for his brother Tom.” + +“True,” agreed Captain Morgan. “I hope we may find them alive and well.” + + + + + CHAPTER XVII + + Ben Reconnoiters + + +The encampment was astir early next morning, and the soldiers cooked and +ate breakfast, and then began making preparations to get ready for the +march. + +They were ready in about an hour and a half, or two hours, and then +having said good-by to the settlers of Peaceful Valley, they marched +away toward the west. + +They continued onward steadily during that day, stopping an hour at noon +for luncheon and to rest, and when evening came they went into camp at a +point perhaps thirty miles east of Ninety-Six. + +They stationed sentinels, so as to prevent a surprise by Indians or +redcoats and the night passed quietly, no enemy appearing. + +They were up and away again early in the morning, and by marching hard, +managed to reach the vicinity of Ninety-Six by evening, They went into +camp only about two miles from the fort. + +Ben Foster was eager to take a look at the fort, for he feared that +possibly Dick and Tom were prisoners there. He went to General Greene +and asked permission to go on a reconnoitering expedition, and the +permission was granted. + +“I shall be glad to have you go and secure all the information possible +regarding Fort Ninety-Six, my boy,” said the general. “But, be careful +and don’t let them capture you.” + +“I will be careful, sir,” and then saluting, Ben took his departure. + +He made his way cautiously through the timber, for he did not know but +there might be redcoats or redskins in the vicinity, and he did not want +to fall into their hands. + +On he went, pausing frequently to listen, but hearing no suspicious +sounds, he drew nearer and nearer to the fort, and at the end of an hour +he arrived at the open space in the center of which the fort stood. + +It was a moonlight night, and Ben could see the fort with tolerable +distinctness, and he stood there for some time, looking at the building +and wondering if Dick and Tom were there. + +Ben stood there for perhaps half an hour, looking at the fort and the +lay of the land with critical eyes. He was sizing the fort and +surroundings up, and trying to figure out what chance for success the +patriot army would have, if an attack was made. + +“It is impossible to judge of the strength of the fort at a distance,” +thought Ben. “I believe that I will try to reach the wall around the +fort and see how strongly-constructed it is. General Greene will be glad +to secure all the information I can get.” + +Ben felt that he would be running considerable risk in advancing across +the open ground on an evening when the moon was shining, but he was +brave, and decided to take a closer view, anyhow. + +Having decided, he at once set to work. He advanced from among the +trees, and just before getting out where the light would encompass him, +Ben dropped on his hands and knees, and began slowly crawling along, +after the fashion of an Indian. + +He was not quite as expert at this kind of work as an Indian, but he did +very well, advancing slowly, and keeping his body close to the ground, +thus not being so likely to attract the attention of a sentinel at the +fort. + +It was about a third of a mile to the stockade-wall around the fort, and +Ben was at least half an hour in going that distance, and as he drew +near the fort, he was in momentary expectation of hearing the crack of a +musket and feeling the sting of a bullet. + +Ben was not discovered, however. At any rate, there was no musket-shot +or outcry. All was quiet, and on reaching the wall, Ben sat down, with +his back against the logs, and rested a while. It had been rather trying +on his nerves to crawl across the open space under the light of the +moon, faint though it was. + +When he had got rested, Ben turned and began making an examination of +the wall. He found that it was made of large logs, flattened at the +sides and placed on top of one another. The wall was, he judged, about +twelve feet high. + +Ben worked his way slowly along the wall, feeling between the logs, for +openings, as he wished to learn how thick the wall was, and whether it +would be possible to batter it down with the field-pieces that General +Greene had brought with the army. + +Presently Ben found an opening, through which he pushed his hand, and +his fingers came in contact with another log on the inside. The wall was +at least two logs in thickness, and this would make it difficult to +batter it down with the field-pieces. + +The patriot youth continued to work his way along the wall, and on +reaching the corner, he turned it and made his way along the wall on +that side. He kept on till he had made the circuit of the stockade-wall, +and he guessed the wall as being about two hundred feet in each +direction. + +Near one corner of the wall Ben had found a place where there were +several openings between the logs, and he believed that he could climb +to the top of the wall, there. He decided to make the attempt, anyway, +as all was quiet. He wished to get a look into the enclosure, if he +possibly could. + +He made his way to the point in question, and then he began the work of +climbing to the top of the wall. This proved to be more difficult than +he had expected, and he began to think he would not be able to reach the +top, after several unsuccessful attempts, but presently he managed to +get high enough up the side of the wall so that he could get hold of the +top log, and then he slowly and cautiously pulled himself up till his +head was a little above the top of the wall. + +Now he exercised great caution, lifting his head slowly, a little at a +time, till he was enabled to look into the enclosure. He could see the +building constituting the fort, and at the farther side he saw a +sentinel pacing slowly back and forth on the platform built against the +wall, and about five feet from the top. + +The sentinel’s side was toward Ben when he was pacing back and forth, +however, and when he paused to look away from the fort, his back was +toward the youth, so Ben did much fear being seen by him. But there +should have been a sentinel on the side where Ben was, and he wondered +where the sentinel could be. + +He presently found out, for suddenly the head of a British soldier +appeared above the top of the wall, and almost in front of Ben’s face. +The sentinel had evidently been down below when Ben first climbed up +there, and had just returned to his post. He caught sight of Ben at the +same moment the youth caught sight of him, and his exclamation of +amazement was not unnatural. + +“Who are you?” he cried. + +At the same moment he made a grab for the youth’s throat, but Ben was +too quick for him, and evaded the grasp by dropping to the ground with +all possible dispatch. + +“Spies! Rebels!” yelled the sentinel, loudly, and then grabbing up his +musket, he leaned over the top of the wall and looked eagerly for the +youth who had given him such a surprise. + +Ben was running across the open ground at the top of his speed, and the +sentinel caught sight of him, leveled his musket, took a quick aim, and +fired. + +Crack, the shot rang out, and Ben heard the bullet go buzzing past his +ear. Had the bullet gone a few inches to the right it would have put an +end to his career as a patriot soldier and spy. + +Ben ran onward as swiftly as he could, and was soon out of musket-shot +range, but he heard sounds of loud and excited voices back at the fort. +He realized that he had caused a commotion within its walls, and thought +it likely that some of the British soldiers would emerge from the fort +and come in pursuit of him. + +And such proved to be the case. The gate was thrown open, and out came +about a score of redcoats and started on the track of Ben. They yelled +to him to stop and surrender, but of course he paid no attention to +them, but ran onward as fast as possible. He was not much alarmed, as he +was sure he could reach the edge of the forest before the redcoats could +get within musket-shot distance, and then he could evade his pursuers in +the underbrush and darkness, he felt certain. + +He was not long in reaching the desired haven, and he dashed in among +the trees, drawing a breath of relief as he did so, and slackened his +speed, somewhat, as he did not think it necessary to run so fast. He +could give the redcoats the slip, now that he was in among the trees. + +He was soon out of hearing of his pursuers, who doubtless did not follow +him very far into the forest. In less than an hour’s time he was at the +patriot encampment, and had made his report to General Greene. + +The information he gave the general, about the size of the fort, and the +extent and thickness of the walls, was of considerable interest and +value, and the general thanked the youth for having secured the +information. + +“I hope to capture the fort in a few days,” the general said. + + + + + CHAPTER XVIII + + Dick and the Panther + + +Dick Dare had no doubt that the animal in the pit with him was a +panther. He judged by the growl, which was stronger than would have been +the case had the animal been a wildcat. + +He felt that he was indeed in a serious predicament. Had he had his +pistols, or even a knife, he would have stood some chance to hold his +own against the animal, but he had no weapons of any kind. + +So he simply stood still, at one corner of the pit, and kept his eyes on +the two balls of fire. + +There was silence for a few moments, and then Dick saw the two red spots +move, and he was confident they were advancing toward him, slowly but +surely. + +Dick guessed that the animal had likely been but a short time in the +pit, and was not hungry, still he realized that he had before him a +dangerous antagonist. + +What should he do? What could he do? He did not feel that he could do +anything, but he was tired of standing still, and so he began moving +slowly along the wall, his back against it. + +When he had taken a few steps, his foot struck against something, and +feeling down, he found that it was a limb of a tree perhaps as large as +his arm. Instantly his heart gave a leap of delight. Likely this was a +limb that had been used by the person who dug the pit, to climb up out +of the pit on, after shooting an animal that he had trapped, and if Dick +could get the limb leaned up against the wall, he might be able to climb +out, though he would likely be attacked while trying to do so. + +He would try, however, and he lifted the limb, and leaned it against the +wall, at the corner, and at the same moment he heard the low, menacing +growl of the animal. He whirled about, quickly, and yelled “Scat,” +waving his arms frantically. The animal slunk away, with a snarl of +fright. + +Then Dick turned, and seizing hold of the stick, began climbing with +desperate energy and swiftness. He expected every moment to feel the +claws of the animal, but did not, and to his delight he succeeded in +reaching the top of the pit and getting out on solid ground. + +He did not know how long he had been in the pit before regaining +consciousness, but guessed it was not long. + +He heard the growls of the animal and its footfalls as it went running +around the pit, but this did not worry Dick now. He was at a point the +animal could not reach, and safe from attack. + +Dick stood there a few moments, listening intently. He did not hear any +sounds to indicate the presence in the vicinity of any Indians, or of +his friend, Ben. + +Dick presently gave the signal whistle, the same as Ben had done when +searching for him, and listened intently, but heard no response. Again +he repeated the signal, with the same result, and he knew that Ben was +not within hearing. + +Dick pondered a few moments. What should he do? Which way should he go? +Should he return to Peaceful Valley, or should he go on toward +Ninety-Six. What would be Ben’s course? + +After giving the matter considerable thought, Dick decided to continue +onward toward Ninety-Six. He believed that Ben would do the same, and he +was eager to find Tom, and was somewhat anxious regarding his fate. + +“Yes, I’ll go on in the direction of Ninety-Six,” murmured Dick. “Likely +Ben will do so, and I will meet him again, and if not, I may find Tom.” + +So Dick set out through the forest, heading toward the west. He walked +steadily for two or three hours, and then, feeling tired, he lay down at +the foot of a tree and was soon asleep. + +When he awoke it was morning, he rose and looked about him. On all sides +was the wilderness, the timber being all around him. Nowhere were there +any signs of Indians. + +“I wish I could find a settler’s home,” murmured Dick. “I am feeling the +need of some food. Well, perhaps I may happen upon one, soon.” + +Then he set out, still heading westward, and walked steadily onward an +hour or so, when he came to a little cabin in an open space in the +forest. + +“Good,” thought Dick. “Now, I shall be able to get something to eat, +likely.” + +Dick advanced and knocked on the door, which was opened a few moments +later by a tall, roughly-dressed man, who looked like a hunter and +trapper. + +“Good morning, sir,” greeted Dick. “I would like to get something to +eat.” + +“All right, stranger; come right in,” was the reply. “Ye are welcome to +all the grub ye can eat, such as it is.” + +“Thank you,” said Dick, and he entered and took a seat, while his host +placed some meat and corn cakes on the rude table at one side. + +“Now set up here, and eat all ye want,” said the man. + +Dick did so, and when he had talked with the man a few moments, he +learned that he was a hunter, but that he was a patriot, and the youth +learned that it was about forty miles to Ninety-Six. + +“If ye’re going over in that part of the country, ye’ll have to keep +your eyes open,” said the hunter. “The redcoats and redskins both are +thick over thar. Only yesterday the savages caught a couple of young +fellows and were going to burn them at the stake. I was about an’ with a +friendly Indian’s aid crawled up just in time to cut loose their bonds +or they would be on the road to kingdom come before now.” + +“My kind preserver,” gasped Dick, “I thank you for myself and for Ben, +my comrade.” + +Naturally there was a long talk, and Dick repeated time and again his +words of appreciation. Finally with a last grasp of the kindly hunter’s +hand he took his departure. + +The man insisted on Dick taking a package of food with him, which the +youth did, and he was glad afterward that he did so, for he did not come +upon another cabin during that day, and would have had to go hungry, but +for the supply he had brought with him. + +He camped that night at a point which he judged was perhaps ten miles +from Fort Ninety-Six, and slept quietly till morning. + +He ate the last of the food the hunter had given him, and then set out +in the direction of Ninety-Six. + +About three hours later, he came to a wide open space, and looked with +interest at what he knew was Fort Ninety-Six, standing near the center +of an open space of goodly size. + +“There’s Ninety-Six,” murmured Dick, gazing at the fort eagerly. “I +wonder if Tom is a prisoner there?” + + + + + CHAPTER XIX + + The Settlers’ Retreat + + +Tom Dare realized that he was indeed in great danger, for the rocks +would be as likely to strike him as not, if he accompanied the redcoats, +and it looked as if he would have to accompany them. + +Slowly the time rolled away, and when the British reinforcements, to the +number of about seventy-five, reached there, it was decided to start at +once for the valley. + +They could reach there easily before evening, they felt certain. So they +set out, with Tom among them. + +As they entered upon the path that led along the foot of the mountain, +Tom looked upward quickly, as if expecting to see some of the stones +come rolling down upon them. + +If the settlers did not know he was with the redcoats, they would soon +begin rolling the stones down, and Tom did not like the idea of being +there among the British. + +They continued onward perhaps two hundred yards, and then Tom looked +upward again, an apprehensive expression on his face, and one of the +soldiers, noticing this, glanced upward a moment later, a look of +curiosity on his face. The look quickly changed to one of terror, +however, and he yelled, loudly: “Look out for the rock, comrades! Be +ready to dodge!” and he pointed up the mountainside. + +His comrades, and Tom also, glanced upward and saw a big rock coming +bounding down the steep descent. It was now not more than one hundred +yards distant, and coming with the speed of the wind. Down it came, +leaping, bounding, rolling, and the next moment it struck in the midst +of the soldiers, knocking a couple of them down, and causing the others +to tumble over one another in their attempts to get out of the stone’s +course. + +“So that is what you were looking upward for, eh?” cried the redcoat who +had noted Tom’s action and who had glanced upward and seen the rock +coming. “The rebels have piled stones along the top of the precipice, +comrades, and they’ll annihilate our party if we try to make our way +along this path to the valley.” + +“There comes another rock!” yelled another soldier at that moment, and +there was a lively scrambling to get out of the rock’s course. + +They managed to keep from getting hit, this time, but realized that if +they continued onward along the path, they would be crushed and knocked +to pieces by the stones, and so the lieutenant gave the order to +retreat, and the soldiers hastened back along the path, to the point +they had left only a short time before. + +Here they paused, and held a council. It was decided to ascend to the +top of the precipice and attack the settlers there, if they stood their +ground and showed fight. + +“We can reach the valley by going that way,” said the lieutenant. + +So they set out, and made their way slowly up the steep ascent leading +to the top of the mountain. Tom was taken with them, but he did not mind +it so much, now, for he did not fear the bullets from the settlers’ +rifles as much as he did the rocks. + +Presently the party of redcoats were almost to the top of the mountain, +and suddenly there came the sound of rifle-shots, and then the bullets +came whizzing among them. One or two of the redcoats were wounded, but +they pressed onward as rapidly as the rough conditions would admit, and +soon caught sight of the settlers, who had taken up positions behind the +rocks. + +The British soldiers opened fire, and then advanced, slowly and +steadily, and the settlers, knowing that they could not offer successful +resistance to such a strong force, turned and retreated hastily. + +They kept on retiring till they came to where there were a lot of large +boulders, and here they stopped to reload their rifles, and waited for +the British to come within range again. + +The lieutenant, observing this action, placed Tom Dare right in front, +so that a volley could not be fired without hitting the patriot youth. + +The settlers must have recognized Tom by this time, for they turned and +hastened onward again, having evidently decided not to fire the volley +as planned. + +“That scheme worked all right,” the lieutenant said, with a smile. “We +will simply keep you in front, Tom Dare, and will thus be able to walk +into the valley in safety. I am glad that we got hold of you.” + +But Tom wasn’t glad. By permitting himself to fall into the hands of the +enemy, he had spoiled the plan to roll rocks down on the redcoats, and +had made it impossible for the settlers to fire upon the British without +being in danger of killing him. He wished that he could do something to +change this state of affairs. + +But what could he do? He was a prisoner, with redcoats all about him, +and he did not see how he was to do anything to help the settlers. + +He thought of trying the plan of falling down the precipice, as he had +done once before, but the precipice in this instance was too steep. He +would surely be killed, as it would be a fall of at least one hundred +and fifty feet. + +He decided that there was nothing that he could do, and so he walked +onward at the head of the party, though he did not feel very happy. + +The settlers did not stop again. Evidently they did not wish to take the +chances of killing or wounding Tom by firing at the British, and had +made up their minds to retreat to their village in the valley. + +They moved considerably faster than did the redcoats, and Tom, who +shrewdly guessed that the settlers would like to have as much time as +possible, for the purpose of removing their household goods to a safe +place in the mountains, walked slowly pretending lameness, which did not +seem unreasonable and thus kept the redcoats from advancing, for a time +at least, at a fast pace. + +They kept telling him to increase his speed, but he did not hasten his +steps and presently a couple of soldiers seized him by the arms, at an +order from the lieutenant, and he was made to walk faster. + +They went on, and finally reached the entrance to the valley. Then they +moved faster, as the ground was level and the walking easier. They did +not see the settlers, so judged they had already reached their homes in +the village. + +“Likely the rebels intend carrying some of their household goods and +valuables up into the mountains,” said the lieutenant. “We must try to +get there in time to prevent them from doing that.” + +So they hastened, and closer and closer to the village they drew. +Finally they were at the edge of the village, and all was quiet. They +did not see any signs of the settlers. + +“They’re gone,” said the lieutenant. + +Then the redcoats scattered and entered the houses, and searched for +valuables, but found nothing of much use, the settlers having indeed +taken pretty much everything out of the houses. + +“They’ve gone up into the mountains,” said the lieutenant. “Let’s fire +these houses, and then follow.” + +With cries of satisfaction, for they were angered by being cheated out +of their plunder, as they looked at it, the soldiers set fire to the +houses, and soon the village was going up in flames. + +“Now head up into the mountains, men,” said the lieutenant. “We’ll run +the rebels to earth and help ourselves to their valuables, anyhow.” + +The soldiers hastened into the forest, and began ascending the mountain. +The ground was rough, but they made pretty good headway. They spread +out, fan-shape, so as to cover as much ground as through this alignment +they could obtain, and looked eagerly in all directions for the patriot +settlers. + +“They must have a hiding-place somewhere up the mountain,” said the +lieutenant. “Make a thorough search.” + +But, although they searched till nightfall, they did not find the +hiding-place of the settlers, and they finally went back down to the +village, or rather, where it had stood, for the houses were now burned +to the ground, and there camped for the night. + +And next morning they set out on the return to Ninety-Six, reaching the +fort about the middle of the afternoon. + +Tom was placed in the guard-house, and the lieutenant went to Major +Cruger and reported the result of the expedition. The Major expressed +satisfaction at the burning of the settlers’ houses, but was sorry they +had managed to make their escape and carry their household goods with +them. + + + + + CHAPTER XX + + Dick Appears + + +The morning after the patriot force reached the vicinity of Fort +Ninety-Six and went into camp, who should appear but Dick Dare! He went +at once to the headquarters tent, and was given a cordial greeting by +General Greene. + +“We were in hopes that you would turn up here,” said the general. “Where +have you been, my boy?” + +“Is Ben Foster here?” asked Dick. + +“Yes,” was the reply. + +“Then he told you, doubtless, that we got separated while running from +some Indians.” + +“Yes.” + +“Well, I supposed that he would go on toward Ninety-Six, and so I did +that.” + +“Ah. And have you learned anything of importance?” + +“Nothing regarding the fort, as yet. But I have learned where my brother +Tom is.” + +“That is good. Where is he?” + +“A prisoner in the fort.” + +“Indeed?” + +“Yes, sir. He was captured by some British soldiers and brought to the +fort, and pretended to join the force. He was sent with a foraging +force, to attack a patriot village up in the mountains, and he managed +to get away and reach the settlement ahead of the redcoats and warn the +settlers, and they managed to get to a hiding-place up in the mountains, +with their household goods, but the British burned the houses. I was +there, and saw the settlers, and they told me about the affair. They +said that Tom was recaptured, while reconnoitering, and that the British +took him to Ninety-Six. When we capture the fort, we can free him.” + +“I think we shall be able to capture the fort. Ben Foster made a +reconnoitering trip last night, and learned considerable about the +strength of the walls. I believe we can batter them down with the +field-pieces.” + +“I hope so. Is there anything you wish me to do?” + +“You may reconnoiter and gain all the information possible. There is no +hurry, and by taking our time, we may be able to make the capture of the +fort more certain.” + +“I will do my best to secure information that will be of value to you, +sir.” + +Then Dick saluted and withdrew, and was soon with Ben Foster, at the +quarters occupied by Captain Morgan’s company. + +They shook hands, and then Ben asked: “What became of you after we got +separated, Dick? I hunted around quite a good deal for you, and +signalled, but you did not answer.” + +“Likely if you were near me when you uttered any of the signals, it was +while I was insensible, and I did not hear you, of course.” Then Dick +explained that he had fallen into a pit that had been dug as a trap to +capture wild animals, and that he had fallen so hard as to knock him +senseless. And then he told of there being a panther in the pit, and Ben +uttered an exclamation. + +“Phew!” he murmured, “that wasn’t very pleasant, was it?” + +“No, indeed,” said Dick. “But I managed to climb up a limb that I found +there, and make my escape, and then I headed toward Ninety-Six.” + +Then he told Ben the same story that he had told General Greene, and Ben +was glad to know that Tom was alive and probably well, though a prisoner +in Fort Ninety-Six. Full particulars he gave too, of the kindly hunter +to whom they owed their life and opportunity to escape from the savages. + +“We’ll have Tom out of there before very long,” said Ben, reverting to +the problem at hand. + +“General Greene said for me to reconnoiter,” said Dick, “and I guess +that I will take a look at the fort to-day, and then visit it to-night.” + +“There isn’t much that you can learn,” said Ben. “I found out the +strength of the stockade-walls, and that is about all there is to learn, +from the outside. If you could get within the walls, you could secure +definite information regarding its strength, but you can’t do that.” + +“I suppose not,” said Dick. + +A little while after luncheon, Dick left the encampment and made his way +in the direction of Fort Ninety-Six. He reached the edge of the timber, +presently, and stopped and gazed across at the fort. He could not +venture out into the open ground without being seen by the sentinels, of +course, and so he did not advance farther. + +He made his way along the edge of the forest quite a distance, however, +and sized up the fort from different directions. Then he turned and +walked slowly along through the woods. + +He was heading for the encampment, and when about halfway there, he +crossed a rude wagon-road, which wound this way and that among the +trees, and Dick suddenly caught sight of a man approaching, driving a +team and wagon. + +Dick had crossed the road at the edge of the timber, and knew it led to +the fort, and now he stopped and waited till the wagon approached, when +he stepped out and stopped the man, who looked like a typical settler of +the vicinity. + +“Where are you going?” queried Dick. + +“To the fort,” was the reply. + +“What for?” + +“I’m takin’ some meat an’ vegertables thar to sell to ther sojers,” was +the reply. + +“Ah!” exclaimed Dick. He had been struck by an idea. “Say,” he remarked, +eyeing the man searchingly, “are you a king’s man, or are you a patriot? +Or are you neutral?” + +“Wal,” was the reply, “I kain’t say thet I’m a king’s man, but ther +redcoats pay me well fur my garden truck. Why d’ye ask?” + +“I’ll tell you why,” said Dick, eagerly. “I wish to enter the fort, and +why can’t I go with you? They’ll not be suspicious if I’m with you, and +that will give me a chance to get a look at the inside of the fort.” + +“Ye’re a patriot, then, hey?” + +“Yes.” + +“All right Ye can go inter ther fort with me, an’ can help me sell ther +truck to ther sojers, an’ ye can look aroun’ while ye’re doin’ thet.” + +“Thank you. That will be very kind of you.” + +Then Dick climbed up on the seat beside the man, who drove onward and +half an hour later they were at the entrance to the stockade, the big +gate swung open, and the man drove into the enclosure. + +Dick, seated on the seat beside the man, looked around him with eager +interest, but with all evidence of eagerness carefully kept from +showing. He seemed careless and indifferent. + +Then the farmer began selling the meat and vegetables, and Dick helped +him, and all the time he was sizing up the interior of the fort as best +he could. + + + + + CHAPTER XXI + + In the Fort + + +Dick had not noticed the fact, but while he was helping the farmer hand +out the meat and vegetables to the others, a soldier had been standing +near, gazing keenly and searchingly at him. + +Suddenly a low exclamation escaped the lips of the soldier, and he +turned to one of his comrades and said something, and they conversed a +few moments, after which the soldier spoken to hastened into the fort. +Presently he returned, accompanied by a soldier wearing a captain’s +uniform. + +The captain advanced to the side of the wagon, and looking up at Dick, +said: “Who are you, young man?” + +“I am working for Mr. Boggs,” replied Dick. + +“What’s your name?” + +“Dick.” + +“Dick what?” + +“Dick Rogers.” + +The captain pointed a finger at the young patriot, and exclaimed in a +stern, threatening voice: “You are Dick Dare, the rebel spy!” + +Dick had expected something of the kind, after seeing the threatening +look on the captain’s face, but at the same time it rather took him +aback. He gazed steadily at the officer, however, and said: + +“Why do you think I am Dick Dare, sir? And who is he?” + +“Why do I think you are Dick Dare? Because one of the soldiers here, was +stationed up in Virginia a few months ago, and saw you there, and he +recognized you and told me who you were. And now, you are my prisoner. +Climb down out of that wagon.” + +On driving into the enclosure, the farmer had made a circle, and the +horses were now standing with their heads toward the gate, which was +still open. Dick had noted this fact, and when he heard the captain’s +command, a daring plan came into his mind. He would attempt to drive out +of the enclosure and make his escape. + +So he quickly grabbed up the lines and whip, and yelling to the horses, +and giving them a couple of cuts with the whip, Dick sent the team out +of the enclosure on the gallop, knocking down and running over two of +the soldiers, who at the command from the captain had tried to stop the +horses. + +The farmer had been thrown down in the bottom of the wagon by the +suddenness of the start, and he lay still, for he thought it likely that +there would be bullets flying soon. + +And in thinking thus he was correct, for the captain, wild with rage, +gave the command for his soldiers to fire, and they did so, the bullets +whizzing around Dick, who was still plying the whip and yelling to the +horses. + +On across the open ground dashed the team, and the soldiers came running +forth from the enclosure like bees from a hive, and many of them came +running after the wagon, but could not gain on it. + +Dick drove on, and presently the wagon was in among the trees. Here the +road wound and twisted, and the progress was slower than when in the +open ground, but still they went at a pretty rapid rate. + +The soldiers gave up the pursuit, and then Dick slowed the horses to a +walk, and turned to the farmer, and smiling rather grimly, said: “I am +sorry to have had to take matters in my hands, Mr. Boggs, but the +redcoats would have captured me, otherwise.” + +“Oh, that’s all right,” was the reply. “I had sold most all my truck, +ennyhow.” + +“But the redcoats will have it in for you, after this, won’t they?” + +“I guess not. I’ll tell ’em I didn’t know ye was a rebel.” + +“That will be a good idea.” + +“Yes.” + +The farmer now took his seat beside Dick, and took the lines, and drove, +and presently Dick said: “I guess I’ll leave you, now, Mr. Boggs. This +is about the nearest point to the patriot encampment.” + +“All right, Dick Dare.” + +Dick leaped to the ground, shook hands with the farmer, thanked him for +his kindness in doing what he had, and then said good-by. His mission +ended he set out through the woods in the direction of the encampment. + +When he reached there, he went to the headquarters tent, and was given a +cordial greeting by General Greene. + +“Have you been reconnoitering the fort, Dick?” the general asked. + +“Yes, General Greene,” was the reply. “And I have been within the +stockade-walls.” + +The general started and looked surprised. “How did you manage that, my +boy?” he asked. + +Dick explained, then, the general listening with interest, and when Dick +had described the interior of the enclosure, and the fort, the officer +nodded, and said: “You have done pretty well, Dick. A knowledge of the +interior arrangements at the fort is worth considerable.” + +“So I thought, sir, and that is the reason I was so eager to see the +interior of the fort.” + +After he had asked a few questions, General Greene told Dick he might +go, but that any further information he could secure would be +appreciated. + +“I’ll reconnoiter the fort to-night,” said Dick. “I may be able to learn +something further.” + +Dick then rejoined his comrades, and told them the story of his +adventure at the fort. They listened with interest, and uttered +exclamations of wonder. + +“Sure an’ they came moighty near to grabbin’ ye, thot toime, Dick,” said +Tim Murphy. + +“Yah, dot is so,” nodded Fritz Schmockenburg. + +“But I was able to get a look at the interior of the fort,” said Dick, +“and that was worth while.” + +“Yes, indeed,” said Ben Foster. “Of course, you saw nothing of Tom?” + +“No. If he is there, he was in a building somewhere, and so I would not +have seen him.” + +They talked about the adventure quite a while, and were agreed that Dick +had acted in a daring manner in venturing into the fort. + +“That was the only way I could secure any information regarding the +arrangements of the buildings within the enclosure,” said Dick. + +After supper, Dick again set out. He made his way at a moderate pace, +and finally reached the edge of the open ground shortly after dark. He +stopped just within the edge of the forest and looked across at the fort +for a few minutes. Then he began making his way toward the fort, slowly. + +It was a rather dark night, and he could just make out the fort, looking +like a faint shadow, and he felt certain that the sentinels could not +see him. + +He was at the wall of the fort in about fifteen or twenty minutes, and +began making his way along it, feeling for a place where he could climb +to the top, as Ben said he had done. + +He had nearly reached the corner of the enclosure when he heard a +commotion within the enclosure. The sound of excited voices came to him, +and the clatter of weapons, and then he heard a noise above his head. He +looked upward quickly, and as he did so, a human form came over the top +of the wall and dropped down, striking Dick and knocking him to the +ground. + + + + + CHAPTER XXII + + Tom Makes a Discovery + + +Tom Dare did not like the idea of being a prisoner in the hands of the +British, but he was in what seemed to be a pretty strongly-built +building, and his chances of getting out seemed pretty slim. And even if +he were to get out of the building, he would have difficulty in getting +out of the enclosure. + +But Tom as we know was a determined youth, and he made up his mind to do +all he could to make his escape. It was not until about dark of the +evening on which Dick had come to the fort, however, that Tom discovered +that there was a loose board in the floor, and when he had lifted the +board, he discovered that there was a considerable opening underneath +the floor. + +He had already had his supper and did not think that anyone would enter +the room, so he crawled down through the opening, replaced the board, +and worked his way along till he came to the edge of the building. Here +he found that an embankment of earth had been piled up against the side +of the building, and he proceeded to dig through this. It was slow work, +but he persevered, and finally he managed to get a large enough hole +made so that he could crawl through. + +This he did, and presently stood erect beside the building. He looked +around him, sizing up the situation carefully. It was already pretty +dark, and Tom could not see very well, but this would be more to his +advantage than to the advantage of the sentinels, for they could not see +him unless they were close to him. + +Tom slipped away from the building, and presently reached the wall, and +located a set of steps that the soldiers used in climbing to the +platform on the inside of the wall. He climbed these steps, and reached +the platform, and at that moment he heard footsteps advancing, and the +form of the sentinel loomed up indistinctly. + +Tom realized that he was about to be discovered. What should he do? He +did not like the idea of being recaptured, and discovery and capture +seemed unavoidable and indeed imminent. + +He stood there, hesitating, only a few moments, and then suddenly he +heard an exclamation from the sentinel, who asked: “Who is there?” + +There was no time to lose, if he were to escape. Tom realized this, and +did the first thing that occurred to him, which was to climb to the top +of the wall and leap to the ground. + +He dropped down outside the enclosure, but instead of striking the +ground, he struck something which he realized was a human form. And with +the realization came the belief that the person in question was a +British soldier. + +With this belief in his mind, he leaped to his feet and started to run +away as fast as possible, while from above came the command: “Halt! +Stop, or I’ll fire!” + +Then to his hearing came the words, “Is that you, Tom?” It was the voice +of his brother Dick, and Tom replied joyously: + +“Yes, Dick.” + +Crack! It was a musket-shot. The sentinel, hearing the voices, and +thinking, perhaps, that an attack was about to be made, fired, as much +to give the alarm as with the expectation of hitting the person that had +escaped from the enclosure. + +The bullet did not hit Tom, who had stopped, and as soon as he was +joined by Dick, they hastened onward, and were quickly at a point of +safety and out of range. There they paused and stood listening. + +There was considerable noise and excitement at the fort. Lights showed +in the upper room of the fort, and presently the gate opened and it was +evident that some soldiers had come forth, with the intention of +pursuing the fugitive. + +“I guess we had better go in the direction of the patriot encampment, +Tom,” decided Dick. “Those redcoats will be here in a few minutes, and +it will be best for us to be somewhere else.” + +They made their way through the forest, and told their stories as they +went. By the time they had finished relating their remarkable +experiences they were at the encampment, and Tom accompanied Dick to the +headquarters tent, for he had a better knowledge regarding the interior +of the fort than Dick. He had been in all the rooms when he was supposed +to be a member of the British force, and the information he gave about +the building was received with pleasure by General Greene. + +Then, having given all the information in their possession, Dick and +Tom, went to their quarters, where Tom was given a cordial greeting by +his comrades. + +Next morning General Greene called a council of war. When the officers +were all in the tent, the general told them that he had made up his mind +to begin the attack that morning, if the idea met with the approval of +the officers. + +There was not much discussion, for the members of the staff were all +eager to advance on Fort Ninety-Six and attack the fort. As soon as it +had been decided as to the details, the soldiers broke camp and advanced +slowly, dragging the field-pieces with them. + +When they reached the edge of the wood, they halted and planted the +field-pieces for effective use and began firing on the fort. + +The little six-pound balls did not make much impression on the heavy +logs, however, and it seemed doubtful if they would damage the +stockade-walls very much. + +This firing was kept up pretty steadily, but did not have much effect, +and it was decided to wait till nightfall, and try to set fire to the +fort. + +Slowly the hours rolled away, and when evening came, the soldiers began +gathering dry wood, with the intention of carrying it and placing it +against the wall, and then when it was set on fire, there would be a big +blaze, by the light of which redcoats could be shot if they attempted to +put out the fire. + +Luckily it was a dark night, and the soldiers were enabled to carry the +wood and pile it against the walls without being seen, though they had +to exercise great care to avoid discovery. + +Among those who were most active in this work were Dick and Tom Dare and +Ben Foster, and they were eager to see the fire started, for they hoped +it would result in the capture of the fort. + +Slowly the work went on, and at last a sufficient amount of wood had +been piled against the wall, and now the next move was to set fire to +the wood. + +This would be a very dangerous undertaking, as the moment the fire was +started, the person or persons starting it would be revealed by the +light of the flames, and would be in danger of being shot before they +could get out of range. + +General Greene did not like to name anyone for this dangerous work, and +so he called for volunteers. A dozen of the soldiers, Dick and Tom Dare +and Ben Foster among them, stepped forward at once, and offered their +services. + +“I expected that there would be plenty who would be willing to risk +getting shot in order to render a service to the patriot Cause,” said +the general. “But, how shall I choose from among you?” + +“By lot,” suggested a soldier. And this was done, and the result was +that Dick Dare and Tim Murphy were the ones who were to venture up to +the wall of the fort and set the fire. + +“Sure an’ we are the byes phwat can do thot work, all roight, Dick,” +said Tim. + +“We will do the best we can to make a success of setting the wood on +fire,” replied Dick. + +They provided themselves with flint and steel and tinder, and then set +out in the direction of the fort. + +Slowly they made their way to the point where the wood was piled against +the wall, and, reaching there, they crouched down, got out their flint +and steel and tinder, and got ready to start the fire. + +[Illustration: Suddenly these sparks caught in the tinder.] + +Slowly and carefully they began striking the flint with the steel, and +with each blow they expected to hear a commotion from the sentinels on +the platform along the wall. + +Click, click, click. With each click little sparks flew from the flint, +and suddenly these sparks caught in the tinder, which blazed upward +quickly, revealing the two brave patriots who were thus risking their +lives for the good of the patriot Cause. + +The light from the tinder was seen by the sentinels above, and the next +moment there was a great outcry, and the sentinels, looking over and +catching sight of the two patriots, who were now running away from the +fort as fast as possible, opened fire, and several musket-shots were +fired at the fugitives. + +Luckily, however, none of the shots were effective, the bullets going +wide of the mark, and Dick and Tim kept on running and were soon in the +timber and among their comrades. + +Then the patriots watched the growing fire eagerly, and the soldiers +that had been instructed to shoot the redcoats if they tried to +extinguish the fire, waited eagerly for the attempt to be made, their +muskets held in readiness for instant use. + +Then suddenly the gate of the fort was thrown open and out rushed a +large number of British soldiers, bringing water with which to put out +the fire. + +And as they appeared, the patriot soldiers opened fire, and a rain of +bullets was poured in among the British. + +Crash! roar! Loudly the volleys rang out, and yells of pain and rage +went up from the lips of the redcoats struck by the bullets. + +And then to the rattle of the musketry was added the boom-boom of the +field-pieces. + + + + + CHAPTER XXIII + + The Siege + + +Doubtless the patriots would have been able to keep the redcoats from +putting out the fire, and it would have burned the stockade-wall and +perhaps the fort, but a thunder-storm came up just as the affair was at +its height, and a heavy rain beating down on the fire, put it out. + +The patriots, realizing that it would be useless to try to set the fort +afire when the wood was wet, returned to their encampment, and made +themselves as comfortable as they could for the night. + +Next morning work was resumed, but no very rapid progress was made. They +kept pounding the stockade-wall with six-pound cannon balls, but they +did not seem to make much impression. Nor did General Greene deem it +wise to try to storm the fort, for the structure was too strong to break +through, and the wall was too high to scale. + +It began to look as if the siege was to be a long one, and the patriots +settled down to take it as easy as possible, and make a thorough job of +the affair. They were determined that they would capture the fort sooner +or later. + +When the siege had been going on four or five days, a patriot settler +came to the encampment, and told General Greene that a British force was +coming to reinforce Fort Ninety-Six, and it was about fifty miles +distant, and coming from the coast. General Sumpter had sent the patriot +to warn General Greene. + +The general called a council of the members of his staff, and then they +questioned the patriot closely. + +“How long will it take the British to reach here?” asked General Greene. + +“About three days, I think,” was the reply. + +“And how strong a force is it?” + +“The man that brought the news to General Sumpter said there was about +five hundred soldiers in the force.” + +“That number, in addition to the force that Major Cruger already has in +the fort will make his army too strong for us,” said General Greene. + +“We must capture the fort before the reinforcements get here,” said +Captain Morgan. + +“Yes, so we must,” agreed the general. “That is, if we can.” + +“We are weakening the stockade-walls,” said another officer. “I believe +that in another day of pounding the wall with six-pound shots we will be +able to make an opening, and then we can storm the works.” + +“We will try to force our way into the enemy’s works, anyhow,” said +General Greene. “We will get to work early in the morning, and keep at +work till we succeed.” + +The patriots were up early next morning, and soon after breakfast the +bombardment of the fort with the six-pounders was begun, and was kept up +steadily throughout the day, but when evening came the wall still stood +firm. + +The patriots began to believe that they would not be able to break down +the wall and get at the enemy. + +Still, they were determined, and next day they worked as hard as ever, +but when evening came the wall still stood firm. The patriots were +disappointed, but made preparations to continue the work as +energetically as ever on the morrow. + +After an early breakfast next morning, they went at it, and kept the +field-pieces busy till noon, and then as the wall still withstood the +fire from the six-pounders, General Greene began figuring on storming +the fort anyway. + +“The British reinforcements may get here this afternoon,” he said, “and +we haven’t much time in which to work. We must try to effect an entrance +at the point where we have been trying to cause a breach with the +field-pieces.” + +The other officers agreed with him, and so about the middle of the +afternoon an attempt was made to storm the enemy’s works. For a while +there was a desperate battle, and the patriots came very near effecting +an entrance, but finally they were repulsed, and had to retreat to the +edge of the forest. + +It was now getting along toward evening, and the dead and wounded +patriots were removed under a flag of truce, the dead being buried and +the wounded taken care of. + +Dick Dare had gone to General Greene as soon as the patriot force had +retreated, and he suggested that he should go and reconnoiter and see if +the British reinforcements were anywhere near, and the general had told +him to go ahead. + +“That is a good idea,” he said. “The British may be near here now.” + +Dick set out, and made his way eastward at a rapid pace, and kept onward +till nightfall, when he stopped at a farmhouse and asked if any redcoats +had been seen in that vicinity. + +The settler said no, and Dick went on his way, but when night came, he +had not seen any signs of the British. + +“They are not far away, I am certain,” was his thought. “Well, I’ll keep +on till I get them located. They will be in camp, likely, somewhere near +here.” + +A few minutes later he caught sight of the glimmer of a campfire in the +distance, and he advanced slowly and cautiously, and when about one +hundred and fifty yards from the camp, he paused and stood there, gazing +at the scene with interest. + +It was the British force, sure enough, and when he had sized it up +closely, he decided that there was nearer one thousand men than five +hundred. + +“Our force could not hope to capture Fort Ninety-Six after this force +gets there,” he murmured. “And this force will reach there easily by +noon to-morrow.” + +Having sized up the British force, Dick turned and made his way back in +the direction of the patriot encampment, reaching there about half-past +ten o’clock. He went direct to the tent occupied by General Greene, and +found the general still up. + +“I found the encampment of the British, sir,” said Dick, after +exchanging greetings. + +“Ah, indeed. How far from here is the encampment, Dick?” + +“About ten or twelve miles.” + +“How strong a force have they?” was the next question. + +“There is nearer one thousand men than five hundred, sir.” + +“Ah. Then the force is stronger than the messenger thought.” + +“Yes, sir.” + +The general asked a number of questions, all of which Dick answered, and +then the youth went to the quarters occupied by his company, and told +Tom and Ben about the British. + +“That means that we will have a big battle to-morrow,” said Tom, his +voice trembling with eagerness. + +“Likely,” said Dick. + +“But they will outnumber us greatly,” said Ben. + +“Yes,” said Dick, “but we will make a strong fight, and if we could +manage to capture the fort before the reinforcements get here, I believe +we could hold it.” + +“I wish we could capture the fort,” said Tom. + +Then they lay down and were soon sound asleep. + + + + + CHAPTER XXIV + + Lively Work + + +The patriot force was up very early next morning, and had eaten +breakfast before daylight, and as soon as they could see, they began the +attack on Fort Ninety-Six. + +They fired with the field-pieces as rapidly as possible, and about the +middle of the forenoon they charged upon the fort and made another +attempt to force an entrance, but the British fought desperately, and +the patriot force was driven back. + +And soon afterward word was brought by a messenger that had been sent to +keep watch for the coming British reinforcements, to the effect that the +force in question was close at hand. + +It would be useless to try to attack the fort again, and so General +Greene ordered that they advance, take up as strong a position as +possible, and resist with persistence the approaching force of British. + +The patriot soldiers made their way to the top of a sort of ridge about +half a mile east of Fort Ninety-Six, and here they stationed themselves +behind trees and awaited the coming of the enemy. + +Presently they caught sight of the redcoats approaching, but it was seen +a few moments later that it was only an advance guard. The redcoats had +heard the sound of the battle, and were cautious, and had sent a +reconnoitering party ahead, so as to avoid an ambush. + +The patriots, knowing they would be discovered before the main force +reached the spot, opened fire on the party as soon as it came in range, +and several of the redcoats were dropped, dead or wounded. + +The rest beat a hasty retreat, and rejoined the main force, and reported +the presence of the patriot force at the top of the ridge. The party +came to a stop, and the officers held a council. + +Two or three of the officers were for making an attack, but the others +thought differently, and so it was decided to make a detour and go +around the patriots. + +This was done, but the patriots learned of the movement, through Dick, +who had followed the reconnoitering party and kept watch on the British, +and the patriots managed to reach a point from which they could fire on +the British as they passed, and killed and wounded a few. + +The redcoats returned the fire, but did not stop to show fight. They +kept onward at as fast a pace as possible, until they reached the fort, +which they entered, and they received a hearty welcome from Major +Cruger, who had begun to think that he would have to surrender the fort. + +The patriots went into camp about a mile from Fort Ninety-Six, and it +was decided to wait and see what the British would do. + +“I believe that we could hold this position, here on the top of this +ridge,” said General Greene. “And I am in favor of staying and giving +them one battle, at any rate.” + +The other officers agreed with him in his view of the matter, and so +they put in the rest of the day, strengthening their position by +throwing up earthworks. + +When this had been finished, the patriots settled down to take it easy +and await some move on the part of the British. + +Dick and Tom and Ben were stationed near the fort, to keep watch and +report any move the enemy might make, and General Greene felt that his +force would be able to make a good showing, as the patriot youths would +send him word if the British emerged and started to come toward the camp +of the patriots. + +No such move was made that day, however, nor during the night, and the +patriots had an opportunity to get rested up, after their hard work +during the siege. It was a privilege appreciated by both officers and +men. + +Next morning, however, the British came forth from the fort, and began +to advance toward the point where the patriot force had taken up its +position. + +They advanced slowly, and Dick sent word by Tom that the redcoats were +coming, and General Greene began making ready to receive the enemy. + +Dick and Ben moved back slowly, till they came to the patriot position, +and then they informed General Greene of the nearness of the British, +who put in an appearance a few minutes later. + +The British made an attack, advancing swiftly and firing as they came. +They charged up the slope, toward the patriot position, but the +patriots, crouching in the ditch, with the earthwork before them, were +in a protected position, and as soon as the redcoats were within range, +they opened fire. + +The battle was on, and a lively battle it was, for a while. The rattle +of the musketry and pistols was loud, and the yells of pain from the +wounded British soldiers added to the din. The patriots were not injured +much, because the bullets from the enemy’s weapons did not penetrate the +earthworks. + +The British made a desperate attempt to enter the encampment and capture +the patriot force, but they failed, and finally retreated, taking their +dead and wounded with them. + +The patriots were very well satisfied with the result of the battle, but +they realized that they might not be successful again, and so General +Greene called a council and asked the officers if they did not think it +best to begin a retreat. + +The officers said they favored retreating, as the British were now too +strong for them, and so that evening, after supper was over and the +soldiers had rested a while, they broke camp and started on the march +toward the east. + +They marched onward till about midnight, and then they stopped and went +into camp. They were far enough away from the British, so that they did +not fear an attack, but there might be Indians around, though hardly in +strong enough force to make much trouble. + +The patriots did not break camp next morning till rather late, and they +had just got started, when a British force was seen approaching from the +direction of Fort Ninety-Six. + +“They are coming in pursuit,” said General Greene. + +This was indeed the case, and during that day there was almost a +constant exchange of shots between the British and the patriots. + +A large party of Indians put in an appearance, also, and aided the +British in hindering the marching of the patriots as much as possible. + +The redskins were so good at concealing themselves behind trees that it +was difficult to injure them, and they did considerable damage. + +That night the patriot force went into camp on the top of a knoll and +made its position as strong as possible. Double the usual number of +sentinels were stationed, and it would not be possible for the British +to take them by surprise. + +The British did not make an attack that night, however, but instead +encircled the encampment of the patriots, and when morning came, the +patriots found that they could not proceed, unless they fought their way +through the British lines. + +What to do was the question. If they remained, they would probably +sooner or later be captured, as the British force was more than twice as +strong as their own, and to try to break through the enemy’s lines would +be to cause the loss of many patriot lives. + +It was decided, at a council, to remain on the knoll and hold the +British in check as long as possible. + +“If we can get word to General Sumpter, he will come to our assistance,” +said General Greene, and he summoned Dick Dare and asked him if he were +willing to make the attempt to slip through the British lines, after +nightfall, that evening, and carry a message to General Sumpter. + +As the readers of the Dare Boys stories know, and as they will see by +reading the next volume, entitled, “The Dare Boys With La Fayette,” Dick +Dare was always ready to attempt any feat, no matter how dangerous, if +it would benefit the patriot cause, so now he said promptly that he +would make the attempt. + +The British did not make a strong attack, that day, but contented +themselves with firing at the patriots whenever they caught sight of +one. The patriots returned the fire, and thus the day passed, and +evening came. + +And as soon as it was dark, Dick Dare started on his perilous +expedition, and worked his way slowly and cautiously through the British +lines. He had selected the weakest point of the line for his attempt, +and he succeeded in getting through, though he was discovered by a +sentinel as he was hastening away, and was fired at. He ran swiftly, +however, and although he was pursued, he managed to escape in the +darkness. + +He had received instructions as to the whereabouts of Sumpter, from the +man that had brought the news of the coming of the British force, and so +he did not have a great deal of difficulty in finding Sumpter. + +When Dick told Sumpter that the patriot force under General Greene was +surrounded by a superior force of British and that he needed assistance, +Sumpter said that he would go to the assistance of the patriot party at +once. + +He set out, with his force, consisting of about five hundred men, and +reached the vicinity of the encampment of the patriot force about the +middle of the afternoon of the next day. + +He advanced and attacked the British with great energy, and they, taken +by surprise, were thrown into great disorder. Then the patriot force on +the knoll charged out upon the British, and added to the confusion, and +for a while there raged about as fierce a battle as one would expect to +see. + +The British tried to rally and hold their ground, but could not do so, +and finally they broke and fled at the top of their speed, pursued by +the patriots, who were glad to turn the tables on the British. + +The British continued on in the direction of Fort Ninety-Six, and it +seemed evident that they did not intend to linger in the vicinity of the +patriots, now that they had a strong force. + +Generals Greene and Sumpter held a council, and after considerable +discussion, decided not to follow the enemy and try to capture Fort +Ninety-Six. + +Instead they joined forces and went to another part of South Carolina, +where the redcoats and Indians were causing the patriot settlers a lot +of trouble, and made it so hot for the British and Tories and Indians +that they were glad to cease operations and head in the direction of +Fort Ninety-Six. + +The patriots were well satisfied with their work. They had stopped most +of the work of plundering by redcoats, Tories and Indians, and were +ready to start to make it lively for other gangs of Tories and Indians, +in other parts of the country. + +Dick and Tom Dare, and Ben Foster, having gotten through the campaign +without being wounded, were well pleased with their part in the +campaign, and were eager for further adventures. + +“I like the excitement of battling with the British,” said Tom, as they +sat in camp, at evening, and talked of the exciting adventures they had +gone through in the past few weeks. “I hope we will soon get started on +another series of adventures just as exciting.” + +“I don’t like fighting for the sake of the excitement of the fight,” +said Dick; “but I am always glad to be fighting when it is to be for the +benefit and good of the patriot Cause.” + +“That is the way I look at the matter,” said Ben. “I shall be glad when +the war ends, so far as I am concerned.” + +“And so shall I,” said Dick. + +“Sure an’ it’s mesilf thot loikes foightin’ as well as the nixt wan,” +said Tim Murphy. “But Oi’ll be willin’ to settle down an’ take it aisy +whin the war is over.” + +“Yah, und dot is der vay I loog at id,” said Fritz Schmockenburg. + +“Well, there will likely be a lot of fighting yet, before the war is +ended,” said Tom. + +“There will be considerable fighting in the next few months, likely,” +said Dick. + +And he was right. The war did not end till more than a year later, when +the British were defeated at Yorktown. + + THE END + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Dare Boys with General Greene, by +Stephen Angus Cox + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE *** + +***** This file should be named 44631-0.txt or 44631-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/6/3/44631/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/44631-0.zip b/old/44631-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f04db1 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-0.zip diff --git a/old/44631-h.zip b/old/44631-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8e283d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h.zip diff --git a/old/44631-h/44631-h.htm b/old/44631-h/44631-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6cf4726 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/44631-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,4765 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> + <title>The Dare Boys with General Greene, by Stephen Angus Cox</title> + <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> + <meta content="images/cover.jpg" name="cover" /> + <meta name='DC.Title' content='The Dare Boys with General Greene' /> + <meta name='DC.Creator' content='Stephen Angus Cox' /> + <meta name='DC.Language' content='en' /> + <meta name='DC.Created' content='1910' /> + <style type="text/css"> + body { margin-left:8%;margin-right:10% } + p { text-indent:0;margin-top:0.5em;margin-bottom:0.5em;text-align:justify } + .sc { font-variant:small-caps } + .larger { font-size:larger } + .xlarge { font-size:x-large } + .smaller { font-size:smaller } + table { margin:1em auto; } + td.tc1 { text-align:right;padding-right:0.5em; } + td.tc2 { text-align:left; } + td.tch { text-align:center; padding-bottom:0.5em; } + h1 { text-align:center;font-weight:normal;font-size:1.4em; margin:2em auto 1em auto} + h1.nobreak { page-break-before: auto; } + h2 { text-align:center;font-weight:normal;font-size:1.2em; margin:2em auto 1em auto} + h2.break { page-break-before: always; } + h2.nobreak { page-break-before: auto; } + .c000 { text-align:center;margin:1em auto; } + .c001 { width:332px;height:525px; } + .c002 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:332px; } + .c003 { width:43px;height:50px; } + .c004 { margin-left:5.56%;margin-right:5.56%; } + .c005 { margin-top:1em } + .c006 { margin-top:3em } + .c007 { width:333px;height:525px; } + .c008 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:333px; } + .c009 { width:335px;height:525px; } + .c010 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:335px; } + .d000 { page-break-before:always;border:none;border-bottom:1px solid silver;margin:1em auto; } + @media handheld { .d000 { page-break-before:always;display:none; }} + .nf-center-c { text-align:center;margin:1em 0 } + .nf-center { text-align:center } + .nf-block-c { text-align:center;margin:1em 0 } + .nf-block { display:inline-block;text-align:left } + </style> + </head> + <body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's The Dare Boys with General Greene, by Stephen Angus Cox + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Dare Boys with General Greene + +Author: Stephen Angus Cox + +Illustrator: Rudolf Mencl + +Release Date: January 9, 2014 [EBook #44631] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div class='c000'> +<a href='images/illus-fpcf.jpg'><img src='images/illus-fpc.jpg' alt='' class='c001' /></a> +<p class='c002'>Dick was taken by surprise.</p> +</div> + +<hr class='d000' /> + +<div class='nf-center-c'> + <div class='nf-center'> + <span class='xlarge'>The Dare Boys<br/> + with<br/> + General Greene</span><br/> + <br/> + <span class='smaller'>BY</span><br/> + STEPHEN ANGUS COX<br/> + <br/> + Illustrations by <span class='sc'>Rudolf Mencl</span> + </div> +</div> + +<div class='c000'> +<img src='images/illus-emb.png' alt='' class='c003' /> +</div> + +<div class='nf-center-c'> + <div class='nf-center'> + <span class='smaller'>NEW YORK</span><br/> + A. L. CHATTERTON CO.<br/> + <span class='smaller'>PUBLISHERS</span> + </div> +</div> + +<hr class='d000' /> + +<div class='nf-center-c'> + <div class='nf-center'> + <span class='larger'>THE DARE BOYS</span> + </div> +</div> + +<p class='c004'>Stephen Angus Cox, the author of the Dare Boys Series is specially +equipped through long study and research to write upon the life and +adventures of these two daring sons of the revolutionary period. +Every item of historical reference is absolutely correct. The trials +and inherent bravery of the sturdy warriors of this epoch are always +subjects worth while, but here the dash and bravery of the two Dare +boys adds immeasurably to the interest.</p> + +<div class='nf-block-c'> + <div class='nf-block'> + THE DARE BOYS OF 1776<br/> + THE DARE BOYS ON THE HUDSON<br/> + THE DARE BOYS IN TRENTON<br/> + THE DARE BOYS ON THE BRANDYWINE<br/> + THE DARE BOYS IN THE RED CITY<br/> + THE DARE BOYS AFTER BENEDICT ARNOLD<br/> + THE DARE BOYS IN VIRGINIA<br/> + THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE<br/> + THE DARE BOYS WITH LAFAYETTE<br/> + THE DARE BOYS AND THE “SWAMP FOX” + </div> +</div> + +<p> </p> + +<div class='nf-center-c'> + <div class='nf-center'> + Illustrated, Cloth 12mo. Price per volume 50 cents.<br/> + <br/> + Copyright, 1910<br/> + <span class='smaller'>BY</span><br/> + The A. L. Chatterton Co. + </div> +</div> + +<hr class='d000' /> +<table summary='toc'> +<tr><td colspan='2' class='tch'>CONTENTS</td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>I.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch01'>The Dare Boys and the Indians</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>II.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch02'>Peaceful Valley</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>III.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch03'>Riding the Flood</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>IV.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch04'>Dick and the Indians</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>V.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch05'>Gabe Gurley</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>VI.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch06'>In the Cabin</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>VII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch07'>Tom Tries Woodcraft</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>VIII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch08'>A Battle with a Wolf</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>IX.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch09'>In Search of Tom</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>X.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch10'>At Fort Ninety-Six</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XI.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch11'>At the Stake</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch12'>Fritz and the Indians</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XIII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch13'>Tom and the Redcoats</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XIV.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch14'>Friends in Need</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XV.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch15'>Preparing for Trouble</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XVI.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch16'>The Search for Dick</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XVII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch17'>Ben Reconnoiters</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XVIII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch18'>Dick and the Panther</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XIX.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch19'>The Settlers’ Retreat</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XX.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch20'>Dick Appears</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XXI.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch21'>In the Fort</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XXII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch22'>Tom Makes a Discovery</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XXIII.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch23'>The Siege</a></td></tr> +<tr><td class='tc1'>XXIV.</td><td class='tc2'><a href='#ch24'>Lively Work</a></td></tr> +</table> + +<hr class='d000' /> + +<h1 class='nobreak'>THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE</h1> + +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<h2 id='ch01' class='nobreak'>CHAPTER I<br /><br />The Dare Boys and the Indians</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Three youths of perhaps twenty years of age were making their way +through the forest. The locality was about fifty miles from Ninety-Six, +in South Carolina, and Ninety-Six was so called because it was +approximately that number of miles from Fort Price George. This was the +nearest fort of any size.</p> + +<p>The three youths were no others than Dick and Tom Dare, and their +comrade, Ben Foster, who had been members of the patriot army of America +for a considerable period--for it was now May of the year 1781.</p> + +<p>These youths, who had done brave fighting, were also famous for having +done much good work as scouts, messengers and spies, and they were now +on a scouting and spying expedition, ordered by General Greene, their +company having been sent down from Virginia into South Carolina to help +General Greene. The objective point was Ninety-Six, but there had been +lots of fighting to do with parties of British and Tories, and the +advance southward had been slow. Hearing that the Cherokee Indians were +on the warpath, having been incited thereto by the British, and that +they were committing a good many depredations and killing patriot +settlers, were burning and pillaging, General Greene had sent the youths +to learn the actual facts, for, if the Indians were committing as great +a havoc as had been stated, he would push on down into that region as +quickly as he could move his forces, and try to put a stop to their +depredations.</p> + +<p>So here the youths were, and they were moving slowly and cautiously; +indeed a settler that they had met a few miles back had told them that +the Cherokees were in this vicinity, and had advised the youths to be +very careful or they would be interfered with.</p> + +<p>They came to the top of a knoll, and pausing, looked ahead with keen and +searching gaze. At first they saw nothing noteworthy, but presently, +Dick uttered a low exclamation indicating interest and indicating with +his extended arm, said: “I believe I saw an Indian over there!”</p> + +<p>“Where?” asked Tom, eagerly.</p> + +<p>Dick pointed in the direction in which he thought he had seen the +Indian, and the three youths all gazed eagerly. For a few moments they +did not make out any sign of a living being, but suddenly out from +behind a tree about a hundred yards distant appeared a bronzed face. The +head was covered with thick, straight hair, and topped, it was seen, +with eagle feathers.</p> + +<p>“There he is!” exclaimed Tom, excitedly, but in a low voice.</p> + +<p>“Sh,” cautioned Dick. They stood perfectly still, and hoped that because +of the fact that they were pretty well hidden behind the underbrush upon +the top of the knoll, they would not be observed. They did not know how +keen-eyed a Cherokee Indian was, however, for suddenly a loud, thrilling +war-whoop escaped the lips of the redskin, and then from several +different directions the whoop was answered.</p> + +<p>“He’s calling his companions!” exclaimed Ben. “We are in danger of +capture, Dick!”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I guess we had better get away from here.” In a moment he added, +“Follow me, boys.”</p> + +<p>Then Dick turned and started swiftly down the slope, Tom and Ben keeping +close at his heels, and from behind them came the wild, thrilling +war-whoops of the redskins.</p> + +<p>“They’re surely after us!” exclaimed Tom.</p> + +<p>“Yes. We’ll have to make good time if we get away from them,” said Dick. +“They may be spread out, I should judge so from their calls, and it may +take them some time to get together.”</p> + +<p>The patriot youths ran rapidly and glancing back over his shoulder, Dick +saw that at least one of the redskins was coming after them as fast as +he could travel. The brave patriot youth realized that they were going +to have a much harder time shaking these Indians off their trail than +they usually had with the redcoats. The British soldiers were rather +clumsy and slow, but these redskins were lithe as panthers, and as +speedy, almost, and could continue running for hours.</p> + +<p>“Do your best, boys,” he told his companions. “For I believe that they +are gaining on us.”</p> + +<p>“Run as fast as you can, Dick,” panted Tom; “we’ll keep up with you.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll try, at any rate,” said Ben.</p> + +<p>On they dashed, and after them, whooping in a manner that would have +filled the hearts of less brave youths with terror, came the Indians. +Doubtless the red fiends thought they would easily surround the +fugitives, and make escape impossible. Presently Dick and his party came +to a deep gulch or ravine. The wall on their side was nearly +perpendicular, and they could not descend it. Here was a predicament +indeed. They paused, irresolute, and looked to the right and to the +left, only to see that the wall of the gulch was as steep everywhere +within sight. They could see for quite a distance too in either +direction, as the point where they were standing rather projected out +toward the other side.</p> + +<p>The yelling of redskins determined the fact that they were within a few +hundred yards and swiftly cutting down the distance. And, too, they were +spreading out, fan-shape, with the evident intention of hemming the +youths in and preventing them from going up or down the edge of the +gulch. Of course they knew full well the contour of the land and thought +they had their intended prey, as it were, in a trap.</p> + +<p>“There doesn’t seem to be any escape for us, Dick,” said Ben.</p> + +<p>“Gracious,” cried Tom. “Look at that black cloud to the north.” It had +not attracted their attention before, but now they saw that a terrible +storm was impending.</p> + +<p>Dick looked eagerly around, and suddenly he pointed to a very tall, +slender tree, of some growth he did not recognize, that stood close to +the edge of the precipice. The rains had washed out the earth from about +the roots and the tree was inclined at an angle well out over the +ravine.</p> + +<p>“Quick!” he cried. “Let’s climb that tree and swing over the precipice. +It will bend and will let us down I think to within twelve or fifteen +feet of the bottom of the gulch.”</p> + +<p>“That’s an idea worth trying,” cried Tom, and he was first to tackle the +task and was quickly followed by Dick and Ben.</p> + +<p>The three occasionally assisting one another made rapid progress and +Dick meantime further explained his project. Their united weight would +bend down the long slender trunk and at his command all were to drop at +once into the depth beneath. Where would they land? There was not time +to think.</p> + +<p>While the Indians were yet at some distance, the youths found that their +weight was effectively bending down the tree into the ravine. The change +was gradual at first, and then the more slender wood gave quicker +response to the strain, so that finally it bent so low into the depths +below that the boys instead of climbing up were sliding down toward the +tree top. Before the Indians reached a point where they could observe +the boys they had disappeared below the level of the ground which marked +the margin of the declivity.</p> + +<p>Down, farther and farther went the patriot youths, and as the redskins +came upon the scene they saw their intended victims slipping out of +their hands in a most peculiar manner. They gave expression to their +chagrin in yells of rage, brandished their tomahawks, and threatened to +discharge arrows, but did neither. It seemed evident, from this, that +they wished to capture the youths alive. Doubtless they knew the three +were newcomers in that region, and wished to find out why they were +there. Possibly they were working in co-operation with the British and +had been instructed to capture any strangers seen and bring them to the +officer in command.</p> + +<p>Anyhow, they did not discharge any arrows or throw any tomahawks, which +probably saved the youths’ lives, for the Indians, being expert in the +use of those weapons, could hardly have missed at so short a range.</p> + +<p>Down lower and lower swung the three youths, and presently they came to +a point beyond which Dick deemed it not prudent to test the strength of +the wood. They were now within perhaps nine or ten feet of the bottom of +the gulch. “When I count three, let go and drop, boys,” ordered Dick. +“The fall won’t hurt us,” he added encouragingly.</p> + +<p>One.</p> + +<p>Two.</p> + +<p>Three.</p> + +<p>The boys let go at the same moment and down they dropped, striking on +the rocks of the gulch-bottom with considerable force, and dropping to +their hands and knees, but they were not injured, excepting that they +were jarred somewhat.</p> + +<p>Then the Indians repeated their wild yells, and two of them began +climbing the same tree, it having sprung back to its original, more +nearly perpendicular, position. It was evidently the intention of the +redskins to duplicate the feat of the youths.</p> + +<p>“Quick, let’s run down the gulch, till we come to a place where we can +climb the wall,” ordered Dick.</p> + +<p>“Look!” suddenly yelled Tom, pointing up the gulch in the direction they +had before noticed the cloud denoting an impending storm.</p> + +<p>Dick and Ben looked, and saw a wondrous sight, a wall of foaming water +coming rushing down the gulch toward them at terrible speed.</p> + +<p>“There has been a cloud-burst up the gulch!” exclaimed Dick in dismay. +“We will be swept away in that torrent!”</p> + +<p>There was no time to say much, let alone do anything, for the torrent +was sweeping toward them with the speed of the wind, and as it advanced, +it roared like thunder. The youths now saw that there were logs in the +advancing waters, swirling and pounding, and grinding against one +another.</p> + +<p>The Indians that had started to climb the tree had slid back down to the +earth, and all stood at the edge of the precipice, staring down upon the +youths, whom they doubtless believed to be doomed.</p> + +<p>And there was reason for their thinking thus, for there was terrible +force in the volume of water sweeping irresistibly upon them.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch02' class='break'>CHAPTER II<br /><br />Peaceful Valley</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>In a beautiful little valley of some three miles in length by perhaps a +little less width, several farmers were at work. They were plowing up +the ground and getting ready to plant a crop.</p> + +<p>Over at one side was a little group of log houses, ten in number, these +being the homes of the families living in Peaceful Valley. The settlers +had built the houses near together, for protection against the Indians. +And in the center of the settlement was a very strong log building, +surrounded by a thick stockade wall, with a strong gate, and the +building in question was intended as a sort of fort, to retreat to, in +case of an overwhelming attack by Indians. In the building there was +kept constantly a goodly supply of provisions, so that it would have +been possible to stand quite a siege.</p> + +<p>When we introduce the scene to the reader’s notice, the farmers were +working steadily, and quietly, and while they were on the alert, as was +their custom, they were not expecting trouble, for they had not heard of +any Indians being in their immediate vicinity, though there had been +depredations fifteen or twenty miles farther south.</p> + +<p>But suddenly a party of Indians numbering thirty or forty put in an +appearance and made an attack on the settlers, who seized their +rifles--which they always took to the field with them--and firing at the +redskins a few times, they ran to the settlement as fast as possible, +the Indians following, yelling in a blood-thirsty manner.</p> + +<p>The women and children at the houses had seen what was going on, and had +hastened to the fort, carrying such of their household goods as they +could manage handily, and they held the gate open for the men to enter. +Then, when all were within, the gate was closed quickly, and fastened. +The women and younger children entered the building, while the men +climbed to a platform that was built along the stockade-wall, on the +inside, and perhaps five feet from the top of the wall. From here they +could fire over the top of the wall, at the redskins, and then drop down +to avoid the arrows of the Indians.</p> + +<p>The redskins, finding that to attempt to break down the gate, or to +scale the wall would be to lose a number of their braves, turned their +attention to the houses, and began helping themselves to the contents. +When they had taken everything that they cared for, they set the houses +on fire, and the settlers were forced to stand there and see their homes +go up in flames.</p> + +<p>“The fiends!” growled James Holden, the leader of the colony. “Why +couldn’t they have let the houses stand? They got most of our goods. +They might have been satisfied with that.”</p> + +<p>“They’ll stay till after dark and try to get in here at us, likely,” +said Henry Perkins. “I know these Cherokee Injuns. They are mean when +they get their mad up, and these seem to be very much in earnest.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Holden. “We wounded several of them when they were chasing +us into the settlement. This naturally aroused their anger.”</p> + +<p>“It was bad enough to have to live in a neighborhood where there are a +good many Tories, without having to be bothered with the Injuns too,” +said another of the settlers.</p> + +<p>“The redcoats have put them up to going on the war-path,” said Perkins. +“It was a mean trick to do, to get them started.”</p> + +<p>“You’re right,” agreed Holden, “but look at that terribly black cloud +over to the north. There is going to be a storm and that right quick or +I miss my guess.”</p> + +<p>The Indians, having finished setting fire to all the houses, retired to +a little distance, squatted down on the ground, and watched the +structures burning.</p> + +<p>Then, when the buildings had burned down, the redskins began dividing +the plunder they had secured from the houses, and when this was +finished, they advanced as close to the fort as they dared. Here they +stopped and held a council, of some sort, evidently trying to decide +upon some plan for getting into the fort and at the settlers.</p> + +<p>They talked and gesticulated at a great rate, and were apparently not +agreed, or at a loss to determine upon any further procedure.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think there is much danger of their making an attack during +daylight,” said Holden, when they had watched the redskins a while.</p> + +<p>“No, but they’ll try to get into the stockade to-night, without any +doubt,” said Perkins. “Unless,” he added “that storm drives them away. +Somehow the Indians don’t seem to notice its coming at all.”</p> + +<p>“They are lower down in the gulch and perhaps do not see about as well +as we do up here,” said another.</p> + +<p>The other men all thought the same, but while they did not expect an +attack before nightfall, yet they did not relax their vigilance. They +kept their eyes on the enemy.</p> + +<p>“I wish that General Greene would come down this way, with his army,” +said another of the settlers.</p> + +<p>“Mebby he will come down here,” said another. “I heerd that he is up in +North Caroliny.”</p> + +<p>“There are going to be terrible times around in the neighborhood of +Ninety-Six, pretty soon, I think,” said Holden. “And it would be a good +thing if General Greene came here.”</p> + +<p>“He’d put a stop to the Injuns’ doin’s, mighty quick,” said another.</p> + +<p>The others agreed that General Greene’s army would be able to put a stop +to the depredations of the Indians, and then make it exceedingly hot as +well for the redcoats in Ninety-Six and vicinity.</p> + +<p>Then they ceased talking for a few minutes, while they watched the +redskins, who had taken seats on the ground, with their faces toward the +fort. They were about three hundred yards distant, and behind them, at +about the same distance, was rough, broken country, with a deep gulch +running through it, the mouth of the gulch being almost opposite the +Indians’ backs.</p> + +<p>Suddenly, one of the settlers, who happened to glance toward the mouth +of the gulch, exclaimed, excitedly: “Look yonder! Look at the mouth of +the gulch!”</p> + +<p>The others turned their eyes in that direction, and saw a sight that +made them all give vent to exclamations of astonishment. They saw, +indeed, an avalanche of water at least ten feet in height coming +sweeping down the gulch, foaming and, as it neared the end of the gulch, +roaring at a great rate.</p> + +<p>The Indians heard the sound, and leaped to their feet and turned, and +when they saw the wall of water rushing toward the mouth of the gulch, +they gave utterance to wild yells and started to run, to get out of the +path of the flood.</p> + +<p>They could not succeed, however, for the torrent came pouring out of the +mouth of the gulch and dashing on across the level, spreading as it +came, and before they could get out of reach, the water was upon them, +and had them in its swirling embrace.</p> + +<p>Some of them were struck by the logs and knocked senseless, and two or +three were drowned. Others were swept onward and landed against the +stockade-wall around the fort, while others still were carried past and +went on across the valley, with the waters.</p> + +<p>The settlers and the women and children, had watched this strange +happening with wondering eyes, and with a kind of pleasure, too, for it +had put an end to a problem that had been bothering them, had put the +Indians to utter rout, at least for the time being.</p> + +<p>“There must have been a cloud-burst up the gulch,” said one of the men.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that was what happened,” said Holden. “Well, it was a good thing +for us, for it has put the redskins to flight.”</p> + +<p>“It has put some of them to death,” said Perkins. “I see three bodies, +yonder.”</p> + +<p>“They were hit by the logs, and then drowned afterwards,” said another.</p> + +<p>“Yas. Well, it saved us the trouble of shooting them.”</p> + +<p>“So it did,” said Holden.</p> + +<p>“But, our houses are burned down!” murmured one of the women. “They have +burned our homes, and the flood has spoiled the ground that had been +fixed for planting.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, well, we can do the work over again,” said Perkins. “And we can +build new houses.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, that’s so,” said Holden. “I’m mighty glad the flood happened along +and drowned a few of the redskins and scared the others away.”</p> + +<p>By the middle of the afternoon the ground was dry again, the sun having +come out and shone brightly, and the settlers went out and buried the +three dead Indians. Then they returned to the fort, and when nightfall +came, they placed two men on guard, for they thought it possible that +the Indians might come back again.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch03' class='break'>CHAPTER III<br /><br />Riding the Flood</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>When the flood of foaming, seething water swept over Dick, Tom and Ben +and engulfed them, they thought at first that their time had come; but +Dick shouted; “Grab hold of a log and stick to it if possible.” Each +managed so to do and by holding to the logs tightly, they were born +along with the rushing flood. They swallowed a good deal of water but +escaped being drowned. As the boys disappeared beneath the onrush of the +torrent, the Indians standing on the edge of the precipice, gazed down +with a look of awe on their bronzed faces.</p> + +<p>Onward down the gulch the boys were carried, however, with great speed, +and when they had gone what seemed like two or three miles from the +point where they had been overtaken by the flood, they came to a point +where the gulch split, becoming two gulches, one going off at right +angles while the other turned slightly to the left. As the one leading +to the right was wider, had lower banks and the water was not swirling +at such a terrible rate, the three youths were able to guide the logs +into the gulch on that side, and were soon being borne onward at a more +moderate pace.</p> + +<p>Onward they were swept, until finally they suddenly shot out from the +mouth of the gulch and found themselves in a good-sized river.</p> + +<p>They let go now their holds on the logs, swam to the shore and clambered +out upon the bank, which was low and sloping, and dropping down on the +sand, they lay there, panting and resting.</p> + +<p>“Well, didn’t that beat any experience that we have ever had since we +joined the patriot army?” cried Tom, presently, when he had become +rested and was breathing normally again.</p> + +<p>“It wasn’t a very pleasing experience,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>“I should say not,” remarked Ben.</p> + +<p>“That torrent certainly carried us away from the vicinity of the +redskins very quickly,” said Tom.</p> + +<p>“Yes, it did that much good, anyhow,” agreed Dick.</p> + +<p>“I wonder where we are,” said Ben, presently.</p> + +<p>“In the land of the living,” replied Tom, with a laugh. “And that is +more than I expected would be the case, an hour ago, when that torrent +struck us.”</p> + +<p>The youths now doffed their outer garments, wrung them out and spread +them out to dry. By the time they were ready to wear, they themselves +were rested, and putting the clothing on again, they set out through the +forest, heading in a direction that would take them to about the same +point they were aiming for before they ran into the Indians.</p> + +<p>Till evening they tramped along, and they were beginning to think they +would have to sleep out in the woods, when they caught sight of a light +ahead of them. The next moment they emerged into open country, and made +their way toward the light.</p> + +<p>Presently they came to what looked like a fort, as seen in the +starlight, and they made out that there was a high stockade-wall around +the building.</p> + +<p>“Well, I’m glad we’ve found some place to stay for the night, anyhow,” +suggested Tom.</p> + +<p>“Who comes there?” cried a voice, from above their heads.</p> + +<p>“Friends,” replied Dick. He did not know that the inmates of the fort +were friends, but he thought it likely they were patriots, and hoped +that such was the case.</p> + +<p>“How many are there of you?” was the next question.</p> + +<p>“Three.”</p> + +<p>“Who are you? You are not British, and of course not Indians?”</p> + +<p>“No, we are strangers, who were caught in the torrent from the +cloud-burst and have had a terrible time. Will you kindly let us in?”</p> + +<p>There was the sound of low conversation, and then the voice spoke up +again:</p> + +<p>“Yes, we’ll let you in.”</p> + +<p>Then a few moments later they heard the squeaking of the gate as it was +opened and they hastened around there and entered the stockade.</p> + +<p>The man that had admitted them, Mr. Holden, fastened the gate and then +said: “Come with me.”</p> + +<p>He led the way into the fort, where the youths found themselves the +center of interest. The men, women and children of the families of the +settlers looked at the youths wonderingly and inquiringly.</p> + +<p>“You are strangers, sure enough,” said Mr. Holden.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Dick. “Are you folks patriots?”</p> + +<p>Holden nodded. “We are,” he said.</p> + +<p>“Good. I’m glad of that. We are patriots also, and members of the army +of General Greene, who is about one hundred miles north of here.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, we are glad to hear that,” said Holden. “I wish that General Greene +would come down here and give the Indians a thrashing.”</p> + +<p>“That is what he is figuring on doing if there is need,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>“He sent us to do some scouting and reconnoitering,” put in Tom. “He had +heard that there were lots of Indians down here, and that they were +murdering patriots and burning their homes, and if we learned that this +was the case, he would come down here and put a stop to their work.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you can return to him and tell him that his presence in this part +of the country is sorely needed. The Indians are pillaging and burning +homes, and they have committed a number of murders. They attacked us, +here in Peaceful Valley, this afternoon, and drove us to the shelter of +this fort and then burned our houses.”</p> + +<p>“That was bad,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but they were overtaken by the flood, while they were sitting on +the ground, about halfway between here and the mouth of the gulch, and +three of them were struck by logs and knocked senseless, and were +drowned.”</p> + +<p>“That was good,” said Tom, his eyes shining.</p> + +<p>“We were in the flood, too, as we told you before you let us in,” said +Dick. “We were chased by Indians, and were trying to escape. We swung +down on the end of a tall tree, and dropped into the gulch, then +suddenly a torrent came rushing down upon us and bore us a considerable +distance before emptying into a river several miles from here. We swam +ashore, dried our clothes and then came here.”</p> + +<p>“You were fortunate, in that you were not hit by any of the logs,” said +Mr. Perkins.</p> + +<p>“Yes, so we were,” said Dick. “We grabbed hold of logs, and kept from +being swept underneath the water and drowned.”</p> + +<p>There was some further talk, and then the youths were given something to +eat, after which all settled down to take matters as easy as possible. +The settlers rather expected an attack, but were prepared to offer +battle, and did not doubt but what they could drive the redskins away, +unless they came in much stronger force than when they made the attack +in the afternoon.</p> + +<p>Dick asked the settlers many questions, and gained a good knowledge of +the situation in that part of the country. He learned that Ninety-Six +was garrisoned by about five hundred British and Tory soldiers, and that +they were inciting the Indians to attack the patriot settlers, and when +he had gathered all the information possible, Dick said that he would +take his leave about midnight and start northward to carry the report to +General Greene.</p> + +<p>“Hadn’t you better let me take the news to General Greene, Dick?” said +Ben. “You might be able to do good work here, scouting and spying on the +Indians, redcoats and Tories.”</p> + +<p>“No, I guess I will take the news to the general,” said Dick. “It is +going to be exceedingly dangerous getting back through the lines of the +Indians, and I have had more experience in woodcraft than you have, and +think I can slip through with greater ease and safety than you could.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll go, Dick,” said Tom. “I can slip through the Indians’ lines, all +right.”</p> + +<p>“No, you and Ben stay here,” said Dick. “I’ll take the news to General +Greene, and we’ll be back here pretty quick, with the army, and then the +redskins, redcoats and Tories will have to look out.”</p> + +<p>“Good!” said Mr. Holden. “The quicker the soldiers get here, the better +it will be for the patriots in this part of the country.”</p> + +<p>Shortly after midnight Dick said good-by to Tom, Ben and the settlers, +and passing out of the stockade he stole away in the darkness.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch04' class='break'>CHAPTER IV<br /><br />Dick and the Indians</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick Dare had not gone twenty yards before he became convinced that +there were Indians in the vicinity. At once he realized that he would +have to be very careful, or he would be unable to get through the lines +without being captured. He had been successful, always, in getting +through the lines of British sentinels, but these redskins were a +different proposition. They were perfectly at home in this region, and, +too, they were used to being about at night. They possessed the ability +to know what was going on around them, even in the darkness, they +seemingly having the catlike faculty of seeing in the dark.</p> + +<p>But the knowledge that he was going to have a hard time getting past the +Indians only made Dick the more determined to do so. He was eager to +prove that he was a good scout and spy, and if he could get through the +Indians’ lines without being discovered or captured, then he would have +done something to be proud of.</p> + +<p>So he settled down and began advancing very slowly and cautiously. He +would advance a few feet and then stop and lie flat on the ground, and +listen intently. Several times, while lying thus, silent and motionless, +he heard sounds in various directions that he knew were not made by wild +animals of the forest, but were made by Indians, without doubt.</p> + +<p>He heard the calls of night birds, which, so his keen and well trained +ear told him, were not made by birds, but were simply good imitations, +made by the redskins. Dick could imitate the majority of the birds of +the forest, in their calls to one another, himself, and so was able to +determine that these calls were not genuine.</p> + +<p>And this made him exercise the greatest possible care. He could tell, by +the various directions the sounds came from, that the fort was +surrounded, and he did not doubt but what an attack was contemplated. He +would have gone back into the fort and told them what he had learned, +had he deemed it necessary; but he knew that sentinels were posted, and +that the redskins could not spring a surprise on the settlers, so he +felt that it would do no good to take this trouble. It was more +important that he get through the lines and then hasten to reach General +Greene with the news that he was needed down in that part of the +country.</p> + +<p>Presently he discovered, by hearing a call close at hand, that at least +one Indian was almost in front of him. He paused and lay silent and +motionless for a few moments, and then he began moving around, in a +semi-circle.</p> + +<p>Cautiously he proceeded, and his every nerve was tense and ready for +instant action, in case his presence was discovered and he was attacked. +He had gone perhaps twenty yards, and was about opposite the point where +he had heard the sound that indicated the presence of the Indian, when +he heard a slight rustling, as of a body moving toward him, through the +grass. He listened, and became convinced that an Indian was approaching +him, and he guessed that the redskin had heard him.</p> + +<p>Dick lay still, his mind working swiftly. What should he do? Should he +wait and engage the redskin in a combat, or should he leap up and take +refuge in flight?</p> + +<p>It was a difficult question to answer, and as he was turning the matter +over in his mind, he heard the rustling coming closer and closer. He +must act quickly, or the Indian would be upon him.</p> + +<p>He suddenly decided that the best thing for him to do was to take refuge +in flight. True, he realized he might run right into the arms of the +Indians, but on the other hand, if he remained where he was, and was +attacked by the redskin, the sound of the combat would bring a score of +Indians to the spot quickly, and he would be captured.</p> + +<p>Having made up his mind, Dick acted. Leaping to his feet, he dashed away +at the top of his speed, and instantly he heard the sound of pursuit and +knew that the Indian he had heard slipping up on him had given chase.</p> + +<p>On the youth ran, and suddenly a peculiar, quavering cry went up from +his pursuer’s lips. It was evidently a signal telling his brother braves +that a man from the fort was among them, and for them to try to capture +him. Realizing this, Dick was on the alert, and expected every moment to +feel himself seized by the hands of the redskins.</p> + +<p>He had reached the heavy woods, however, before he became aware of the +near presence of any redskins, and then he thought he heard several +right in front of him.</p> + +<p>Whirling, he ran toward the left, at the top of his speed, and then +began such a game of hide and seek as Dick had never engaged in before. +His quick ears would tell him when there were Indians in front of him, +and he would turn in some other direction, with the result that in going +a distance of two or three hundred yards, he must have gone at least a +mile.</p> + +<p>Two or three times he had felt hands clutching him, but he had managed +to tear himself loose, and finally he was enabled to continue his flight +straight ahead, not hearing any sounds to indicate the presence of +redskins in front of him.</p> + +<p>Behind him he heard the sounds of pattering feet, however, and the +guttural exclamations of the redskins, and knew he was being pursued. He +felt that now that he had succeeded in getting through their lines +without being captured he could escape, however, and did not feel very +much alarmed.</p> + +<div class='c000'> +<a href='images/illus-039f.jpg'><img src='images/illus-039.jpg' alt='' class='c007' /></a> +<p class='c008'>“So ye think ye’re safe, do ye, hey?”</p> +</div> + +<p>Dick was an exceedingly swift runner, and it was to this that he owed +his success, so far, and to this fact he finally owed his good fortune +in getting away from his pursuers, for he gradually drew away from the +Indians, and when they had followed him a mile or so, they gave up the +pursuit and turned back. Doubtless they decided that it was of more +importance to be ready to attack the fort when the time came than to +keep on in pursuit of a fugitive that could run like the one they had +been after.</p> + +<p>And when he was certain that the redskins had ceased pursuing him, Dick +slackened his speed to a walk, went onward at a moderate pace, and +presently paused and stood listening intently.</p> + +<p>He did not hear a sound in the direction from which he had come, and he +drew a breath of relief, and murmured aloud: “They have given up the +chase and gone back. That is good. Now I am safe, and will take it a +little easier.”</p> + +<p>“So ye think ye’re safe, do ye, hey?” exclaimed a voice almost in Dick’s +ear, and then he felt a pair of exceedingly strong arms encircle his +body, pinioning his arms to his side. He struggled fiercely, but could +not break the hold of the person who had seized him.</p> + +<p>“Oh, thar ain’t no use tryin’ to git loose,” chuckled a gruff voice. +“I’ve got ye, an’ ye kain’t git erway.”</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch05' class='break'>CHAPTER V<br /><br />Gabe Gurley</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>About two hours after Dick Dare left the fort, the Indians made the +attack. They tried to take the settlers by surprise, by slipping up to +the fort, but were discovered and fired upon, and then they uttered wild +yells and made a desperate attack.</p> + +<p>The settlers made a strong and determined defense, firing as fast as +they could reload their rifles, and the calls of the redskins were +varied by yells and shrieks of pain, proving that some of the bullets +found lodgment in the bodies of the redskins.</p> + +<p>Then, suddenly a cry went up from the settlers, for they saw that the +stockade-wall was on fire. The Indians had not been able to break the +wall down, or to scale it, so they had set fire to it.</p> + +<p>There was a well inside the enclosure, however, and the settlers began +carrying water and pouring it down on the fire, from the platform on the +inside of the fence, and two or three of the settlers were wounded by +arrows while engaged in this work, but they finally succeeded in putting +the fire out.</p> + +<p>The Indians, disappointed, repeated their war-whoops and yells +betokening anger. Then they withdrew, having given up the attack, at +least for the present. But that they had given up the matter permanently +was not likely.</p> + +<p>The settlers were glad of the cessation of hostilities, however, and it +afforded them an opportunity for reloading their rifles, and, for needed +rest, a watch was set so as to be ready for another attack, if it was +made.</p> + +<p>Morning came at last, however, without a renewal of the onslaught, and +the settlers took a look around. They saw that the fort was surrounded +by at least a hundred redskins, and they realized that the Indians +intended to stay till they captured the fort.</p> + +<p>“They will put in the day planning, and to-night they’ll attack us +again,” said Mr. Holden, after looking at the Indians a while.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that’ll be their game,” said Mr. Perkins.</p> + +<p>“But they can’t capture the fort, can they?” asked Tom Dare, who was +standing on the platform, beside the two men, taking a look at the +Indians.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think they could capture the fort,” said Perkins, “but likely +they’ll lay siege to it and try to make us surrender, arter our grub +gives out.”</p> + +<p>“But you have enough to last quite a while, haven’t you?”</p> + +<p>“Two or three days, I guess.”</p> + +<p>“Well, Dick will be back with General Greene and his army in four or +five days, I think.”</p> + +<p>“Maybe we can hold out till then,” said Mr. Perkins.</p> + +<p>“I think we can,” said Holden.</p> + +<p>“We can fight them off, I feel certain,” said another of the settlers. +“So all we will have to do will be to go easy on the rations till +General Greene gets here.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, that is what we’ll do,” said Perkins.</p> + +<p>Tom and Ben were greatly interested. This was the first time they had +ever had anything to do with fighting Indians, and they were glad that +they had come down into this region of the Cherokees, for there was a +peculiar glamour to this kind of warfare that did not attach to fighting +against the redcoats.</p> + +<p>“Dick will miss most of the fighting by going on the trip,” said Tom.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but there will be plenty of Indian fighting after he gets back,” +said Ben.</p> + +<p>“Yes, likely. And it will be a great relief to the people of this part +of the country when the patriot soldiers get down here and get after the +redskins.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, so it will.”</p> + +<p>About the middle of the afternoon there was seen to be considerable stir +among the Indians to the northward, near the edge of the forest, and Mr. +Holden, who, with Perkins and two or three others of the settlers, and +Tom and Ben, were standing on the platform, watching, said:</p> + +<p>“Look. There’s that renegade-Tory, Gabe Gurley.”</p> + +<p>Sure enough, a white man was seen standing among the redskins, and it +could be seen that he was an exceedingly large man, a giant in size, in +fact. He was talking to the Indians, and gesticulating, and they were +listening with evident interest.</p> + +<p>“What a big fellow he is!” exclaimed Tom.</p> + +<p>“And a big scoundrel,” said Perkins.</p> + +<p>“Yes, he’s worse’n the redskins,” said another of the settlers.</p> + +<p>“I don’t like to see him there among the redskins,” said Mr. Holden, a +sober look on his face. “He may put them up to some scheme to enable +them to capture the fort before General Greene and his army can get +here.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll have to be on our guard, sure enough,” said Perkins.</p> + +<p>“I hope Dick didn’t meet him,” exclaimed Tom,</p> + +<p>“It isn’t likely that he did,” said Ben.</p> + +<p>Presently the renegade, Gabe Gurley, ceased talking to the Indians and +came striding toward the fort, holding up his hand, with the palm toward +the settlers.</p> + +<p>“He wants to talk to us,” said Perkins.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Holden. “I s’pose we might as well hear what he has to say.”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>Gurley advanced till within about fifty feet of the stockade-wall, and +then stopped. “How are ye, Holden? How are ye, Perkins?” he called out.</p> + +<p>“What do you want, Gabe Gurley?” asked Holden, rather gruffly.</p> + +<p>“I’ve come to ask ye to surrender,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“Then you are wasting your time, Gurley.”</p> + +<p>“Ye mean thet ye won’t surrender?”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>“Ye’d better. We can stay here till yer grub gives out, an’ then ye’ll +have to surrender, an’ ye might as well do et now.”</p> + +<p>“We have provisions to last us till--”</p> + +<p>Holden hesitated, but Gurley finished: “Till Gin’ral Greene an’ his army +gits here, ye was goin’ to say, hey?” with a grin. “Well, they won’t git +here as soon as ye think, I can tell ye that.”</p> + +<p>“Why won’t they?” asked Holden.</p> + +<p>“Because I captured ther young feller what ye sent frum here last night, +to bring Greene, an’ I’ve got ’im a pris’ner, an’ so he won’t carry the +news, as ye expected, an’ Greene an’ his army won’t be here--not for a +good while, anyhow.”</p> + +<p>An exclamation escaped the lips of Tom Dare. “You big ruffian!” he +cried. “You say you captured my brother?”</p> + +<p>The giant looked at Tom and grinned. “I don’ know whether I captured +your brother or not, but I do know that I captured a young feller what +was on his way to bring Gin’ral Greene here.”</p> + +<p>“That was my brother,” cried Tom, angrily. “Where is he, now?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, he’s where I can put my han’s on ’im whenever I want to,” was the +reply.</p> + +<p>Tom jerked a pistol out of his belt and leveled it, and would have fired +at the ruffian, had not Mr. Perkins caught him by the arm. “Don’ shoot, +my boy,” he said. “Gurley’s a villain, and needs shootin’, but he’s +there under a truce, and we must not shoot him.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, all right,” said Tom. “That’s so. I won’t shoot him now, but he +made me forget myself when he said he had my brother a prisoner.”</p> + +<p>“An’ that’s another reason for not shooting him, Tom. If you only +wounded him, he’d most likely take revenge on your brother.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so. I never thought of that. But I’ll get even with him for +capturing Dick.”</p> + +<p>Gurley had watched this little episode with a slight show of alarm, at +first, but when he saw that the youth was not going to fire, he grinned, +and said: “Lucky ye didn’t shoot, youngster.” Then to Holden he went on: +“What about it? Are ye goin’ to surrender?”</p> + +<p>“No,” was the decided reply.</p> + +<p>“Ye’ll have to sooner or later, ye know.”</p> + +<p>“No, you won’t,” said Tom, in a low, eager voice. “I’ll go out and away +to-night, and will try to find and rescue Dick. But if I can’t find him, +I’ll go and bring General Greene and his army.”</p> + +<p>Holden nodded to Tom, and then replied to Gurley: “We will not +surrender, so you might as well go back to your friends, the redskins, +and tell them so.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, all right,” growled Gurley. “But, ye’ll be sorry ye didn’t +surrender, Holden.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think so.”</p> + +<p>With an angry exclamation, the renegade turned and strode back and +rejoined the Indians, to whom he talked energetically, gesticulating +vigorously the while.</p> + +<p>Then the Indians shook their bows and tomahawks at the settlers and gave +vent to a series of wild, thrilling war-whoops.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch06' class='break'>CHAPTER VI<br /><br />In the Cabin</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick Dare was unable to break the hold of the man who had seized him. He +struggled fiercely, but as the man was a giant in size, and very strong, +he was thrown upon the ground and was utterly helpless. The man held the +youth without seemingly having to exert himself very greatly.</p> + +<p>“Who are you?” pantingly asked Dick. “And why have you seized me?”</p> + +<p>“My name is Gabe Gurley,” was the reply. “I’m a loyalist, an’ as I know +ye have been runnin’ frum ther Injuns, what are helpin’ the British, ye +must be a rebel, an’ so I’ve grabbed ye, an’ll hold ye till I fin’ out +about ye.”</p> + +<p>“You had better let me go,” said Dick sternly. “You have no right to +hold me.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, I’m goin’ to hold ye ennyhow. I’ll jest bind yer arms, an’ then +ye’ll come with me to my cabin.”</p> + +<p>The fellow then bound Dick’s wrists together, with a piece of rope that +he produced from a pocket, after which he allowed him to rise, then he +took hold of his arm and conducted him through the woods a distance of +nearly a mile, when they reached a rude cabin that stood in the depths +of a thick growth of bushes and timber.</p> + +<p>The fellow lighted a candle, and then Dick saw that his captor was a +ruffian in appearance, a huge giant of a fellow, who looked capable of +murder, if he took a notion.</p> + +<p>“He’s a regular desperado,” thought Dick.</p> + +<p>The ruffian turned and surveyed his prisoner. “Humph,” he grunted +presently. “Ye’re a youngster. Who are ye, ennyhow?”</p> + +<p>Dick decided that it would be best to give a fictitious name, so he said +that his name was Dick Fenton, and that he lived about one hundred miles +to the northward and was on his way to visit relatives who lived about +fifty or seventy-five miles farther south.</p> + +<p>“You have made a mistake in making a prisoner of me,” he said. “I was +running from the Indians, awhile before you stopped me, true, but +anybody would run from a gang of Indians on the warpath.”</p> + +<p>“Yas, thet’s so,” was the reply. “But I guess I’ll hold ye a while, +ennyhow, till I fin’ out whether ye are tellin’ the truth or not.”</p> + +<p>“How long will that be?” asked Dick, with a sinking of the heart, for he +did not like the idea of being delayed from reaching General Greene with +the news that the patriot settlers were needing his help.</p> + +<p>“I don’ know. Ye’ll stay here till I tell ye ye may go, ennyhow, so ye +might as well make up your mind to thet.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see any sense in such a proceeding on your part,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>“Uv course ye don’,” with a grin. “I wouldn’t expect ye to. But I do, +and here ye stay. In the mornin’ I’ll take a stroll an’ see if I can +find out anythin’ about ye, an’ then we’ll see about lettin’ ye go.”</p> + +<p>He put a bar across the door, and then, pointing to a bunk in one corner +of the room said: “You can sleep there. I’ll lay on a blanket on the +floor.”</p> + +<p>Dick knew it would do no good to argue with the ruffian, so he got into +the bunk, and lay down, after which Gurley blew out the light and lay +down on a blanket, and was soon snoring.</p> + +<p>Dick did not get to sleep. In fact, he began trying to get his hands +free, for he was eager to make his escape and go on his way to carry the +news to General Greene.</p> + +<p>Gurley had tied his wrists so securely he could not get them free, +however, and finally the youth gave up the attempt, and eventually +slept.</p> + +<p>Next morning Gurley cooked some corn cakes and potatoes for breakfast, +and after he had eaten, he untied Dick’s wrists and gave him some of the +food. Then he bound the youth’s wrists again, but not so tightly as +before, for the reason that Dick held his wrists in such a manner that +he could move them into a different position and the rope would be +loosened somewhat.</p> + +<p>An hour or so later Gurley said he was going away, and did not know how +long he would be gone. “As I can’t fasten the door,” he went on, “I will +tie yer feet, an’ then ye won’t be able to git away while I’m gone.”</p> + +<p>He got another piece of rope and bound Dick’s ankles, and then took his +departure.</p> + +<p>As soon as he was sure that Gurley was gone, Dick began working at the +rope binding his wrists. If he could get his wrists free, the rope about +his ankles could be quickly loosened.</p> + +<p>He worked hard at the rope binding his wrists, but was unable to make +much headway. The knots were tight, and the rope would not stretch. He +kept at it, however, and was pulling and tugging at a great rate, when +there was a thump against the door, and it flew open and into the room +came a huge timber wolf.</p> + +<p>At sight of the animal, Dick’s heart sank, and a feeling akin to fear +took hold upon him. It was not pleasant to be lying there, bound hand +and foot, and a huge, hungry wolf sniffing about within a few feet of +him.</p> + +<p>Dick guessed that the wolf had been attracted by the smell of the food +Gurley had cooked for breakfast, and that the animal was hungry was +evident by the way it nosed around for edibles, and snapped up several +small scraps of food that had fallen on the floor.</p> + +<p>Then, presently the wolf approached the bunk, in which Dick was lying, +and sniffed at him. Dick lay absolutely still, till he felt the animal’s +nose against his leg, and then, fearing he might be bitten, he gave his +leg a jerk, and yelled at the wolf: “Get out of here! Go away!”</p> + +<p>The wolf was startled into a snarl of surprise and fright, and leaped +backward to the middle of the floor, where it stood, glaring at Dick, +its eyes looking vicious indeed, its bared teeth showing.</p> + +<p>Again Dick yelled at the animal, and moved his legs in a threatening +manner, and the wolf shrank back somewhat, but after a few moments no +harm coming to him it began moving slowly forward, growling and showing +its teeth.</p> + +<p>Dick realized that he was in great danger, for the wolf was a big +fellow, indeed, and would have given the youth a good fight, even had +his hands and feet been free. As it was, with both hands and feet tied, +Dick felt that the chances were that he would be chewed up.</p> + +<p>Closer and closer came the wolf, and although Dick kept yelling at him, +and moving his legs as threateningly as possible, the animal would not +retreat. Closer and closer he came, until his nose was within six inches +of the youth’s body; then, as he seemed on the point of springing upon +him, Dick pushed out his arms suddenly, in an effort to frighten the +wolf away. Instead, however, the wolf made a quick snap, and seized the +rope in its teeth. In some manner the teeth became fastened in the rope, +and as the animal leaped backward, in alarm, Dick was pulled off the +bunk, and came to the floor with a thump.</p> + +<p>This frightened the animal still more, and he went clawing backward +across the room, trying to get his teeth loose, and presently his teeth, +being sharp, cut through the rope, weakening it so that Dick was able to +snap the remaining strands, and his arms were free.</p> + +<p>The wolf, however, angered, again sprang at Dick, and the youth, being +unable to get out of the way owing to his feet being tied, seized a +stool that was at hand and struck at the wolf, causing the animal to +struggle back, with a snarl of rage.</p> + +<p>Then ensued a battle such as is seldom seen--a youth with his ankles +bound, fighting against a hungry wolf, his only weapon being a clumsy +stool.</p> + +<p>Snarling, snapping, springing at the youth, the now infuriated animal +kept at work, and Dick rolled over and over, now and then striking at +the wolf with the stool, hitting it too occasionally, but this seemingly +only serving to make the animal the more fierce and angry.</p> + +<p>It was indeed a fierce battle, and there was no telling how it would +end, for the gaunt, hungry wolf was a very dangerous antagonist. But +Dick fought on with desperate energy.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch07' class='break'>CHAPTER VII<br /><br />Tom Tries Woodcraft</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The settlers in the fort watched the actions of the Indians and the +renegade with some anxiety. They realized that unless General Greene and +his army came to their assistance, they would sooner or later either be +captured, or else would have to surrender, owing to running out of +provisions.</p> + +<p>And, if Gurley told the truth, Dick Dare had been captured and would not +be able to carry the news to General Greene.</p> + +<p>They discussed the situation, and Tom Dare reiterated his statement that +as soon as it was dark he would leave the fort, attempt to slip through +the lines of the Indians and go in search of Dick. Failing of finding +his brother, after a reasonable length of time given to searching, he +would then go on to the encampment of the patriot army and tell General +Greene of the predicament of the patriot settlers, and get him to come +to their relief.</p> + +<p>“Very well,” said Mr. Holden. “We shall be glad to have you do as you +suggest, my boy. But, it will be a difficult and dangerous matter +getting past those redskins. They have the fort surrounded, and will be +on the alert to prevent anyone getting away from here.”</p> + +<p>“I think I can succeed, sir,” said Tom, confidently.</p> + +<p>“I hope so, I am sure. In the meantime I will tell you as nearly as I +can where you will find Gurley’s hut, for there probably is where your +brother is held prisoner.”</p> + +<p>The rest of the afternoon passed quietly, the Indians making no move to +attack, but there could be little doubt but what they would make their +plans to execute some maneuver during the night.</p> + +<p>Soon after dark, Tom got ready to start on his dangerous undertaking. +Ben asked to be permitted to accompany him, but Tom said no, that he +could do better by himself.</p> + +<p>“I think I can get through the lines of the redskins, Ben,” he said. +“Don’t worry about me.”</p> + +<p>“All right. But you must be careful, Tom.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll be careful. Good-by.”</p> + +<p>“Good-by,” said Ben, as they shook hands, “and good luck.”</p> + +<p>Tom said good-by to the others, and then slipped out through the gate, +and stole softly away through the darkness.</p> + +<p>“Now, I will have to exercise care,” said Tom to himself. “It is not +going to be very easy to get through the lines of the Indians, for they +are better woodsmen than the redcoats.”</p> + +<p>He moved slowly and cautiously, till he was nearly to the edge of the +forest, and then he dropped onto his hands and knees and crawled +forward, slowly, pausing every few moments to listen.</p> + +<p>Finally he reached the margin of the woods without having heard any +sound of the redskins. Here he paused for a few minutes, leaning against +a tree, and listening intently for some sound from the Indians.</p> + +<p>He knew there must certainly be some of the redskins near at hand, and +so when he started onward again, he went slowly and exercised great +caution. He knew that the least sound would be heard, and he was careful +not to make any noise.</p> + +<p>On he went, moving as silently as a shadow, and without hearing any +sound to indicate the presence of the Indians. It was indeed trying to +his nerves, but Tom was a brave youth, and did not falter.</p> + +<p>How long it took Tom to make his way through the lines of the Indians he +did not know, but it seemed to him that several hours had passed by the +time he was at a point beyond the encircling line of redskins. Had he +not moved exceedingly slow, however, he would surely have been +discovered, and likely would have been captured.</p> + +<p>Rising to his feet, he moved onward, still slowly and cautiously, but he +did not hear any sounds to indicate the presence of Indians, and kept +steadily onward.</p> + +<p>When he had gone about half a mile, he paused and uttered a peculiar, +quavering whistle, low but penetrating in the stillness of the night. It +was a signal that he and Dick and Ben often used, when separated at +night. If Dick were within a radius of two hundred yards, he would hear +the whistle, and of course would answer it, unless gagged.</p> + +<p>Tom sounded the whistle three or four times, without receiving any +response, and then moved onward perhaps a quarter of a mile. Pausing +again, he sounded the signal as before. And as before, there was no +reply. He was not able to locate, in the dark, the cabin Gurley +occupied.</p> + +<p>So Tom moved onward, with occasional trips first to one side and then +the other, repeating the signal whistle, but he did not receive any +response, and finally decided that it would be useless to continue the +attempt to find Dick.</p> + +<p>“I would like to find him,” murmured Tom, “but it is like looking for a +needle in a haystack, and so I guess I will head for the patriot +encampment, and carry the news regarding the danger of the settlers in +the fort, to General Greene. Then, if Dick isn’t there, I will hasten +back and continue the search for him.”</p> + +<p>Having so determined, Tom set out in as direct a course as he could +follow, and walked swiftly. On he went, keeping it up till morning, when +he came to a cabin in the woods, and stopped and asked the man, who +looked to be a hunter, if he could get breakfast there.</p> + +<p>“I reckon so,” was the reply. And then the hunter asked, curiously: +“Whar ye goin’, young feller?”</p> + +<p>“To see some friends about seventy-five miles north of here,” was the +reply.</p> + +<p>“What’s yer name?” the fellow asked.</p> + +<p>“Tom Dare,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“My name is Jeff Harkins. Come in an’ set down. I’ll hev the grub ready +purty soon.”</p> + +<p>Tom entered and took a seat, and when the food had been cooked and was +on the table, they sat up to the rude board and ate heartily.</p> + +<p>Just as they had finished, into the cabin walked six British soldiers, +and they leveled pistols at the heads of the two, and their leader, a +lieutenant, cried sternly:</p> + +<p>“Surrender, in the name of the king!”</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch08' class='break'>CHAPTER VIII<br /><br />A Battle with a Wolf</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The battle between Dick Dare and the wolf went on fiercely, in the old +cabin in the forest. The wolf was lithe and nimble, and evaded the +majority of the blows aimed at it by the youth, but at the same time it +dared not get close enough to bite, for fear of getting hit.</p> + +<p>Had Dick’s ankles been free, he would have been able to defend himself +much easier, and could soon have landed some telling blows, but his +ankles were tied, and he could not get around very well, having to stay +in one position, and merely keep turning his face toward the animal as +it made its rushes toward him.</p> + +<p>Finally, however, the youth managed to land a hard blow on the head of +the wolf, with the heavy stool, which knocked the animal off its feet. +Seeing his advantage, Dick threw himself forward, and struck the wolf +several blows, till finally the animal stretched out, apparently +lifeless.</p> + +<p>“Thank goodness!” murmured Dick, dropping to a sitting posture, and +panting at a great rate. “That was about the fiercest battle I ever had. +Now, to get my ankles free.”</p> + +<p>He drew a clasp-knife from his pocket and cut the rope binding his legs. +Then he sat down and chafed his ankles, till he got the blood to +circulating again. This done, he went to the door and looking out, saw +that the coast seemed to be clear.</p> + +<p>“I guess Gurley won’t be back for quite a while,” thought Dick. “I will +set out at once and make my way to the patriot encampment.”</p> + +<p>Dick left the cabin and made his way through the forest, heading +northward, and hastened onward as rapidly as he could. He had already +lost considerable time, and he was eager to reach the patriot encampment +as quickly as possible, and get General Greene and his army started to +the rescue of the settlers in the fort in Peaceful Valley.</p> + +<p>At noon Dick stopped at the house of a settler, and ate dinner there. He +learned that the settler was a patriot, and told him where he was going, +and why, and the settler told him he could have one of his horses to +ride.</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir,” said Dick. “That is kind of you. I’ll leave the horse +here as we come back.”</p> + +<p>“That’s all right, Dick Dare. I am a patriot an’ want to do all I can to +help get help to the patriot settlers in Peaceful Valley.”</p> + +<p>Dick thanked him again, and a few minutes later was mounted on a horse +and riding northward proceeding now at a rapid pace. He believed that he +would be able to reach the patriot encampment by noon of the next day, +and by pushing onward nearly through the night, he was enabled to do so.</p> + +<p>As soon as he reached the encampment, he went to the headquarters tent, +and found General Greene and some of the other officers there, among +them Captain Morgan, of Dick’s own company.</p> + +<p>“Ah, Dick, how are you?” greeted the general, shaking the youth’s hand.</p> + +<p>“I am feeling well, sir,” was the reply. And then Dick, after shaking +hands with the other officers, said: “I have important news for you, +sir.”</p> + +<p>“Let’s hear the news, Dick?” eagerly.</p> + +<p>“Very well, sir.” And then Dick told about the desperate needs of the +settlers of Peaceful Valley, whose homes had been burned by the Indians, +and who were now in the little fort, surrounded by the Indians, who +would undoubtedly capture the patriots soon if help was not vouchsafed.</p> + +<p>“How far is the fort from here?” asked General Greene.</p> + +<p>“Nearly a hundred miles, I should judge.”</p> + +<p>“A good three days’ march from here,” said the general. “I think we had +better break camp and start with the entire force. Give the orders to +your respective companies, officers. We will move at once.”</p> + +<p>The officers saluted and hastened out, and Dick remained to answer the +questions that General Greene wished to ask about the location of the +fort, the number of the settlers, and particulars concerning the +Indians, etc.</p> + +<p>Within an hour after dinner, the little army was ready to start, and at +the word from General Greene, it set out on the march.</p> + +<p>In the lead rode General Greene and some of the officers, and Dick, +while behind came the soldiers, marching steadily, and with a grim, +determined look on their faces. They knew that they were going to the +rescue of a party of settlers surrounded by redskins, and were eager to +reach their destination and get a chance at the Indians.</p> + +<p>When evening came, they stopped for a brief interval on the bank of a +little stream. Here they built campfires, cooked and ate supper, and +after resting an hour, set out again, it being moonlight till after +midnight.</p> + +<p>They marched till the moon went down and it grew so dark they could not +see to make their way onward. Then they stopped and went into camp for +the rest of the night.</p> + +<p>They were up early next morning, however, these hardy patriots and after +having eaten breakfast, again set out, marching steadily onward till +noon, stopping then less than an hour, to eat a cold bite for dinner.</p> + +<p>They kept up the march till near midnight, again, with stops for supper, +and to rest a few minutes at a time. Then slept four or five hours, and +were up and away again.</p> + +<p>They arrived in the vicinity of Peaceful Valley about the middle of the +following afternoon, and stopped about a mile away, while Dick went +forward to reconnoiter and see what the Indians were doing, to ascertain +if they were still there and the fort had not been captured.</p> + +<p>Dick advanced at a moderate pace, keeping a sharp lookout around him, +till within about a third of a mile of the edge of the valley, and then +he made his way forward at a slower pace, pausing frequently, to look +about him, to see if there were any signs of redskins in the vicinity.</p> + +<p>Presently he paused and took a position behind a tree, gazing steadily +ahead. He had caught sight of the Indians. He got down on his hands and +knees and crawled forward, till he reached a point from which he could +see the fort, and after a careful survey, he came to the conclusion that +the Indians had not succeeded as yet in making the settlers surrender.</p> + +<p>“Good,” thought Dick. “I’ll return and make my report to General +Greene.”</p> + +<p>As he started to turn, however, to make his way back to where he had +left the patriot soldiers, he heard a rustling sound, and the next +moment he was confronted by seven or eight Indian warriors, who had +appeared from behind trees.</p> + +<p>Dick was taken by surprise, but did not intend to permit the redskins to +capture him, if he could help it, and drawing his pistols, he fired two +shots quickly, dropping one Indian, dead, and wounding another. Then he +sprang forward, in an attempt to make his escape, but the redskins, +giving utterance to thrilling war-cries, leaped upon him and bore him +struggling to the ground.</p> + +<p>He fought fiercely, for he wanted to make his escape and get back with +the patriot soldiers and help make the attack on the savages, but the +redskins were too numerous and too strong. He presently, therefore, +found himself made a prisoner, his wrists being bound with a piece of +thong.</p> + +<p>Then he was dragged forward into the presence of the main party of the +tribe, who had appeared in all directions when they heard the shots and +yells, and were advancing toward the spot where the encounter had taken +place.</p> + +<p>Dick was a prisoner in the hands of the redskins, within a few hundred +yards of the settlers in the fort, and also within half a mile of the +patriot soldiers.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch09' class='break'>CHAPTER IX<br /><br />In Search of Tom</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick’s capture by the redskins resulted in making it possible for the +patriot soldiers to advance till close to the Indians without being +discovered, owing to the fact that the redskins were giving their +attention to their prisoner and were not keeping as sharp a lookout +around them as usual.</p> + +<p>When they did discover the soldiers, the latter were already within +range, and as the Indians started to flee, Dick, with rare presence of +mind, threw himself flat on the ground, at the same time yelling at the +top of his voice. “Fire, comrades! You won’t hit me.”</p> + +<p>The next moment a volley rang out, and ten or twelve of the Indians fell +dead or seriously wounded, while several of those who were able to run, +were wounded less severely.</p> + +<p>Then the soldiers came forward on the run, firing their pistols, and the +Indians fled at the top of their speed, their yells of fear, dismay and +anger commingled.</p> + +<p>They did not try to take their prisoner with them. Those unharmed were +glad to get away with their lives, and Dick’s comrades quickly freed his +arms, as he explained how he came to be in the hands of the redskins.</p> + +<p>“Your shots were the signal for us to advance,” said General Greene. “We +guessed that you had gotten into trouble, and so we hastened forward as +quickly as possible.”</p> + +<p>The settlers now came forth from the fort, and greeted General Greene, +his officers and the army warmly.</p> + +<p>“We were about out of provisions,” said Mr. Holden, “and could not have +held the redskins at bay much longer.”</p> + +<p>“Wasn’t there a white man among those Indians?” asked General Greene. “I +thought I saw one, a big fellow.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Holden, “that was Gabe Gurley, a renegade. He is helping the +redskins plunder the homes of the patriots in this part of the country.”</p> + +<p>“That’s the scoundrel that captured me,” put in Dick. “He left me a +prisoner in an old cabin, but I managed to escape.”</p> + +<p>“He said he captured a young fellow, who he guessed was on his way to +carry news to the patriot army,” said Holden.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Dick. And then he looked around, and not seeing Tom, asked +Ben where his brother was.</p> + +<p>“Tom left here the night after you did, Dick,” was the reply. “He said +he would try to find you and rescue you, but that if he failed in that, +he would go on and carry the news regarding the settlers’ danger to +General Greene. You didn’t see him then?”</p> + +<p>“No, I haven’t seen him since I left here.”</p> + +<p>A sober look settled on Dick’s face, and it was evident that he was +worried. Ben looked anxious, also.</p> + +<p>“Where can Tom be, Dick?” asked Ben, after a few moments.</p> + +<p>“I’m afraid he has fallen into the hands of the Indians, or of a gang of +Tories,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>Ben nodded. “I think likely you are right,” he agreed. “What are you +going to do?”</p> + +<p>“Hunt for him, Ben.”</p> + +<p>“When?”</p> + +<p>“I shall start at once.”</p> + +<p>“All right. I’ll go with you.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll explain matters to General Greene, and get permission to go in +search of him, Ben. I’ll be back in a few moments.”</p> + +<p>While Dick was talking to General Greene, Ben told the settlers about +Tom being missing, and that he and Dick were going in search of the +youth.</p> + +<p>The settlers, who had taken a great liking to the three patriot youths, +expressed sympathy, and several offered to accompany the two, but Dick, +when he joined them and they offered their services, said that he and +Ben would be able to find Tom, likely, without assistance, and then they +said good-by and set out, going toward the north.</p> + +<p>“I suppose we will return to Peaceful Valley, after we find Tom,” said +Ben.</p> + +<p>“Yes, Ben. General Greene said he would remain there a while, and make a +campaign against the Indians, so his army will be camped there for a +while.”</p> + +<p>“We may find Tom pretty quickly,” said Ben, hopefully.</p> + +<p>“I hope so,” said Dick. “But this is a big country, and if he has been +made a prisoner by Indians or Tories, we have no knowledge of the +direction the force might take.”</p> + +<p>“True,” said Ben. “Well, we’ll do our best to find and rescue him.”</p> + +<p>They proceeded northward, moving at a fair pace, and keeping a sharp +lookout all around them, for some signs of either redskins or Tories.</p> + +<p>They were sharp-eyed, and if there were any enemies, in view, they would +see them.</p> + +<p>When they had reached the cabin where Dick had been made a prisoner by +Gabe Gurley, they paused and rested a while, and Dick told Ben the story +of his fight with the wolf.</p> + +<p>They soon set out again, making an occasional inquiry and continued +onward till they had gone several miles farther toward the north. Then +they paused, held a council, and decided to turn to the left and go in +the direction of Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>“It is likely,” said Dick, “that if Tom was captured by Tories, he would +be taken to Ninety-Six, and so if we go in that direction, we may +succeed in learning something regarding his whereabouts. We’ll inquire +at all the settlers’ houses we come to.”</p> + +<p>“That will be the best plan,” agreed Ben.</p> + +<p>They headed westward, now, and walked at a moderate pace, keeping a +sharp lookout around them, for they realized that every step they took +in this direction led them deeper into the enemy’s country. The nearer +they approached Ninety-Six, the more likely they would be to encounter +parties of Indians, Tories or redcoats.</p> + +<p>An hour or so later they came to a cabin in the woods, and knocked on +the door. It was opened presently, by a woman of middle age, who looked +at the youths somewhat wonderingly, and said: “How d’ye do?”</p> + +<p>“Good afternoon, ma’am,” said Dick. “I wish to know if you have seen a +party of Indians or British soldiers around here, any time to-day?”</p> + +<p>“Ye’re rebels, hain’t ye?” the woman asked, a hard look coming over her +face.</p> + +<p>“No, we’re not rebels,” said Dick, guessing that the woman was a +loyalist. “Will you kindly answer my question?”</p> + +<p>“No, I won’t,” was the reply. “I’m sure ye’re rebels, an’ ye ain’t goin’ +to get any information out of me.” Then she shut the door in the faces +of the youths.</p> + +<p>Dick and Ben looked at each other in rather a disconcerted manner, and +then Dick said: “Oh, well, perhaps we may secure some information at the +next house we come to.”</p> + +<p>Then they set out, and the house was soon out of sight behind them.</p> + +<p>The youths kept onward till they came to another cabin, which stood in a +little clearing in the forest, and a woman opened the door when they +knocked, as at the other cabin. But this woman answered Dick’s questions +without hesitation, stating that she had not seen any parties of Indians +or British soldiers.</p> + +<p>The youths then bought some provisions, and thanking the woman, went on +their way. They did not find another cabin before nightfall, however, +and went into camp soon after dark, on the bank of a little stream.</p> + +<p>They built a small campfire, cooked their supper, ate heartily, and +then, after sitting there, talking a while, Ben lay down and went to +sleep, while Dick sat up, it being their intention to take turns at +standing guard throughout the night. They were in a hostile country, and +might be approached and captured by redskins, Tories or redcoats while +they slept.</p> + +<p>Dick stayed awake till midnight, and then woke Ben and lay down in his +turn to get some sleep.</p> + +<p>Ben, although he had slept several hours, was still drowsy, and +presently he dropped off to sleep again--only to be awakened later on by +voices, and he looked up with a start, Dick awakening and rising to a +sitting posture at the same tune, and they gazed with consternation on a +party of redskins, fifteen or twenty in number, who had come upon them +unawares, and surrounded them while they slept. Their ugly, painted +faces looked fierce and threatening in the faint light from the moon, +which shone down upon the scene, through an opening in the trees.</p> + +<p>“Ugh,” grunted one of the Indians, grinning fiendishly, and brandishing +a tomahawk threateningly, “we got young white man heap plenty. No try +fight, or we kill, ugh.”</p> + +<p>The youths gazed at the redskins in silent dismay.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch10' class='break'>CHAPTER X<br /><br />At Fort Ninety-Six</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The British soldiers had quickly tied the hands of Tom and Harkins, and +then set out through the forest with the two prisoners in their midst.</p> + +<p>“Where are you taking us?” asked Tom.</p> + +<p>“To Ninety-Six,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“How far is that from here?”</p> + +<p>“About fifty miles.”</p> + +<p>“Why have you made us prisoners?”</p> + +<p>“Because you are rebels.”</p> + +<p>“Why do you think I am a rebel?”</p> + +<p>“We have known that Harkins is a rebel for quite a while, and the fact +that you were in his company proves that you are one also.”</p> + +<p>“That is poor reasoning,” said Tom. “I was on my way up north to see +some of my folks, and stopped at Mr. Harkins’ cabin for breakfast. He’ll +tell you that I am speaking the truth.”</p> + +<p>“Where do your folks live, that you were going to see?”</p> + +<p>“About a hundred miles from here.”</p> + +<p>The redcoat laughed derisively. “I think it more than likely that you +are a rebel spy,” he said. “We will take you to Ninety-Six in company +with Harkins, anyhow.”</p> + +<p>Tom realized that it would do no good to talk to the redcoat, so he +ceased, and walked onward in silence.</p> + +<p>All that day they continued a steady tramp, and camped that evening +beside a stream, remaining there till morning. Then they resumed the +journey, and reached the fort at Ninety-Six about the middle of the +afternoon.</p> + +<p>Tom, knowing that it was General Greene’s intention to attempt to +capture Ninety-Six, later on, took note of the surroundings with a keen +and critical eye, and he decided that it would be a difficult matter to +capture the fort, as it was strongly situated.</p> + +<p>“If they have a strong force in the fort, it will be a big job to get +the better of them,” he thought. “Well, I will try to learn all I can +while I am here, and then if I succeed in making my escape, I will have +some information to carry to General Greene.”</p> + +<p>Harking had not had much, to say during the trip to Ninety-Six, but it +was evident that he was not very well pleased at having been made a +prisoner.</p> + +<p>As soon as they were within the fort, the redcoats took Tom and Harkins +before the commander, Colonel Cruger, who eyed them sternly for a few +moments, and then said:</p> + +<p>“Who are these men, lieutenant?”</p> + +<p>“This man is Harkins, the outlaw that has been trying to organize a +company of rebels,” was the reply. “And this young fellow says his name +is Tom Dare, and that he was on his way to see some of his folks up +north a hundred miles or so. He was at Harkins’ cabin when we got there, +and so we brought him along.”</p> + +<p>“H’m,” said the colonel. Then to Tom’s companion he said: “I suppose you +are sorry, now, Harkins, that you took the side of the rebels?”</p> + +<p>Harkins, who was a quiet, determined man, shook his head. “No, I’m not +sorry,” he said.</p> + +<p>“You will be sorry that you’re a rebel, before we get through with you,” +sternly.</p> + +<p>“I am not a rebel.”</p> + +<p>“What are you, then, if not a rebel?” was the query.</p> + +<p>“A patriot,” was the dignified reply.</p> + +<p>“Bah,” sneered the officer, “a distinction without a difference.”</p> + +<p>“It makes considerable difference to me,” said Harkins. “I do not +consider that the patriots are rebels. They are fighting for their +independence, which they are entitled to, which doesn’t make them +rebels.”</p> + +<p>“Well, they’ll never get their independence,” was the colonel’s reply. +“They will lose the fight, and will have to again take up their +allegiance to the king.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps, but I don’t believe it,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“If you will join a company of loyalists that I have formed, here, I +will overlook your past actions in trying to organize a company of +rebels,” said the colonel.</p> + +<p>Harkins shook his head. “I will never take up arms in the service of the +king,” he said.</p> + +<p>“Very well, then,” exclaimed the colonel, angrily. “Take him to the +guard-house.”</p> + +<p>A couple of soldiers conducted Harkins from the room, and then Cruger +looked sternly at Tom, and said:</p> + +<p>“You are a rebel, are you not?”</p> + +<p>Tom shook his head. “No,” he said.</p> + +<p>“You are loyal to the king?”</p> + +<p>“I haven’t given the matter much thought,” said the youth. “I suppose I +am what would be termed neutral.”</p> + +<p>“Then you would have no objections to joining the company that I spoke +of to Harkins?”</p> + +<p>Tom was silent a few moments. He was doing some swift thinking. He +quickly decided that he could learn more regarding the strength of the +fort, if he were to have the freedom that would come with being a member +of the company in question; and also he would have a better chance to +make his escape. So he said, quietly: “I will join the company, sir, +unless you will let me go on my way up north to see my folks.”</p> + +<p>The colonel shook his head. “I think I shall hold you prisoner, unless +you join the company,” he said, “so you had better join.”</p> + +<p>“Very well.”</p> + +<p>The colonel then ordered that Tom be conducted to the quarters occupied +by Captain Kane and his company of loyalists, and soon the youth stood +in the captain’s presence. When the soldier that had conducted Tom +thither explained to Captain Kane that Tom was to be a new recruit, the +captain said: “Very well; glad to have all the recruits I can get. What +is your name?”</p> + +<p>“Tom Dare.”</p> + +<p>The captain wrote this in a book. Then he asked: “Where do you live?”</p> + +<p>“About fifty miles south of here,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>The captain then asked a few more questions, and told Tom he was a +member of the company and to make himself at home and get acquainted +with his comrades.</p> + +<p>“Very well, and thank you,” said the youth.</p> + +<p>Then he began mingling with the other members of the company and +engaging them in conversation, and quickly got acquainted with quite a +number. He was a good-natured, jolly youth, and could make friends +easily, and he endeavored to make a good impression, now, for he wished +to learn all he could about the fort, and its strength, and also its +weaknesses, with a view to carrying the information to General Greene as +soon as he could make his escape.</p> + +<p>His only worry was, what had become of his brother Dick?</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch11' class='break'>CHAPTER XI<br /><br />At the Stake</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick and Ben were horrified, as well as amazed when they were confronted +by the encircling gang of Indians.</p> + +<p>That they could not escape was evident, for the redskins had them at +such a disadvantage it would be folly to try to do so. They would be +either cut down by tomahawks or pierced by arrows before they could draw +their pistols.</p> + +<p>The Indian who had spoken first now said something to his companion +braves in a guttural voice, and a couple advanced and bound the arms of +Dick and Ben together behind their backs.</p> + +<p>Then they were encompassed about by the redskins and conducted away +through the forest. They traveled westward for a period of two or three +hours, and then they reached the camp of the Indians.</p> + +<p>Dick and Tom were placed in a wigwam near the center of the village, and +guards were placed about the wigwam.</p> + +<p>“Well, this isn’t very pleasant, Dick,” said Ben, when they were alone.</p> + +<p>“No, it isn’t, Ben,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“I wonder what they’ll do with us?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. Hold us prisoners, I suppose.”</p> + +<p>“Do you think they are likely to burn us at the stake?” asked Ben, an +anxious note in his voice.</p> + +<p>“I hardly think so,” was the reply. “I haven’t heard that the Cherokee +Indians torture prisoners.”</p> + +<p>“Indians are not to be trusted,” said Ben.</p> + +<p>“Well, we’ll have to wait till morning and see what they intend doing,” +said Dick. Then presently he went on: “I wonder where Tom is?”</p> + +<p>“Possibly the Indians have got him a prisoner also, Dick.”</p> + +<p>“Possibly, but I hope not. We must try to find out.”</p> + +<p>They talked a while longer, and then lay down on the skins of wild +animals that constituted their beds, and presently went to sleep, and in +spite of their dangerous situation, they slept soundly till morning.</p> + +<p>Food was brought them, after a while, and a couple of braves stood guard +over them while they ate. Then their hands were bound again, and they +were left to themselves an hour or more.</p> + +<p>Then a couple of braves entered, and the two youths were conducted to a +point where a circle of Indians sat on the ground, while in the center +sat a big, ugly-looking Indian at least fifty years of age. This was the +chief, and the youths were taken in front of him.</p> + +<p>“Ugh,” he grunted. “Young white men cause a lot uv braves to die over in +Peaceful Valley. Young white men’s lives must pay for braves. You die +to-night, at the stake.”</p> + +<p>The youths glanced at each other, and then looked at the old chief +searchingly. They were trying to see whether he meant what he said, or +not. And from the grim look on his face, they guessed that he did mean +absolutely what he said. The part the youths had played in the affairs +at Peaceful Valley had angered the Indians, and they intended taking +revenge, now that they had the two captives helpless and in their power.</p> + +<p>“Take um away,” said the chief, with a wave of his hand, and Dick and +Ben were conducted back to the wigwam. As soon as they were alone, they +looked at each other for a few moments in silence, a look of dismay on +their faces.</p> + +<p>“The outlook is not very pleasing for us, Dick,” said Ben, presently.</p> + +<p>“You are right, Ben. I wonder if we could escape?”</p> + +<p>Ben shook his head. “Not much chance of that,” he said. “Our arms are +bound, and the wigwam is guarded. We couldn’t get away.”</p> + +<p>“I guess you are right. But I don’t relish being burned at the stake, +Ben.”</p> + +<p>“Neither do I.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps we can make a break and escape as we are being taken to the +place where they intend to conduct the ceremonies,” said Dick, +thoughtfully.</p> + +<p>“I am for making the attempt, Dick.”</p> + +<p>“Well, we will do our best.”</p> + +<p>The time passed slowly, that day, but also it passed faster than the two +youths liked, for every hour that rolled away brought them nearer to the +torture-stake.</p> + +<p>After supper, that evening, they sat and waited in almost complete +silence. They did not exchange many words, for they did not feel like +talking. They reiterated their determination to try to make their +escape, however, if any opportunity presented itself.</p> + +<p>Presently it grew dark, and the youths heard considerable stirring +about. They judged that the Indians were getting ready for the ceremony +of burning them at the stake.</p> + +<p>Slowly the time passed, and then presently into the wigwam came four +Indian braves. They seized hold of the arms of Dick and Ben, and hustled +them out of the wigwam, and conducted them toward a point just outside +the edge of the village, where a fire was burning. As they drew nearer, +the youths saw that several piles of wood had been gathered, and they +knew that this was to be piled about them, and set fire to. In spite of +the fact that they were brave youths, they shuddered.</p> + +<p>They were led to a couple of tall, slender trees, about a foot in +diameter, and their backs were placed against the trees. The moment had +come when if at all the youths must make an attempt to get away, and +suddenly they gave a strong wrench and attempted to jerk away from their +captors’ grasp and make their escape, but they were quickly seized by a +number of strong hands and held against the trees, while they were +securely bound there with thongs.</p> + +<p>Then the Indians began piling the wood around them, against their legs, +while all the members of the band gathered around, to watch the +proceedings.</p> + +<p>Then brands from the fire were brought and stuck in among the dry wood +that had been piled around them, and soon the wood was on fire and +burning at a brisk rate.</p> + +<p>Dick and Ben looked at each other, with despair in their eyes. They +could see no possible chance of escape.</p> + +<p>Louder crackled the burning wood, and as the flames neared the limbs of +the prisoners, the redskins began chanting a guttural song of triumph.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch12' class='break'>CHAPTER XII<br /><br />Fritz and the Indians</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>General Greene had a council with his officers, and with the settlers of +Peaceful Valley, and mapped out a plan of campaign against the Indians.</p> + +<p>He decided to send out three forces of one hundred each, and have them +go to the south, and west, and look for the bands of marauding redskins.</p> + +<p>“We must put a stop to such work as has been going on here,” he said. +“Here in Peaceful Valley all the homes of the settlers have been burned +to the ground, and the Indians will be doing the same at other points, +unless they are prevented, and the only way to prevent them is to give +them such a rough handling that they will be glad to retire to their +villages and be peaceful and quiet.”</p> + +<p>The other officers and the settlers agreed with him, and General Greene +named three officers to take charge of the three parties of soldiers, +Captain Morgan being one of the officers named, and he would, of course, +take his company.</p> + +<p>“I wish that I had the Dare Boys here, to go with me,” he said. “I +always feel that I can get good reconnoitering work done if Dick Dare is +with me. But, it is not likely that he will be back in time to go with +my company.”</p> + +<p>“Likely not,” said General Greene, “but if he should come soon after you +leave, I will send him after you, if you wish.”</p> + +<p>The three officers after making preparations took their departure, with +their companies, and went in diverging directions, so as to cover as +large a territory as possible.</p> + +<p>The company with Captain Morgan made its way slowly westward, keeping a +sharp lookout ahead, and to the right and the left, looking eagerly for +signs of Indians, but evening came and they had not succeeded. They were +then about twelve miles from Peaceful Valley, and they went into camp on +the bank of a creek, in the midst of the woods.</p> + +<p>Sentinels were stationed, for there was danger of an attack in the +night, and the soldiers proceeded to cook and eat their suppers, they +having brought sufficient provisions to last them several days.</p> + +<p>Among the soldiers of this company were Tim Murphy, a jolly, +good-hearted Irishman and Fritz Schmockenburg, a Dutchman, and they were +great friends, though they quarreled good-naturedly a fair portion of +the time. They were great friends of the Dare Boys, too, and were never +so happy when Dick and Tom were not with the company.</p> + +<p>“How you vos lige dis Injun fighdin’, Tim?” asked Fritz, as they sat +beside each other on a log, eating their supper.</p> + +<p>“Foine,” was the reply. “It is more excitin’ than foightin’ ridcoats, +Dootchy. Don’t ye think so, yersilf?”</p> + +<p>“Yah, I lige id firsd rate. But they are ugliness to loog at, und dot is +so.”</p> + +<p>“The only t’ing Oi don’t loike about it, Fritz,” said Tim, with a sly +wink at some of his comrades nearby, “is thot av the ridskins catch ye, +they’ll scalp ye, an’ then they’ll tie ye up to a stake an’ burn ye, +sure an’ they will.”</p> + +<p>Fritz looked worried. “Dot vould not be pleasantness, alretty,” he said.</p> + +<p>“Oi should say not, Dootchy. Take care thot they don’t capture ye, +Fritz.”</p> + +<p>“I vill loog ouid dot dey don’t catch me, Tim Murphies.”</p> + +<p>“You had betther, me bye.”</p> + +<p>An hour or two after supper Fritz was sent to do sentinel duty, and he +took his station about one hundred yards from camp, and stood, musket in +hand, trying to peer into the darkness that encompassed him about.</p> + +<p>Fritz was not a coward by any means, but he was always a bit fearful of +being slipped up on by an enemy in the darkness, and so he stood there, +looking eagerly around, and listening intently.</p> + +<p>He heard occasional sounds, such as are usually to be heard in the +timber at night, and at each sound he would grip his musket tightly, and +face in the direction the sound came from, ready to fire if an enemy +appeared.</p> + +<p>After a while, however, he became somewhat used to the noises, and did +not start or show signs of nervousness. Still, he was not very well +pleased with the work of standing sentinel.</p> + +<p>“I haf heard dot der retskins are so slyness dot dey gan slip up close +midout anybody hearin’ dem,” Fritz muttered. “I vouldn’t lige to haf dem +slip up on me, dot vay.”</p> + +<p>Slowly the time passed, and Fritz was standing leaning against a tree, +after a while, resting his hands on the muzzle of his musket.</p> + +<p>He had been standing this way perhaps ten or fifteen minutes, when +suddenly he heard a terrible racket in front of him. It startled Fritz, +who thought that of course the noise was made by Indians, and he leveled +his musket and fired a shot as quickly as possible, and then ran toward +the encampment, yelling loudly:</p> + +<p>“Injuns! Der Injuns are comin’!”</p> + +<p>He did not stop till he was within the encampment, and the soldiers were +up, muskets in hand, and many asked eagerly where the Indians were.</p> + +<p>“Dey’re comin’ bretty quickness!” cried Fritz. “I shot some uf dem, und +der rest vill be here quick, alretty. Be ready to shoot dem!”</p> + +<p>The soldiers stood there, peering into the depths of the forest, but +could not see any signs of Indians; nor was there any sound to indicate +the presence of redskins.</p> + +<p>“What kind of a noise did you hear, Fritz?” asked one of the soldiers.</p> + +<p>“Oh, id vos a terrible racket, lige a lot uf Injuns fighdin’.”</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ Oi don’t belave ye heard inny Injuns at all, Dootchy,” said +Tim. “Come wid me, an’ we’ll find out phwat made the racket.”</p> + +<p>One of the soldiers seized a brand from the fire, and quite a number +made their way to the spot where Fritz had heard the noise, and there, +stretched on the ground, dead, they found a wildcat.</p> + +<p>“Ho, ho, ho!” laughed Tim. “Sure an’ it’s a woildcat ye wur afther +thinkin’ wur Injuns.”</p> + +<p>“He made a pretty good shot in the darkness, anyhow,” said another +soldier.</p> + +<p>“Veil, I am alvays a good shot, alretty,” said Fritz. “But der wildcats +made so much racket dot I though dere vos a lot uv redsgins comin’.”</p> + +<p>“If there were any redskins in the vicinity, you scared them away,” said +a soldier.</p> + +<p>“Yah, I guess dot dey vouldn’t come back tonight, alretty,” said Fritz.</p> + +<p>The soldiers jollied Fritz a while, and then went back to camp and lay +down and were soon asleep.</p> + +<p>Fritz remained on sentinel duty an hour or so longer, and then was +relieved from duty. But next morning the soldiers had quite a lot of +sport jollying Fritz about his wildcat that he thought was a gang of +Indians coming to surprise the camp.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch13' class='break'>CHAPTER XIII<br /><br />Tom and the Redcoats</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The day after Tom Dare became a member of the company of British +soldiers, he went with a party of about twenty on a trip toward the +southward, where it was said the patriots were thick, nearly all being +patriots in fact.</p> + +<p>Captain Kane instructed Lieutenant Wicks, who was to have charge of the +party, to plunder the patriot homes and take prisoners, where the +patriots showed signs of resistance or anger.</p> + +<p>“Bring them here,” he said, “and we will make them join our force and +fight for the king.”</p> + +<p>“All right, Captain Kane,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“I have heard,” went on the captain, “that General Greene is on his way +to Ninety-Six, with a force of about one thousand men, and if he has as +strong a force as that, then we will need all the men we can get, for we +have only about six hundred.”</p> + +<p>Then the party set out, and made its way toward the south. For several +miles their route was through a region where the majority of the +settlers were loyalists, and these were not bothered.</p> + +<p>“There is a settlement about twenty miles from here, in among the +mountains,” said the lieutenant to the soldiers nearest to him as they +made their way along, “and it is made up wholly of rebels. I have been +wanting to get a chance at them for a good while, and I am going +straight there. We will help ourselves to any of their belongings that +we care for, and will take the men prisoners and make them come back to +Ninety-Six and fight for the king when General Greene puts in an +appearance.”</p> + +<p>“I know where that settlement is,” said one of the soldiers. “They are +strong rebels, up there.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, but we’ll make them wish they were loyal to the king before we get +through with them,” said the lieutenant.</p> + +<p>Tom listened to the conversation of the lieutenant and the soldiers with +interest, and he began wondering if he could not manage to in some +manner get word to the settlers of their danger.</p> + +<p>“I’ll try to do so,” he decided. “If any opportunity is offered to me, I +will slip away and try to get to the settlement ahead of the redcoats +and warn the settlers.”</p> + +<p>The party of British soldiers did not hurry. They did not care to reach +the settlement until evening, anyway, and so they made their way along +at a moderate pace, and stopped an hour and a half at noon, and after +they had eaten, they proceeded at the same moderate pace, and it was +getting along toward evening when the lieutenant said they were within +two miles of the settlement, which was in a high valley, up in among the +mountains.</p> + +<p>At the point where they were when the lieutenant made this statement, +they were making their way along a path that wound around the side of a +mountain, and at one side the mountain stretched up hundreds of feet in +the air, while to the other side there was almost a precipice. The +descent for a hundred feet was quite steep, but not so steep but what a +man might descend it, by using care. Tom Dare, who had been trying to +think of some manner of giving the party the slip and getting to the +settlement ahead of the redcoats, decided on a plan. It was dangerous, +but he would try it anyhow, and his plan was to pretend to stumble and +then fall and go sliding down the declivity. He would then get to his +feet, make his way to the settlement and warn the settlers.</p> + +<p>He managed to work his way over till he was close to the edge of the +descent, and then suddenly he stumbled, gave a cry of seeming alarm, +fell and went rolling over and over down the steep mountain-side.</p> + +<p>The soldiers were greatly excited and yelled advice and encouragement to +the youth, but he was rolling so rapidly that their voices came to him +only in an inarticulate murmur. He did not understand their words, and +could not have acted on any of the suggestions had he done so.</p> + +<p>“Stop,” yelled one soldier.</p> + +<p>“Grab hold of something,” cried another.</p> + +<p>“Whirl your body around and stick your heels in the earth,” was the +suggestion from another.</p> + +<p>On rolled Tom, and although he did his best to lessen his speed, he +could do little, and he went down the side of the mountain with terrible +speed. Fortunately, however, he was able to grasp a long trailing vine +and this enabled him to twist himself into a more perpendicular +position. Presently, when about one hundred feet down, he shot over a +little precipice and went fifteen or twenty feet downward, directly into +the top of a stunted fir tree. On through the branches he went, being +buffeted first one way and then the other, and finally fell to the +ground alighting upon the mossy bank of a little rivulet. Had he had in +advance the slightest conception of the danger of his undertaking, he +certainly would not have made the venture.</p> + +<p>Luckily the branches of the tree had broken his fall considerably, and +although he was somewhat stunned by the fall, and dazed by the swift +whirling, he was not seriously injured, and in a few moments he was +enabled to sit up, and a little later he rose to his feet, shook +himself, and began figuring on getting to the settlement ahead of the +redcoats.</p> + +<p>Then to his hearing came the words, from the lieutenant: “Tom Dare! Are +you alive? Where are you?”</p> + +<p>“They’ll be looking for me in a few moments,” thought Tom. “I must hurry +away from here.”</p> + +<p>He set out in the direction of the settlement, picking his way along +carefully, and gradually he worked his way upward, and when he had gone +about a mile, he reached the path the soldiers had been following when +he rolled down the mountain-side.</p> + +<p>Tom looked back, but saw no signs of the British soldiers. He could see +only about two hundred yards, however, as the path bent around the side +of the mountain.</p> + +<p>Tom did not linger there, however, and after one swift glance back, he +set out along the path on the run, and in about ten minutes emerged from +the path into a high valley of perhaps three or four miles long and a +mile and a half in width. At a point near the center he saw a group of +log houses, and toward these he hastened.</p> + +<p>It was now about supper time, and Tom decided that the settlers were all +at their homes. This would be better than if the men were scattered +about, in the fields, at work, for they could make preparations for +defense quickly.</p> + +<p>Tom kept glancing back over his shoulder as he ran toward the houses, +and each time he looked, he expected to see the British soldiers coming. +He had gone about halfway to the houses, however, before he caught sight +of the redcoats. They were just entering the valley, and they must have +caught sight of Tom and guessed what he was intending to do, for a yell +went up from their lips that came to his hearing.</p> + +<p>“They have seen and recognized me,” thought Tom. “Well, I have the start +of them, and will reach the settlement in time to make it possible for +the men to get ready to show fight.”</p> + +<p>On ran the youth, and the redcoats could be seen to be running also, but +they were not so swift-footed as Tom, and he reached the settlement +while the redcoats were still more than half a mile distant.</p> + +<p>Tom stopped at the first house he came to, and opened the door without +ceremony and called out:</p> + +<p>“A party of redcoats is coming to attack the settlement, sir. Get the +men together quickly, if you want to make a fight.”</p> + +<p>A man came hastily to the door, and cried: “What’s thet you say, young +man? Redcoats comin’ here?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir. You can see them, yonder, and--”</p> + +<p>“Why, ye’re one yourself!” exclaimed the man, noting Tom’s British +uniform.</p> + +<p>“No, I’m a patriot that was forced to join their force. I was with that +party, but got ahead of them, and came to warn you. Get the men +together, quickly. How many are there in the settlement?”</p> + +<p>“About twenty-five.”</p> + +<p>“There are only twenty of the redcoats. We can whip them. Get the other +men at once.”</p> + +<p>“All right. I’ll go to part of the houses and give the alarm, you go to +the rest.”</p> + +<p>Then they hastened from house to house, warning the settlers, and in a +less number of minutes than it takes to tell, the men were gathered at +the edge of the settlement, rifles in hand, ready for the redcoats.</p> + +<p>The women and children were told to leave the houses and retire up the +mountain-side, in the shelter of the rocks, and they promptly did so.</p> + +<p>“We’ll protect ourselves by hiding behind the houses and fire at the +redcoats, and hold them back or drive them away,” asserted one of the +settlers, who seemed to be looked upon as the leader. “If we can save +our houses and household goods, we will do so; but if they are too +strong for us, we can retreat up the mountainside.”</p> + +<p>“We can drive them away, I think, sir,” said Tom.</p> + +<p>“I hope so, young man.” And then the settler added: “We thank you for +bringing us warning of the approach of the British.”</p> + +<p>“You are welcome, sir. I am a patriot, and a member of the patriot army +under General Greene, whose army is about sixty or seventy miles east +and north from here. I was captured by the British and made to join +their force, but did so with the intention of making my escape at the +earliest possible moment.”</p> + +<p>“Well, it is lucky for us that you brought us the news of the coming of +the redcoats just when you did.”</p> + +<p>“They are almost within rifle-shot distance now,” said one of the +settlers.</p> + +<p>“All right,” replied the leader. “Keep your eyes on them, and as soon as +they are within range, begin firing. Take aim, and make every shot +tell.”</p> + +<p>A few moments later, the British soldiers were close enough for the +bullets from the rifles to reach them, and the settlers began firing.</p> + +<p>Yells of anger went up from the lips of the redcoats.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch14' class='break'>CHAPTER XIV<br /><br />Friends in Need</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick Dare and Ben Foster were never nearer death’s door than at the +moment when the flames of the fires built around them, as they stood +tied to trees, began to scorch their clothing.</p> + +<p>Both youths were very brave, but there was something so terrible about +being burned at the stake, that a feeling of horror took hold upon them.</p> + +<p>The Indians now leaped to their feet and began jumping about, and +uttering cries, evidently of enjoyment at the spectacle that they were +about to witness.</p> + +<p>Then, just as the flames were about to begin burning the clothing of the +youths, they felt the ropes that bound them to the trees loosen, and to +the ears of each came the words: “When I say, ‘now,’ leap away from the +tree and run for your life.”</p> + +<p>The voices were strange to the youths, but they realized that the words +were uttered by friends, and each replied, cautiously:</p> + +<p>“All right.”</p> + +<p>Smoke was going up from the fires, and when there came a moment that a +thick sheet of smoke lay for a few moments between the youths and the +redskins, they heard the word, “Now!”</p> + +<p>The youths acted instantly. They leaped out from the midst of the piles +of wood, and turned and ran with the swiftness of the wind in the +opposite directions from where the Indians were dancing and singing.</p> + +<p>Then the smoke lifted and the redskins caught sight of the vacant +positions so recently occupied by their intended victims. Instantly +their singing changed to wild yells of rage and chagrin, followed by +war-whoops, and then the braves dashed in among the trees, in pursuit of +the fugitives.</p> + +<p>Dick and Tom did not see anything of their rescuers. In fact, it was so +dark, in the midst of the timber, now that they were away from the light +of the fires, that they could not see anything, and they had to run at +random. In so doing, they ran against trees, through clumps of bushes, +and stumbled over fallen trees, but managed to make pretty good headway, +even under such circumstances. And they were urged on by the wild yells +of the pursuing redskins, who were wild with rage because of the +inexplicable escape of their intended victims.</p> + +<p>The youths kept together, and plunged recklessly onward. They were +determined to escape, if possible, for they realized that to be +recaptured would be to be again fastened to the trees and burned to +death. The Indians would keep them surrounded, next time, likely, and +thus prevent them from escaping again.</p> + +<p>On the two youths dashed, through the underbrush, and suddenly Dick felt +emptiness beneath his feet, and went plunging downward, alighting on +hard ground with a thump, his head struck something hard, causing him to +see a lot of stars and flashing meteors, and then he knew nothing. He +had been knocked senseless by the fall.</p> + +<p>Ben, running swiftly, did not miss his comrade at once, but when he had +gone perhaps fifty or seventy-five yards farther, and no sound of Dick +running near him came to his hearing, he stopped, listened a few +moments, and then called out, cautiously:</p> + +<p>“Dick! Oh, Dick! Where are you?”</p> + +<p>The sound of the shouting of the pursuing Indians came to his hearing, +but although he listened intently, he did not hear any reply from Dick.</p> + +<p>“Where can he be?” Ben murmured, anxiously. “Can anything have happened +to him?”</p> + +<p>Ben stood there a brief moment, called again, and then, not receiving +any response, he set out through the forest as fast as his legs could +carry him, and that, with a pursuing foe of savages determined upon his +life, was pretty fast. His idea and hope was, that Dick was still +hastening onward, and that he would escape from the disappointed +redskins.</p> + +<p>And Dick was lying senseless in a pit that had been made by hunters, for +the purpose of trapping wild animals, for food and skins.</p> + +<p>When Dick regained consciousness, he could not think for a few moments +what had happened to him. Then he remembered being tied to the trees in +the Indian village, with the fire burning about him, remembered having +been freed by somebody, and that he and Ben had been running for their +lives through the underbrush, pursued by the Indians, when he had taken +a tumble and had got a bump on the head that had rendered him +insensible, and the question now was: Where was he?</p> + +<p>And then the thought came to him: Where was Ben?</p> + +<p>He listened intently, but heard no sound to indicate Ben’s presence, nor +did he hear the yells of the Indians. He judged, from this, that he had +been in his present situation some time.</p> + +<p>He rose to a sitting posture, and reached out and felt around him. He +made out what seemed to be a solid wall of earth, at his back. Then he +rose to his feet, and reached upward, trying to stretch to the top of +the wall, but could not. Then he started to make his way along the wall, +feeling with his hand, for guidance, and he had taken only five or six +steps when he heard a low, menacing growl right in front of him.</p> + +<p>Dick paused and gazed ahead, trying to penetrate the darkness, and then +he saw what looked like two gleaming balls of fire, and then as another +low, fierce growl came to his hearing, he realized the truth--that he +was confronted by a wild animal of some kind, and from the sound of the +growl he judged that the animal was likely a panther.</p> + +<p>Dick had had considerable experience in hunting and trapping, and knew +that pits were often dug for the purpose of trapping wild animals, and +he guessed that he was in one of those old pits, and that he had for a +companion a wildcat or panther!</p> + +<p>Dick Dare realized that his situation was indeed a dangerous one. True, +he had the use of his hands and feet, but what could he hope to do +against the animal without weapons of any kind?</p> + +<p>He felt that his danger was great, that his situation was indeed +desperate, and he stood there, almost frozen to the spot, trying his +best to think what he should do. Truly he had fled one danger but to +encounter another. “From the frying pan into the fire.”</p> + +<p>Again the low, but fierce and threatening growl came to Dick’s ears.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch15' class='break'>CHAPTER XV<br /><br />Preparing for Trouble</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Tom Dare and the settlers managed to hold their own against the +redcoats, and the latter, after two or three attempts at forcing their +way into the houses sheltering the marksmen, retreated about half a mile +and evidently held a council, for they gesticulated quite a good deal. +Then the settlers saw one of the soldiers take his leave, hastening down +the valley, and Tom Dare exclaimed:</p> + +<p>“He’s going back to the fort after reinforcements.”</p> + +<p>“Do you think so?” asked Mr. Hicks, the man who was looked upon as being +the leader at the settlement.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that is what he is going to do. They know that they can’t capture +the settlement with their present force, and as we have killed one or +two of them and wounded several, they are determined to capture the +settlement.”</p> + +<p>“Well, they will be able to do so, if they have a strong enough force, I +guess.”</p> + +<p>“Yes. And that fellow will bring enough soldiers so that they will have +no trouble in getting the best of you.”</p> + +<p>The settlers looked sober and thoughtful. They realized that while they +had gotten the better of the affair, so far, they would not be able to +hold their own against overwhelming odds.</p> + +<p>“What shall we do, anyhow?” remarked one of the settlers.</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you what,” said Tom, who had been doing considerable +thinking. “Let’s take the offensive, and go out and attack those +redcoats and drive them out of the valley.”</p> + +<p>“What good will that do?” asked Mr. Hicks. “That soldier yonder will +return with a strong force, and then we will have to retreat into the +mountains.”</p> + +<p>“No, I think we can arrange a trap for them,” said Tom.</p> + +<p>“How?” with interest.</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you. You know that the path leading into this valley extends +for several miles along the side of the mountain, with a steep descent +on one side, and almost a perpendicular wall at the other.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, we know that.”</p> + +<p>“So do I,” mused Tom, rubbing some of the sore spots resultant from his +precipitous departure from his British comrades.</p> + +<p>“Tell us your plan, Tom.”</p> + +<p>“Well, after we have driven these redcoats out of the valley and back +along that path, we will climb up to the top of the precipice-wall, and +will gather a large number of rocks of good size and place them right +along the edge of the precipice. Then when the redcoats come, we will +roll the stones down upon them.”</p> + +<p>The settlers looked at one another, and it was easy to see that they +thought the idea a good one. “That will likely be effective,” said Mr. +Hicks. “I believe that we can put a stop to the advance of any force, no +matter how strong, in that manner. We can move along the edge of the +precipice, keeping above the redcoats, and keep rolling rocks down on +them, till they are all annihilated or take the back track.”</p> + +<p>The others said they thought Mr. Hicks was right, and so they began +making preparations at once to attack the redcoats. They loaded their +rifles and as many pistols as they could find, and then they withdrew +from the houses, entered the woods and made their way along till they +were opposite the point where the redcoats were stationed. Then they +slipped to the edge of the covered wood land and suddenly rushed out +upon the British soldiers, firing as they went, and yelling at the top +of their voices.</p> + +<p>The redcoats, taken by surprise, were seized with a feeling of terror, +and sprang to their feet and ran toward the end of the valley at the top +of their speed, leaving two or three seriously wounded soldiers behind +them, however.</p> + +<p>The settlers pursued the fleeing soldiers, and kept after them till they +left the valley and were making their way along the path on the side of +the mountain. Then the settlers paused and held a council.</p> + +<p>“Now what shall we do next?” asked one of the settlers.</p> + +<p>“A few of us will stay here and guard the entrance to the valley,” +replied Tom. “And the rest will climb to the top of the precipice and +gather stones and place them where they will be handy to roll down on +the heads of the redcoats when they come.”</p> + +<p>“That is good advice, I think,” said Mr. Hicks. “We will do that.”</p> + +<p>Then he named six of the settlers, and told them to remain on guard at +the entrance to the valley, after which the rest of the party climbed to +the top of the precipice and began collecting rocks and placing them +along the edge of the precipice.</p> + +<p>“Those rocks will beat firearms as destructive weapons,” said Mr. Hicks.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I think so,” replied Tom.</p> + +<p>The soldiers who had been driven from the valley kept onward along the +path till they reached the fairly level country at the end, a distance +of about three miles, and then they stopped and went into camp, as the +reinforcements from the fort would not reach there till about noon of +the next day.</p> + +<p>The settlers worked hard the rest of the afternoon, and when evening +came they had a string of rocks piled along the edge of the precipice +for a distance of a couple of miles, and they felt that they were now in +a position to make it exceedingly hot for the British soldiers when they +put in their expected appearance the following day.</p> + +<p>The settlers now made their way back again and rejoined the six men on +guard at the entrance to the valley, and after informing them that they +would send six men to relieve them, so that they could come to the +settlement and get supper, the main party made its way to the +settlement. The women had supper ready, and the settlers ate, after +which six of their number went and relieved the six at the entrance of +the valley, and the three wounded redcoats were brought and placed in +one of the houses. Their wounds had already been dressed by one of the +settlers, an old man and a sort of doctor, who had not accompanied the +party in its attack on the British, so the wounded men had been taken +care of.</p> + +<p>The settlers felt very well satisfied with the situation. Two or three +had been wounded, but not seriously, and they felt that they had so far +had much the better of the fight.</p> + +<p>They got a good night’s sleep, and were up bright and early, ate +breakfast, and then got ready for the work that was to be performed that +day. Leaving the settlement, they made their way to the entrance of the +valley, climbed to the top of the precipice, and then proceeded to the +farther end of the string of stones, where they paused and settled down +to await the coming of the British.</p> + +<p>Tom Dare, however, who was never satisfied to remain quiet, said that he +would go and reconnoiter and see if he could locate the party of +redcoats that had been driven out of the valley.</p> + +<p>“Very well,” said Mr. Hicks, “but be careful, my boy. Don’t let them +capture you.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t, sir. I will keep my eyes open.”</p> + +<p>Then Tom made his way down the steep slope of the mountain, and into the +heavy timber, and he made his way along, slowly and cautiously, for he +believed that the party of redcoats was somewhere in the vicinity.</p> + +<p>Tom advanced a few yards at a time, pausing then to look all around him, +and when he had gone about half a mile he caught sight of the +encampment.</p> + +<p>“I thought I would find them somewhere around here,” thought Tom, “Well, +now by keeping watch on this party of redcoats, I will know when the +others join them, and when they start toward the valley, and can hasten +and warn the settlers and they can be ready to begin the bombardment +with the stones.”</p> + +<p>Tom selected a good place from which to keep his eyes on the redcoats, +and then settled down to take it easy. It was a warm morning, and Tom +presently became somewhat drowsy. He would watch the encampment a little +while, then he would nod slightly, but would presently rouse up again. +It was during one of his nodding periods that Tom suddenly felt strong +hands seize hold of him. Startled, he made an attempt to get free from +the grasp, but could not do so, there being two of his assailants, and +to Tom’s surprise they were Indians.</p> + +<p>“That accounts for their being able to slip up on me without my hearing +them,” thought Tom, with some bitterness.</p> + +<p>His hands were quickly bound together behind his back with a thong, and +then the Indians dragged Tom down to the British encampment, where he +was given a rather grim reception.</p> + +<p>“So, here you are again, eh, Tom Dare!” exclaimed Lieutenant Wicks. +“Good. I am glad to see you. You played us a nice trick when you +pretended to fall, rolled down the slope and then hastened on ahead and +gave the settlers warning, didn’t you. Very good, I will settle with you +for that, now that we have got you in our hands!” And he glared at the +youth in a manner that showed he was very much wrought up, as indeed he +had cause to be.</p> + +<p>The truth was, that he was one of those who had been wounded by the +bullets from the weapons of the settlers. His wound was not serious, but +it was painful, and did not have a good effect on his temper.</p> + +<p>“What are you going to do with me?” asked Tom, somewhat defiantly.</p> + +<p>“I’ll show you at the proper time,” was the reply. “You will be very +sorry that you acted as you did.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps so, perhaps not,” replied the patriot youth.</p> + +<p>“You will find that it does not pay to try tricks on soldiers of the +king,” said the lieutenant, sternly. “You will wish that you had +remained a member of the British army.”</p> + +<p>“No, I won’t,” said Tom. “I am a patriot, and I wouldn’t fight for the +king.”</p> + +<p>“You will be glad to fight for the king, before I get through with you, +you blasted rebel!” cried the lieutenant, fiercely. Then he went on: +“Just wait till the reinforcements get here. We will return to the +valley and thrash the settlers and plunder their houses, and you are +going to go along and help. Do you hear?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I hear,” replied Tom, “but I won’t do much helping, I can tell you +that.”</p> + +<p>He thought of the rocks that were to be rolled down on the redcoats, and +did not like the prospect of being taken along with the force when it +made its way along the path, in going to the valley.</p> + +<p>Would the settlers roll the stones down, he wondered? They would, unless +they knew that he was among the party. But would they discover this +fact? If they did not, Tom would likely be killed by a rock, the same as +if he were a redcoat.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch16' class='break'>CHAPTER XVI<br /><br />The Search for Dick</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Ben Foster kept struggling on through the woods and darkness for quite a +while, and then, not hearing any sounds of pursuit, he paused and +listened intently for a few moments, after which he gave a low, but +penetrating whistle, the same signal that the three youths often used. +If Dick were within two or three hundred yards, he would hear and reply +to the signal.</p> + +<p>There came no reply, however, and after waiting a few minutes, Ben +whistled again, with the same result.</p> + +<p>Then he set out through the forest, but did not go far, before stopping +again.</p> + +<p>“I’m not going any farther till I know where Dick is,” he murmured, “He +may have gotten into trouble, may have fallen and knocked his head +against a tree and fallen into the hands of the redskins again. I’ll +stay here till morning, and then see if I can find him.”</p> + +<p>Ben found a place at the foot of a big tree, and lying down, was soon +asleep. He slept till morning, and then sat up and looked around him.</p> + +<p>All was quiet, and there were neither redskins nor redcoats in sight.</p> + +<p>Ben drew a sigh of relief. He had feared that he might see enemies in +the vicinity.</p> + +<p>But, what should he do? In which direction should he go? He did not know +where to look for Dick, and so he decided to start back in the direction +from which he had come in escaping from the Indian village. It would be +somewhat dangerous to venture back to the vicinity of the village, but +Ben was determined to find Dick, if possible. He feared his comrade had +been recaptured by the redskins, and if this were the case, it should be +his business to rescue him.</p> + +<p>Ben had taken only a few steps, however, when he caught sight of a party +of patriots coming toward him, as he could tell by their blue uniforms.</p> + +<p>“There comes one of the parties sent out by General Greene!” thought +Ben, with a feeling of delight. “Now I can guide them to the Indian +village, and they can put the redskins to rout and rescue Dick, if he is +there.”</p> + +<p>He hastened to meet the soldiers, and when he met them, he found that +one was his own company, under the command of Captain Morgan. The +captain was naturally somewhat surprised to see Ben, but was glad, and +asked if he could give him any news regarding the whereabouts of +Indians.</p> + +<p>“Indeed I can,” was the reply. “Dick and myself were captured by a party +of redskins, and they were about to burn us at the stake, but somebody +slipped up and cut the ropes binding us to the trees, and we managed to +get away. But we got separated in the darkness, and I don’t know where +Dick is.”</p> + +<p>“When was that?”</p> + +<p>“Last night.”</p> + +<p>“How far is the Indian village from here?” the captain asked.</p> + +<p>“About ten or twelve miles, I should judge, sir.”</p> + +<p>“You can guide us thither?”</p> + +<p>“I am sure that I can, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Very good, lead the way, and we will get to the village as quickly as +circumstances will permit. If Dick Dare was recaptured and taken back to +the village, he may be in danger, and we will endeavor to rescue him.”</p> + +<p>“True, sir.”</p> + +<p>They set out at once, with Ben in the lead, as guide. Captain Morgan was +right behind Ben, and then after them came the soldiers, Tim Murphy and +Fritz Schmockenburg being close to the captain and Ben. These two liked +Dick immensely, and were worried for fear something serious had happened +to him.</p> + +<p>After a walk of about three and a half or four hours, Ben called a halt +and said that the Indian village was within half a mile of the spot +where they were standing.</p> + +<p>“We had better advance slowly and cautiously,” he advised, and the +captain so ordered.</p> + +<p>Presently they came in sight of the village, and at the same moment they +were discovered and a wild yell went up from the lips of an Indian brave +that had been standing guard. This was the alarm signal to his fellow +braves in the village, and instantly there was a great skurrying around +among the redskins, as they hastened this way and that, trying to get +together for the purpose of offering battle to the soldiers.</p> + +<p>When they saw how large a number they had to contend with, however, they +quickly decided that prudence was the better part of valor, and took to +their heels, and after them went the patriot soldiers, firing as they +ran, and dropping quite a number of the savages, dead or wounded.</p> + +<p>The soldiers pursued the Indians as long as they could see any of them, +and then they returned to the village, and began looking in the various +wigwams, to see if Dick Dare was there, a prisoner.</p> + +<p>They did not find him in any of the wigwams, and when Captain Morgan +made inquiries of an old Indian, who had remained behind with the squaws +and papooses, and who could speak a few words of English, he was +informed that neither of the white young men who had been at the torture +stake the night before, and had escaped, had been recaptured. Captain +Morgan was somewhat relieved to hear this. But he was still anxious +regarding the fate of Dick. He felt that the youth had gotten into +danger of some kind.</p> + +<p>The soldiers buried the Indians that had been killed, carried the +wounded ones into the wigwams, and left them there for the squaws to +doctor up. Then the soldiers again set out, with the intention of trying +to locate Dick Dare, and rescue him, if he had fallen into the hands of +another party of Indians.</p> + +<p>They made their way slowly through the woods, and spread out, fan-shape, +so as to cover as large a territory as practical. If Dick were anywhere +in that part of the country, they would find him, they were certain.</p> + +<p>But although they put in the rest of the day, practically searching for +Dick, they did not find him, nor did they encounter any Indians. It is +likely that the redskins had heard about the attack on the village, and +kept out of the way.</p> + +<p>Ben was greatly worried about their failure to find Dick or learn +anything regarding his whereabouts. He was worried, too, about the +whereabouts of Tom. He and Dick had started out to look for Tom, and had +themselves been made prisoners, had very nearly been burned at the +stake, had become separated in their flight from the redskins, and now +Dick’s whereabouts was not known. Thus both the Dare boys were missing, +and their friends feared that both were in serious trouble, somewhere, +though where, was the difficulty.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps we may find Dick to-morrow,” said Ben.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ Oi hope thot we may foind ’im, Ben,” replied Tim Murphy. “It’s +a foine bye Dick is.”</p> + +<p>“Yah, Dick and Tom are both fine poys, alretty,” said Fritz +Schmockenburg. “Und I hope dot ve find dem to-morrow.”</p> + +<p>“Oi wish we could foind thim as aisy as ye can foind woildcats whin +standin’ guard, Fritz,” chuckled Tim, and then he told Ben the story of +how Fritz had heard a noise, thought the Indians were coming to attack +the camp, and had fired a shot and rushed into the encampment, yelling +that the Indians were coming, and that when they had gone and looked at +the point where Fritz had fired the shot, they had found a dead wildcat.</p> + +<p>Ben laughed, and then said: “Well, if it had been an Indian, you would +have settled his account, Fritz.”</p> + +<p>“Yah, dot is so,” nodded Fritz, grinning.</p> + +<p>Next morning the patriot soldiers again began searching for Dick, at the +same time keeping their eyes open for Indians, but did not find either, +and after eating their luncheon at noon, they set out toward the patriot +encampment in Peaceful Valley, as they were expected to report there +that evening.</p> + +<p>It was almost dark when they arrived at the encampment, and the other +two companies were already there. They had found two or three Indian +villages, had killed and wounded a number of Indians and put the rest to +flight, as Captain Morgan’s force had done. They had not seen anything +of Dick or Tom Dare.</p> + +<p>General Greene was somewhat worried over the fact that Dick and Tom were +missing, for he liked the youths, and feared that they had met with +death at the hands of the redskins.</p> + +<p>“We will break camp here in the morning, however,” he told his officers, +“and will march upon Fort Ninety-Six. Possibly we may find the Dare Boys +somewhere in that neighborhood. Dick may have continued onward in that +direction to look for his brother Tom.”</p> + +<p>“True,” agreed Captain Morgan. “I hope we may find them alive and well.”</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch17' class='break'>CHAPTER XVII<br /><br />Ben Reconnoiters</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The encampment was astir early next morning, and the soldiers cooked and +ate breakfast, and then began making preparations to get ready for the +march.</p> + +<p>They were ready in about an hour and a half, or two hours, and then +having said good-by to the settlers of Peaceful Valley, they marched +away toward the west.</p> + +<p>They continued onward steadily during that day, stopping an hour at noon +for luncheon and to rest, and when evening came they went into camp at a +point perhaps thirty miles east of Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>They stationed sentinels, so as to prevent a surprise by Indians or +redcoats and the night passed quietly, no enemy appearing.</p> + +<p>They were up and away again early in the morning, and by marching hard, +managed to reach the vicinity of Ninety-Six by evening, They went into +camp only about two miles from the fort.</p> + +<p>Ben Foster was eager to take a look at the fort, for he feared that +possibly Dick and Tom were prisoners there. He went to General Greene +and asked permission to go on a reconnoitering expedition, and the +permission was granted.</p> + +<p>“I shall be glad to have you go and secure all the information possible +regarding Fort Ninety-Six, my boy,” said the general. “But, be careful +and don’t let them capture you.”</p> + +<p>“I will be careful, sir,” and then saluting, Ben took his departure.</p> + +<p>He made his way cautiously through the timber, for he did not know but +there might be redcoats or redskins in the vicinity, and he did not want +to fall into their hands.</p> + +<p>On he went, pausing frequently to listen, but hearing no suspicious +sounds, he drew nearer and nearer to the fort, and at the end of an hour +he arrived at the open space in the center of which the fort stood.</p> + +<p>It was a moonlight night, and Ben could see the fort with tolerable +distinctness, and he stood there for some time, looking at the building +and wondering if Dick and Tom were there.</p> + +<p>Ben stood there for perhaps half an hour, looking at the fort and the +lay of the land with critical eyes. He was sizing the fort and +surroundings up, and trying to figure out what chance for success the +patriot army would have, if an attack was made.</p> + +<p>“It is impossible to judge of the strength of the fort at a distance,” +thought Ben. “I believe that I will try to reach the wall around the +fort and see how strongly-constructed it is. General Greene will be glad +to secure all the information I can get.”</p> + +<p>Ben felt that he would be running considerable risk in advancing across +the open ground on an evening when the moon was shining, but he was +brave, and decided to take a closer view, anyhow.</p> + +<p>Having decided, he at once set to work. He advanced from among the +trees, and just before getting out where the light would encompass him, +Ben dropped on his hands and knees, and began slowly crawling along, +after the fashion of an Indian.</p> + +<p>He was not quite as expert at this kind of work as an Indian, but he did +very well, advancing slowly, and keeping his body close to the ground, +thus not being so likely to attract the attention of a sentinel at the +fort.</p> + +<p>It was about a third of a mile to the stockade-wall around the fort, and +Ben was at least half an hour in going that distance, and as he drew +near the fort, he was in momentary expectation of hearing the crack of a +musket and feeling the sting of a bullet.</p> + +<p>Ben was not discovered, however. At any rate, there was no musket-shot +or outcry. All was quiet, and on reaching the wall, Ben sat down, with +his back against the logs, and rested a while. It had been rather trying +on his nerves to crawl across the open space under the light of the +moon, faint though it was.</p> + +<p>When he had got rested, Ben turned and began making an examination of +the wall. He found that it was made of large logs, flattened at the +sides and placed on top of one another. The wall was, he judged, about +twelve feet high.</p> + +<p>Ben worked his way slowly along the wall, feeling between the logs, for +openings, as he wished to learn how thick the wall was, and whether it +would be possible to batter it down with the field-pieces that General +Greene had brought with the army.</p> + +<p>Presently Ben found an opening, through which he pushed his hand, and +his fingers came in contact with another log on the inside. The wall was +at least two logs in thickness, and this would make it difficult to +batter it down with the field-pieces.</p> + +<p>The patriot youth continued to work his way along the wall, and on +reaching the corner, he turned it and made his way along the wall on +that side. He kept on till he had made the circuit of the stockade-wall, +and he guessed the wall as being about two hundred feet in each +direction.</p> + +<p>Near one corner of the wall Ben had found a place where there were +several openings between the logs, and he believed that he could climb +to the top of the wall, there. He decided to make the attempt, anyway, +as all was quiet. He wished to get a look into the enclosure, if he +possibly could.</p> + +<p>He made his way to the point in question, and then he began the work of +climbing to the top of the wall. This proved to be more difficult than +he had expected, and he began to think he would not be able to reach the +top, after several unsuccessful attempts, but presently he managed to +get high enough up the side of the wall so that he could get hold of the +top log, and then he slowly and cautiously pulled himself up till his +head was a little above the top of the wall.</p> + +<p>Now he exercised great caution, lifting his head slowly, a little at a +time, till he was enabled to look into the enclosure. He could see the +building constituting the fort, and at the farther side he saw a +sentinel pacing slowly back and forth on the platform built against the +wall, and about five feet from the top.</p> + +<p>The sentinel’s side was toward Ben when he was pacing back and forth, +however, and when he paused to look away from the fort, his back was +toward the youth, so Ben did much fear being seen by him. But there +should have been a sentinel on the side where Ben was, and he wondered +where the sentinel could be.</p> + +<p>He presently found out, for suddenly the head of a British soldier +appeared above the top of the wall, and almost in front of Ben’s face. +The sentinel had evidently been down below when Ben first climbed up +there, and had just returned to his post. He caught sight of Ben at the +same moment the youth caught sight of him, and his exclamation of +amazement was not unnatural.</p> + +<p>“Who are you?” he cried.</p> + +<p>At the same moment he made a grab for the youth’s throat, but Ben was +too quick for him, and evaded the grasp by dropping to the ground with +all possible dispatch.</p> + +<p>“Spies! Rebels!” yelled the sentinel, loudly, and then grabbing up his +musket, he leaned over the top of the wall and looked eagerly for the +youth who had given him such a surprise.</p> + +<p>Ben was running across the open ground at the top of his speed, and the +sentinel caught sight of him, leveled his musket, took a quick aim, and +fired.</p> + +<p>Crack, the shot rang out, and Ben heard the bullet go buzzing past his +ear. Had the bullet gone a few inches to the right it would have put an +end to his career as a patriot soldier and spy.</p> + +<p>Ben ran onward as swiftly as he could, and was soon out of musket-shot +range, but he heard sounds of loud and excited voices back at the fort. +He realized that he had caused a commotion within its walls, and thought +it likely that some of the British soldiers would emerge from the fort +and come in pursuit of him.</p> + +<p>And such proved to be the case. The gate was thrown open, and out came +about a score of redcoats and started on the track of Ben. They yelled +to him to stop and surrender, but of course he paid no attention to +them, but ran onward as fast as possible. He was not much alarmed, as he +was sure he could reach the edge of the forest before the redcoats could +get within musket-shot distance, and then he could evade his pursuers in +the underbrush and darkness, he felt certain.</p> + +<p>He was not long in reaching the desired haven, and he dashed in among +the trees, drawing a breath of relief as he did so, and slackened his +speed, somewhat, as he did not think it necessary to run so fast. He +could give the redcoats the slip, now that he was in among the trees.</p> + +<p>He was soon out of hearing of his pursuers, who doubtless did not follow +him very far into the forest. In less than an hour’s time he was at the +patriot encampment, and had made his report to General Greene.</p> + +<p>The information he gave the general, about the size of the fort, and the +extent and thickness of the walls, was of considerable interest and +value, and the general thanked the youth for having secured the +information.</p> + +<p>“I hope to capture the fort in a few days,” the general said.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch18' class='break'>CHAPTER XVIII<br /><br />Dick and the Panther</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick Dare had no doubt that the animal in the pit with him was a +panther. He judged by the growl, which was stronger than would have been +the case had the animal been a wildcat.</p> + +<p>He felt that he was indeed in a serious predicament. Had he had his +pistols, or even a knife, he would have stood some chance to hold his +own against the animal, but he had no weapons of any kind.</p> + +<p>So he simply stood still, at one corner of the pit, and kept his eyes on +the two balls of fire.</p> + +<p>There was silence for a few moments, and then Dick saw the two red spots +move, and he was confident they were advancing toward him, slowly but +surely.</p> + +<p>Dick guessed that the animal had likely been but a short time in the +pit, and was not hungry, still he realized that he had before him a +dangerous antagonist.</p> + +<p>What should he do? What could he do? He did not feel that he could do +anything, but he was tired of standing still, and so he began moving +slowly along the wall, his back against it.</p> + +<p>When he had taken a few steps, his foot struck against something, and +feeling down, he found that it was a limb of a tree perhaps as large as +his arm. Instantly his heart gave a leap of delight. Likely this was a +limb that had been used by the person who dug the pit, to climb up out +of the pit on, after shooting an animal that he had trapped, and if Dick +could get the limb leaned up against the wall, he might be able to climb +out, though he would likely be attacked while trying to do so.</p> + +<p>He would try, however, and he lifted the limb, and leaned it against the +wall, at the corner, and at the same moment he heard the low, menacing +growl of the animal. He whirled about, quickly, and yelled “Scat,” +waving his arms frantically. The animal slunk away, with a snarl of +fright.</p> + +<p>Then Dick turned, and seizing hold of the stick, began climbing with +desperate energy and swiftness. He expected every moment to feel the +claws of the animal, but did not, and to his delight he succeeded in +reaching the top of the pit and getting out on solid ground.</p> + +<p>He did not know how long he had been in the pit before regaining +consciousness, but guessed it was not long.</p> + +<p>He heard the growls of the animal and its footfalls as it went running +around the pit, but this did not worry Dick now. He was at a point the +animal could not reach, and safe from attack.</p> + +<p>Dick stood there a few moments, listening intently. He did not hear any +sounds to indicate the presence in the vicinity of any Indians, or of +his friend, Ben.</p> + +<p>Dick presently gave the signal whistle, the same as Ben had done when +searching for him, and listened intently, but heard no response. Again +he repeated the signal, with the same result, and he knew that Ben was +not within hearing.</p> + +<p>Dick pondered a few moments. What should he do? Which way should he go? +Should he return to Peaceful Valley, or should he go on toward +Ninety-Six. What would be Ben’s course?</p> + +<p>After giving the matter considerable thought, Dick decided to continue +onward toward Ninety-Six. He believed that Ben would do the same, and he +was eager to find Tom, and was somewhat anxious regarding his fate.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I’ll go on in the direction of Ninety-Six,” murmured Dick. “Likely +Ben will do so, and I will meet him again, and if not, I may find Tom.”</p> + +<p>So Dick set out through the forest, heading toward the west. He walked +steadily for two or three hours, and then, feeling tired, he lay down at +the foot of a tree and was soon asleep.</p> + +<p>When he awoke it was morning, he rose and looked about him. On all sides +was the wilderness, the timber being all around him. Nowhere were there +any signs of Indians.</p> + +<p>“I wish I could find a settler’s home,” murmured Dick. “I am feeling the +need of some food. Well, perhaps I may happen upon one, soon.”</p> + +<p>Then he set out, still heading westward, and walked steadily onward an +hour or so, when he came to a little cabin in an open space in the +forest.</p> + +<p>“Good,” thought Dick. “Now, I shall be able to get something to eat, +likely.”</p> + +<p>Dick advanced and knocked on the door, which was opened a few moments +later by a tall, roughly-dressed man, who looked like a hunter and +trapper.</p> + +<p>“Good morning, sir,” greeted Dick. “I would like to get something to +eat.”</p> + +<p>“All right, stranger; come right in,” was the reply. “Ye are welcome to +all the grub ye can eat, such as it is.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you,” said Dick, and he entered and took a seat, while his host +placed some meat and corn cakes on the rude table at one side.</p> + +<p>“Now set up here, and eat all ye want,” said the man.</p> + +<p>Dick did so, and when he had talked with the man a few moments, he +learned that he was a hunter, but that he was a patriot, and the youth +learned that it was about forty miles to Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>“If ye’re going over in that part of the country, ye’ll have to keep +your eyes open,” said the hunter. “The redcoats and redskins both are +thick over thar. Only yesterday the savages caught a couple of young +fellows and were going to burn them at the stake. I was about an’ with a +friendly Indian’s aid crawled up just in time to cut loose their bonds +or they would be on the road to kingdom come before now.”</p> + +<p>“My kind preserver,” gasped Dick, “I thank you for myself and for Ben, +my comrade.”</p> + +<p>Naturally there was a long talk, and Dick repeated time and again his +words of appreciation. Finally with a last grasp of the kindly hunter’s +hand he took his departure.</p> + +<p>The man insisted on Dick taking a package of food with him, which the +youth did, and he was glad afterward that he did so, for he did not come +upon another cabin during that day, and would have had to go hungry, but +for the supply he had brought with him.</p> + +<p>He camped that night at a point which he judged was perhaps ten miles +from Fort Ninety-Six, and slept quietly till morning.</p> + +<p>He ate the last of the food the hunter had given him, and then set out +in the direction of Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>About three hours later, he came to a wide open space, and looked with +interest at what he knew was Fort Ninety-Six, standing near the center +of an open space of goodly size.</p> + +<p>“There’s Ninety-Six,” murmured Dick, gazing at the fort eagerly. “I +wonder if Tom is a prisoner there?”</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch19' class='break'>CHAPTER XIX<br /><br />The Settlers’ Retreat</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Tom Dare realized that he was indeed in great danger, for the rocks +would be as likely to strike him as not, if he accompanied the redcoats, +and it looked as if he would have to accompany them.</p> + +<p>Slowly the time rolled away, and when the British reinforcements, to the +number of about seventy-five, reached there, it was decided to start at +once for the valley.</p> + +<p>They could reach there easily before evening, they felt certain. So they +set out, with Tom among them.</p> + +<p>As they entered upon the path that led along the foot of the mountain, +Tom looked upward quickly, as if expecting to see some of the stones +come rolling down upon them.</p> + +<p>If the settlers did not know he was with the redcoats, they would soon +begin rolling the stones down, and Tom did not like the idea of being +there among the British.</p> + +<p>They continued onward perhaps two hundred yards, and then Tom looked +upward again, an apprehensive expression on his face, and one of the +soldiers, noticing this, glanced upward a moment later, a look of +curiosity on his face. The look quickly changed to one of terror, +however, and he yelled, loudly: “Look out for the rock, comrades! Be +ready to dodge!” and he pointed up the mountainside.</p> + +<p>His comrades, and Tom also, glanced upward and saw a big rock coming +bounding down the steep descent. It was now not more than one hundred +yards distant, and coming with the speed of the wind. Down it came, +leaping, bounding, rolling, and the next moment it struck in the midst +of the soldiers, knocking a couple of them down, and causing the others +to tumble over one another in their attempts to get out of the stone’s +course.</p> + +<p>“So that is what you were looking upward for, eh?” cried the redcoat who +had noted Tom’s action and who had glanced upward and seen the rock +coming. “The rebels have piled stones along the top of the precipice, +comrades, and they’ll annihilate our party if we try to make our way +along this path to the valley.”</p> + +<p>“There comes another rock!” yelled another soldier at that moment, and +there was a lively scrambling to get out of the rock’s course.</p> + +<p>They managed to keep from getting hit, this time, but realized that if +they continued onward along the path, they would be crushed and knocked +to pieces by the stones, and so the lieutenant gave the order to +retreat, and the soldiers hastened back along the path, to the point +they had left only a short time before.</p> + +<p>Here they paused, and held a council. It was decided to ascend to the +top of the precipice and attack the settlers there, if they stood their +ground and showed fight.</p> + +<p>“We can reach the valley by going that way,” said the lieutenant.</p> + +<p>So they set out, and made their way slowly up the steep ascent leading +to the top of the mountain. Tom was taken with them, but he did not mind +it so much, now, for he did not fear the bullets from the settlers’ +rifles as much as he did the rocks.</p> + +<p>Presently the party of redcoats were almost to the top of the mountain, +and suddenly there came the sound of rifle-shots, and then the bullets +came whizzing among them. One or two of the redcoats were wounded, but +they pressed onward as rapidly as the rough conditions would admit, and +soon caught sight of the settlers, who had taken up positions behind the +rocks.</p> + +<p>The British soldiers opened fire, and then advanced, slowly and +steadily, and the settlers, knowing that they could not offer successful +resistance to such a strong force, turned and retreated hastily.</p> + +<p>They kept on retiring till they came to where there were a lot of large +boulders, and here they stopped to reload their rifles, and waited for +the British to come within range again.</p> + +<p>The lieutenant, observing this action, placed Tom Dare right in front, +so that a volley could not be fired without hitting the patriot youth.</p> + +<p>The settlers must have recognized Tom by this time, for they turned and +hastened onward again, having evidently decided not to fire the volley +as planned.</p> + +<p>“That scheme worked all right,” the lieutenant said, with a smile. “We +will simply keep you in front, Tom Dare, and will thus be able to walk +into the valley in safety. I am glad that we got hold of you.”</p> + +<p>But Tom wasn’t glad. By permitting himself to fall into the hands of the +enemy, he had spoiled the plan to roll rocks down on the redcoats, and +had made it impossible for the settlers to fire upon the British without +being in danger of killing him. He wished that he could do something to +change this state of affairs.</p> + +<p>But what could he do? He was a prisoner, with redcoats all about him, +and he did not see how he was to do anything to help the settlers.</p> + +<p>He thought of trying the plan of falling down the precipice, as he had +done once before, but the precipice in this instance was too steep. He +would surely be killed, as it would be a fall of at least one hundred +and fifty feet.</p> + +<p>He decided that there was nothing that he could do, and so he walked +onward at the head of the party, though he did not feel very happy.</p> + +<p>The settlers did not stop again. Evidently they did not wish to take the +chances of killing or wounding Tom by firing at the British, and had +made up their minds to retreat to their village in the valley.</p> + +<p>They moved considerably faster than did the redcoats, and Tom, who +shrewdly guessed that the settlers would like to have as much time as +possible, for the purpose of removing their household goods to a safe +place in the mountains, walked slowly pretending lameness, which did not +seem unreasonable and thus kept the redcoats from advancing, for a time +at least, at a fast pace.</p> + +<p>They kept telling him to increase his speed, but he did not hasten his +steps and presently a couple of soldiers seized him by the arms, at an +order from the lieutenant, and he was made to walk faster.</p> + +<p>They went on, and finally reached the entrance to the valley. Then they +moved faster, as the ground was level and the walking easier. They did +not see the settlers, so judged they had already reached their homes in +the village.</p> + +<p>“Likely the rebels intend carrying some of their household goods and +valuables up into the mountains,” said the lieutenant. “We must try to +get there in time to prevent them from doing that.”</p> + +<p>So they hastened, and closer and closer to the village they drew. +Finally they were at the edge of the village, and all was quiet. They +did not see any signs of the settlers.</p> + +<p>“They’re gone,” said the lieutenant.</p> + +<p>Then the redcoats scattered and entered the houses, and searched for +valuables, but found nothing of much use, the settlers having indeed +taken pretty much everything out of the houses.</p> + +<p>“They’ve gone up into the mountains,” said the lieutenant. “Let’s fire +these houses, and then follow.”</p> + +<p>With cries of satisfaction, for they were angered by being cheated out +of their plunder, as they looked at it, the soldiers set fire to the +houses, and soon the village was going up in flames.</p> + +<p>“Now head up into the mountains, men,” said the lieutenant. “We’ll run +the rebels to earth and help ourselves to their valuables, anyhow.”</p> + +<p>The soldiers hastened into the forest, and began ascending the mountain. +The ground was rough, but they made pretty good headway. They spread +out, fan-shape, so as to cover as much ground as through this alignment +they could obtain, and looked eagerly in all directions for the patriot +settlers.</p> + +<p>“They must have a hiding-place somewhere up the mountain,” said the +lieutenant. “Make a thorough search.”</p> + +<p>But, although they searched till nightfall, they did not find the +hiding-place of the settlers, and they finally went back down to the +village, or rather, where it had stood, for the houses were now burned +to the ground, and there camped for the night.</p> + +<p>And next morning they set out on the return to Ninety-Six, reaching the +fort about the middle of the afternoon.</p> + +<p>Tom was placed in the guard-house, and the lieutenant went to Major +Cruger and reported the result of the expedition. The Major expressed +satisfaction at the burning of the settlers’ houses, but was sorry they +had managed to make their escape and carry their household goods with +them.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch20' class='break'>CHAPTER XX<br /><br />Dick Appears</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The morning after the patriot force reached the vicinity of Fort +Ninety-Six and went into camp, who should appear but Dick Dare! He went +at once to the headquarters tent, and was given a cordial greeting by +General Greene.</p> + +<p>“We were in hopes that you would turn up here,” said the general. “Where +have you been, my boy?”</p> + +<p>“Is Ben Foster here?” asked Dick.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“Then he told you, doubtless, that we got separated while running from +some Indians.”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I supposed that he would go on toward Ninety-Six, and so I did +that.”</p> + +<p>“Ah. And have you learned anything of importance?”</p> + +<p>“Nothing regarding the fort, as yet. But I have learned where my brother +Tom is.”</p> + +<p>“That is good. Where is he?”</p> + +<p>“A prisoner in the fort.”</p> + +<p>“Indeed?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir. He was captured by some British soldiers and brought to the +fort, and pretended to join the force. He was sent with a foraging +force, to attack a patriot village up in the mountains, and he managed +to get away and reach the settlement ahead of the redcoats and warn the +settlers, and they managed to get to a hiding-place up in the mountains, +with their household goods, but the British burned the houses. I was +there, and saw the settlers, and they told me about the affair. They +said that Tom was recaptured, while reconnoitering, and that the British +took him to Ninety-Six. When we capture the fort, we can free him.”</p> + +<p>“I think we shall be able to capture the fort. Ben Foster made a +reconnoitering trip last night, and learned considerable about the +strength of the walls. I believe we can batter them down with the +field-pieces.”</p> + +<p>“I hope so. Is there anything you wish me to do?”</p> + +<p>“You may reconnoiter and gain all the information possible. There is no +hurry, and by taking our time, we may be able to make the capture of the +fort more certain.”</p> + +<p>“I will do my best to secure information that will be of value to you, +sir.”</p> + +<p>Then Dick saluted and withdrew, and was soon with Ben Foster, at the +quarters occupied by Captain Morgan’s company.</p> + +<p>They shook hands, and then Ben asked: “What became of you after we got +separated, Dick? I hunted around quite a good deal for you, and +signalled, but you did not answer.”</p> + +<p>“Likely if you were near me when you uttered any of the signals, it was +while I was insensible, and I did not hear you, of course.” Then Dick +explained that he had fallen into a pit that had been dug as a trap to +capture wild animals, and that he had fallen so hard as to knock him +senseless. And then he told of there being a panther in the pit, and Ben +uttered an exclamation.</p> + +<p>“Phew!” he murmured, “that wasn’t very pleasant, was it?”</p> + +<p>“No, indeed,” said Dick. “But I managed to climb up a limb that I found +there, and make my escape, and then I headed toward Ninety-Six.”</p> + +<p>Then he told Ben the same story that he had told General Greene, and Ben +was glad to know that Tom was alive and probably well, though a prisoner +in Fort Ninety-Six. Full particulars he gave too, of the kindly hunter +to whom they owed their life and opportunity to escape from the savages.</p> + +<p>“We’ll have Tom out of there before very long,” said Ben, reverting to +the problem at hand.</p> + +<p>“General Greene said for me to reconnoiter,” said Dick, “and I guess +that I will take a look at the fort to-day, and then visit it to-night.”</p> + +<p>“There isn’t much that you can learn,” said Ben. “I found out the +strength of the stockade-walls, and that is about all there is to learn, +from the outside. If you could get within the walls, you could secure +definite information regarding its strength, but you can’t do that.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose not,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>A little while after luncheon, Dick left the encampment and made his way +in the direction of Fort Ninety-Six. He reached the edge of the timber, +presently, and stopped and gazed across at the fort. He could not +venture out into the open ground without being seen by the sentinels, of +course, and so he did not advance farther.</p> + +<p>He made his way along the edge of the forest quite a distance, however, +and sized up the fort from different directions. Then he turned and +walked slowly along through the woods.</p> + +<p>He was heading for the encampment, and when about halfway there, he +crossed a rude wagon-road, which wound this way and that among the +trees, and Dick suddenly caught sight of a man approaching, driving a +team and wagon.</p> + +<p>Dick had crossed the road at the edge of the timber, and knew it led to +the fort, and now he stopped and waited till the wagon approached, when +he stepped out and stopped the man, who looked like a typical settler of +the vicinity.</p> + +<p>“Where are you going?” queried Dick.</p> + +<p>“To the fort,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“What for?”</p> + +<p>“I’m takin’ some meat an’ vegertables thar to sell to ther sojers,” was +the reply.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” exclaimed Dick. He had been struck by an idea. “Say,” he remarked, +eyeing the man searchingly, “are you a king’s man, or are you a patriot? +Or are you neutral?”</p> + +<p>“Wal,” was the reply, “I kain’t say thet I’m a king’s man, but ther +redcoats pay me well fur my garden truck. Why d’ye ask?”</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you why,” said Dick, eagerly. “I wish to enter the fort, and +why can’t I go with you? They’ll not be suspicious if I’m with you, and +that will give me a chance to get a look at the inside of the fort.”</p> + +<p>“Ye’re a patriot, then, hey?”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>“All right Ye can go inter ther fort with me, an’ can help me sell ther +truck to ther sojers, an’ ye can look aroun’ while ye’re doin’ thet.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you. That will be very kind of you.”</p> + +<p>Then Dick climbed up on the seat beside the man, who drove onward and +half an hour later they were at the entrance to the stockade, the big +gate swung open, and the man drove into the enclosure.</p> + +<p>Dick, seated on the seat beside the man, looked around him with eager +interest, but with all evidence of eagerness carefully kept from +showing. He seemed careless and indifferent.</p> + +<p>Then the farmer began selling the meat and vegetables, and Dick helped +him, and all the time he was sizing up the interior of the fort as best +he could.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch21' class='break'>CHAPTER XXI<br /><br />In the Fort</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Dick had not noticed the fact, but while he was helping the farmer hand +out the meat and vegetables to the others, a soldier had been standing +near, gazing keenly and searchingly at him.</p> + +<p>Suddenly a low exclamation escaped the lips of the soldier, and he +turned to one of his comrades and said something, and they conversed a +few moments, after which the soldier spoken to hastened into the fort. +Presently he returned, accompanied by a soldier wearing a captain’s +uniform.</p> + +<p>The captain advanced to the side of the wagon, and looking up at Dick, +said: “Who are you, young man?”</p> + +<p>“I am working for Mr. Boggs,” replied Dick.</p> + +<p>“What’s your name?”</p> + +<p>“Dick.”</p> + +<p>“Dick what?”</p> + +<p>“Dick Rogers.”</p> + +<p>The captain pointed a finger at the young patriot, and exclaimed in a +stern, threatening voice: “You are Dick Dare, the rebel spy!”</p> + +<p>Dick had expected something of the kind, after seeing the threatening +look on the captain’s face, but at the same time it rather took him +aback. He gazed steadily at the officer, however, and said:</p> + +<p>“Why do you think I am Dick Dare, sir? And who is he?”</p> + +<p>“Why do I think you are Dick Dare? Because one of the soldiers here, was +stationed up in Virginia a few months ago, and saw you there, and he +recognized you and told me who you were. And now, you are my prisoner. +Climb down out of that wagon.”</p> + +<p>On driving into the enclosure, the farmer had made a circle, and the +horses were now standing with their heads toward the gate, which was +still open. Dick had noted this fact, and when he heard the captain’s +command, a daring plan came into his mind. He would attempt to drive out +of the enclosure and make his escape.</p> + +<p>So he quickly grabbed up the lines and whip, and yelling to the horses, +and giving them a couple of cuts with the whip, Dick sent the team out +of the enclosure on the gallop, knocking down and running over two of +the soldiers, who at the command from the captain had tried to stop the +horses.</p> + +<p>The farmer had been thrown down in the bottom of the wagon by the +suddenness of the start, and he lay still, for he thought it likely that +there would be bullets flying soon.</p> + +<p>And in thinking thus he was correct, for the captain, wild with rage, +gave the command for his soldiers to fire, and they did so, the bullets +whizzing around Dick, who was still plying the whip and yelling to the +horses.</p> + +<p>On across the open ground dashed the team, and the soldiers came running +forth from the enclosure like bees from a hive, and many of them came +running after the wagon, but could not gain on it.</p> + +<p>Dick drove on, and presently the wagon was in among the trees. Here the +road wound and twisted, and the progress was slower than when in the +open ground, but still they went at a pretty rapid rate.</p> + +<p>The soldiers gave up the pursuit, and then Dick slowed the horses to a +walk, and turned to the farmer, and smiling rather grimly, said: “I am +sorry to have had to take matters in my hands, Mr. Boggs, but the +redcoats would have captured me, otherwise.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, that’s all right,” was the reply. “I had sold most all my truck, +ennyhow.”</p> + +<p>“But the redcoats will have it in for you, after this, won’t they?”</p> + +<p>“I guess not. I’ll tell ’em I didn’t know ye was a rebel.”</p> + +<p>“That will be a good idea.”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>The farmer now took his seat beside Dick, and took the lines, and drove, +and presently Dick said: “I guess I’ll leave you, now, Mr. Boggs. This +is about the nearest point to the patriot encampment.”</p> + +<p>“All right, Dick Dare.”</p> + +<p>Dick leaped to the ground, shook hands with the farmer, thanked him for +his kindness in doing what he had, and then said good-by. His mission +ended he set out through the woods in the direction of the encampment.</p> + +<p>When he reached there, he went to the headquarters tent, and was given a +cordial greeting by General Greene.</p> + +<p>“Have you been reconnoitering the fort, Dick?” the general asked.</p> + +<p>“Yes, General Greene,” was the reply. “And I have been within the +stockade-walls.”</p> + +<p>The general started and looked surprised. “How did you manage that, my +boy?” he asked.</p> + +<p>Dick explained, then, the general listening with interest, and when Dick +had described the interior of the enclosure, and the fort, the officer +nodded, and said: “You have done pretty well, Dick. A knowledge of the +interior arrangements at the fort is worth considerable.”</p> + +<p>“So I thought, sir, and that is the reason I was so eager to see the +interior of the fort.”</p> + +<p>After he had asked a few questions, General Greene told Dick he might +go, but that any further information he could secure would be +appreciated.</p> + +<p>“I’ll reconnoiter the fort to-night,” said Dick. “I may be able to learn +something further.”</p> + +<p>Dick then rejoined his comrades, and told them the story of his +adventure at the fort. They listened with interest, and uttered +exclamations of wonder.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ they came moighty near to grabbin’ ye, thot toime, Dick,” said +Tim Murphy.</p> + +<p>“Yah, dot is so,” nodded Fritz Schmockenburg.</p> + +<p>“But I was able to get a look at the interior of the fort,” said Dick, +“and that was worth while.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, indeed,” said Ben Foster. “Of course, you saw nothing of Tom?”</p> + +<p>“No. If he is there, he was in a building somewhere, and so I would not +have seen him.”</p> + +<p>They talked about the adventure quite a while, and were agreed that Dick +had acted in a daring manner in venturing into the fort.</p> + +<p>“That was the only way I could secure any information regarding the +arrangements of the buildings within the enclosure,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>After supper, Dick again set out. He made his way at a moderate pace, +and finally reached the edge of the open ground shortly after dark. He +stopped just within the edge of the forest and looked across at the fort +for a few minutes. Then he began making his way toward the fort, slowly.</p> + +<p>It was a rather dark night, and he could just make out the fort, looking +like a faint shadow, and he felt certain that the sentinels could not +see him.</p> + +<p>He was at the wall of the fort in about fifteen or twenty minutes, and +began making his way along it, feeling for a place where he could climb +to the top, as Ben said he had done.</p> + +<p>He had nearly reached the corner of the enclosure when he heard a +commotion within the enclosure. The sound of excited voices came to him, +and the clatter of weapons, and then he heard a noise above his head. He +looked upward quickly, and as he did so, a human form came over the top +of the wall and dropped down, striking Dick and knocking him to the +ground.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch22' class='break'>CHAPTER XXII<br /><br />Tom Makes a Discovery</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Tom Dare did not like the idea of being a prisoner in the hands of the +British, but he was in what seemed to be a pretty strongly-built +building, and his chances of getting out seemed pretty slim. And even if +he were to get out of the building, he would have difficulty in getting +out of the enclosure.</p> + +<p>But Tom as we know was a determined youth, and he made up his mind to do +all he could to make his escape. It was not until about dark of the +evening on which Dick had come to the fort, however, that Tom discovered +that there was a loose board in the floor, and when he had lifted the +board, he discovered that there was a considerable opening underneath +the floor.</p> + +<p>He had already had his supper and did not think that anyone would enter +the room, so he crawled down through the opening, replaced the board, +and worked his way along till he came to the edge of the building. Here +he found that an embankment of earth had been piled up against the side +of the building, and he proceeded to dig through this. It was slow work, +but he persevered, and finally he managed to get a large enough hole +made so that he could crawl through.</p> + +<p>This he did, and presently stood erect beside the building. He looked +around him, sizing up the situation carefully. It was already pretty +dark, and Tom could not see very well, but this would be more to his +advantage than to the advantage of the sentinels, for they could not see +him unless they were close to him.</p> + +<p>Tom slipped away from the building, and presently reached the wall, and +located a set of steps that the soldiers used in climbing to the +platform on the inside of the wall. He climbed these steps, and reached +the platform, and at that moment he heard footsteps advancing, and the +form of the sentinel loomed up indistinctly.</p> + +<p>Tom realized that he was about to be discovered. What should he do? He +did not like the idea of being recaptured, and discovery and capture +seemed unavoidable and indeed imminent.</p> + +<p>He stood there, hesitating, only a few moments, and then suddenly he +heard an exclamation from the sentinel, who asked: “Who is there?”</p> + +<p>There was no time to lose, if he were to escape. Tom realized this, and +did the first thing that occurred to him, which was to climb to the top +of the wall and leap to the ground.</p> + +<p>He dropped down outside the enclosure, but instead of striking the +ground, he struck something which he realized was a human form. And with +the realization came the belief that the person in question was a +British soldier.</p> + +<p>With this belief in his mind, he leaped to his feet and started to run +away as fast as possible, while from above came the command: “Halt! +Stop, or I’ll fire!”</p> + +<p>Then to his hearing came the words, “Is that you, Tom?” It was the voice +of his brother Dick, and Tom replied joyously:</p> + +<p>“Yes, Dick.”</p> + +<p>Crack! It was a musket-shot. The sentinel, hearing the voices, and +thinking, perhaps, that an attack was about to be made, fired, as much +to give the alarm as with the expectation of hitting the person that had +escaped from the enclosure.</p> + +<p>The bullet did not hit Tom, who had stopped, and as soon as he was +joined by Dick, they hastened onward, and were quickly at a point of +safety and out of range. There they paused and stood listening.</p> + +<p>There was considerable noise and excitement at the fort. Lights showed in +the upper room of the fort, and presently the gate opened and it was +evident that some soldiers had come forth, with the intention of +pursuing the fugitive.</p> + +<p>“I guess we had better go in the direction of the patriot encampment, +Tom,” decided Dick. “Those redcoats will be here in a few minutes, and +it will be best for us to be somewhere else.”</p> + +<p>They made their way through the forest, and told their stories as they +went. By the time they had finished relating their remarkable +experiences they were at the encampment, and Tom accompanied Dick to the +headquarters tent, for he had a better knowledge regarding the interior +of the fort than Dick. He had been in all the rooms when he was supposed +to be a member of the British force, and the information he gave about +the building was received with pleasure by General Greene.</p> + +<p>Then, having given all the information in their possession, Dick and +Tom, went to their quarters, where Tom was given a cordial greeting by +his comrades.</p> + +<p>Next morning General Greene called a council of war. When the officers +were all in the tent, the general told them that he had made up his mind +to begin the attack that morning, if the idea met with the approval of +the officers.</p> + +<p>There was not much discussion, for the members of the staff were all +eager to advance on Fort Ninety-Six and attack the fort. As soon as it +had been decided as to the details, the soldiers broke camp and advanced +slowly, dragging the field-pieces with them.</p> + +<p>When they reached the edge of the wood, they halted and planted the +field-pieces for effective use and began firing on the fort.</p> + +<p>The little six-pound balls did not make much impression on the heavy +logs, however, and it seemed doubtful if they would damage the +stockade-walls very much.</p> + +<p>This firing was kept up pretty steadily, but did not have much effect, +and it was decided to wait till nightfall, and try to set fire to the +fort.</p> + +<p>Slowly the hours rolled away, and when evening came, the soldiers began +gathering dry wood, with the intention of carrying it and placing it +against the wall, and then when it was set on fire, there would be a big +blaze, by the light of which redcoats could be shot if they attempted to +put out the fire.</p> + +<p>Luckily it was a dark night, and the soldiers were enabled to carry the +wood and pile it against the walls without being seen, though they had +to exercise great care to avoid discovery.</p> + +<p>Among those who were most active in this work were Dick and Tom Dare and +Ben Foster, and they were eager to see the fire started, for they hoped +it would result in the capture of the fort.</p> + +<p>Slowly the work went on, and at last a sufficient amount of wood had +been piled against the wall, and now the next move was to set fire to +the wood.</p> + +<p>This would be a very dangerous undertaking, as the moment the fire was +started, the person or persons starting it would be revealed by the +light of the flames, and would be in danger of being shot before they +could get out of range.</p> + +<p>General Greene did not like to name anyone for this dangerous work, and +so he called for volunteers. A dozen of the soldiers, Dick and Tom Dare +and Ben Foster among them, stepped forward at once, and offered their +services.</p> + +<p>“I expected that there would be plenty who would be willing to risk +getting shot in order to render a service to the patriot Cause,” said +the general. “But, how shall I choose from among you?”</p> + +<p>“By lot,” suggested a soldier. And this was done, and the result was +that Dick Dare and Tim Murphy were the ones who were to venture up to +the wall of the fort and set the fire.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ we are the byes phwat can do thot work, all roight, Dick,” +said Tim.</p> + +<p>“We will do the best we can to make a success of setting the wood on +fire,” replied Dick.</p> + +<p>They provided themselves with flint and steel and tinder, and then set +out in the direction of the fort.</p> + +<p>Slowly they made their way to the point where the wood was piled against +the wall, and, reaching there, they crouched down, got out their flint +and steel and tinder, and got ready to start the fire.</p> + +<div class='c000'> +<a href='images/illus-171f.jpg'><img src='images/illus-171.jpg' alt='' class='c009' /></a> +<p class='c010'>Suddenly these sparks caught in the tinder.</p> +</div> + +<p>Slowly and carefully they began striking the flint with the steel, and +with each blow they expected to hear a commotion from the sentinels on +the platform along the wall.</p> + +<p>Click, click, click. With each click little sparks flew from the flint, +and suddenly these sparks caught in the tinder, which blazed upward +quickly, revealing the two brave patriots who were thus risking their +lives for the good of the patriot Cause.</p> + +<p>The light from the tinder was seen by the sentinels above, and the next +moment there was a great outcry, and the sentinels, looking over and +catching sight of the two patriots, who were now running away from the +fort as fast as possible, opened fire, and several musket-shots were +fired at the fugitives.</p> + +<p>Luckily, however, none of the shots were effective, the bullets going +wide of the mark, and Dick and Tim kept on running and were soon in the +timber and among their comrades.</p> + +<p>Then the patriots watched the growing fire eagerly, and the soldiers +that had been instructed to shoot the redcoats if they tried to +extinguish the fire, waited eagerly for the attempt to be made, their +muskets held in readiness for instant use.</p> + +<p>Then suddenly the gate of the fort was thrown open and out rushed a +large number of British soldiers, bringing water with which to put out +the fire.</p> + +<p>And as they appeared, the patriot soldiers opened fire, and a rain of +bullets was poured in among the British.</p> + +<p>Crash! roar! Loudly the volleys rang out, and yells of pain and rage +went up from the lips of the redcoats struck by the bullets.</p> + +<p>And then to the rattle of the musketry was added the boom-boom of the +field-pieces.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch23' class='break'>CHAPTER XXIII<br /><br />The Siege</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>Doubtless the patriots would have been able to keep the redcoats from +putting out the fire, and it would have burned the stockade-wall and +perhaps the fort, but a thunder-storm came up just as the affair was at +its height, and a heavy rain beating down on the fire, put it out.</p> + +<p>The patriots, realizing that it would be useless to try to set the fort +afire when the wood was wet, returned to their encampment, and made +themselves as comfortable as they could for the night.</p> + +<p>Next morning work was resumed, but no very rapid progress was made. They +kept pounding the stockade-wall with six-pound cannon balls, but they +did not seem to make much impression. Nor did General Greene deem it +wise to try to storm the fort, for the structure was too strong to break +through, and the wall was too high to scale.</p> + +<p>It began to look as if the siege was to be a long one, and the patriots +settled down to take it as easy as possible, and make a thorough job of +the affair. They were determined that they would capture the fort sooner +or later.</p> + +<p>When the siege had been going on four or five days, a patriot settler +came to the encampment, and told General Greene that a British force was +coming to reinforce Fort Ninety-Six, and it was about fifty miles +distant, and coming from the coast. General Sumpter had sent the patriot +to warn General Greene.</p> + +<p>The general called a council of the members of his staff, and then they +questioned the patriot closely.</p> + +<p>“How long will it take the British to reach here?” asked General Greene.</p> + +<p>“About three days, I think,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“And how strong a force is it?”</p> + +<p>“The man that brought the news to General Sumpter said there was about +five hundred soldiers in the force.”</p> + +<p>“That number, in addition to the force that Major Cruger already has in +the fort will make his army too strong for us,” said General Greene.</p> + +<p>“We must capture the fort before the reinforcements get here,” said +Captain Morgan.</p> + +<p>“Yes, so we must,” agreed the general. “That is, if we can.”</p> + +<p>“We are weakening the stockade-walls,” said another officer. “I believe +that in another day of pounding the wall with six-pound shots we will be +able to make an opening, and then we can storm the works.”</p> + +<p>“We will try to force our way into the enemy’s works, anyhow,” said +General Greene. “We will get to work early in the morning, and keep at +work till we succeed.”</p> + +<p>The patriots were up early next morning, and soon after breakfast the +bombardment of the fort with the six-pounders was begun, and was kept up +steadily throughout the day, but when evening came the wall still stood +firm.</p> + +<p>The patriots began to believe that they would not be able to break down +the wall and get at the enemy.</p> + +<p>Still, they were determined, and next day they worked as hard as ever, +but when evening came the wall still stood firm. The patriots were +disappointed, but made preparations to continue the work as +energetically as ever on the morrow.</p> + +<p>After an early breakfast next morning, they went at it, and kept the +field-pieces busy till noon, and then as the wall still withstood the +fire from the six-pounders, General Greene began figuring on storming +the fort anyway.</p> + +<p>“The British reinforcements may get here this afternoon,” he said, “and +we haven’t much time in which to work. We must try to effect an entrance +at the point where we have been trying to cause a breach with the +field-pieces.”</p> + +<p>The other officers agreed with him, and so about the middle of the +afternoon an attempt was made to storm the enemy’s works. For a while +there was a desperate battle, and the patriots came very near effecting +an entrance, but finally they were repulsed, and had to retreat to the +edge of the forest.</p> + +<p>It was now getting along toward evening, and the dead and wounded +patriots were removed under a flag of truce, the dead being buried and +the wounded taken care of.</p> + +<p>Dick Dare had gone to General Greene as soon as the patriot force had +retreated, and he suggested that he should go and reconnoiter and see if +the British reinforcements were anywhere near, and the general had told +him to go ahead.</p> + +<p>“That is a good idea,” he said. “The British may be near here now.”</p> + +<p>Dick set out, and made his way eastward at a rapid pace, and kept onward +till nightfall, when he stopped at a farmhouse and asked if any redcoats +had been seen in that vicinity.</p> + +<p>The settler said no, and Dick went on his way, but when night came, he +had not seen any signs of the British.</p> + +<p>“They are not far away, I am certain,” was his thought. “Well, I’ll keep +on till I get them located. They will be in camp, likely, somewhere near +here.”</p> + +<p>A few minutes later he caught sight of the glimmer of a campfire in the +distance, and he advanced slowly and cautiously, and when about one +hundred and fifty yards from the camp, he paused and stood there, gazing +at the scene with interest.</p> + +<p>It was the British force, sure enough, and when he had sized it up +closely, he decided that there was nearer one thousand men than five +hundred.</p> + +<p>“Our force could not hope to capture Fort Ninety-Six after this force +gets there,” he murmured. “And this force will reach there easily by +noon to-morrow.”</p> + +<p>Having sized up the British force, Dick turned and made his way back in +the direction of the patriot encampment, reaching there about half-past +ten o’clock. He went direct to the tent occupied by General Greene, and +found the general still up.</p> + +<p>“I found the encampment of the British, sir,” said Dick, after +exchanging greetings.</p> + +<p>“Ah, indeed. How far from here is the encampment, Dick?”</p> + +<p>“About ten or twelve miles.”</p> + +<p>“How strong a force have they?” was the next question.</p> + +<p>“There is nearer one thousand men than five hundred, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Ah. Then the force is stronger than the messenger thought.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> + +<p>The general asked a number of questions, all of which Dick answered, and +then the youth went to the quarters occupied by his company, and told +Tom and Ben about the British.</p> + +<p>“That means that we will have a big battle to-morrow,” said Tom, his +voice trembling with eagerness.</p> + +<p>“Likely,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>“But they will outnumber us greatly,” said Ben.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Dick, “but we will make a strong fight, and if we could +manage to capture the fort before the reinforcements get here, I believe +we could hold it.”</p> + +<p>“I wish we could capture the fort,” said Tom.</p> + +<p>Then they lay down and were soon sound asleep.</p> + +<p class='c006'> </p> +<h2 id='ch24' class='break'>CHAPTER XXIV<br /><br />Lively Work</h2> +<p class='c005'> </p> + +<p>The patriot force was up very early next morning, and had eaten +breakfast before daylight, and as soon as they could see, they began the +attack on Fort Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>They fired with the field-pieces as rapidly as possible, and about the +middle of the forenoon they charged upon the fort and made another +attempt to force an entrance, but the British fought desperately, and +the patriot force was driven back.</p> + +<p>And soon afterward word was brought by a messenger that had been sent to +keep watch for the coming British reinforcements, to the effect that the +force in question was close at hand.</p> + +<p>It would be useless to try to attack the fort again, and so General +Greene ordered that they advance, take up as strong a position as +possible, and resist with persistence the approaching force of British.</p> + +<p>The patriot soldiers made their way to the top of a sort of ridge about +half a mile east of Fort Ninety-Six, and here they stationed themselves +behind trees and awaited the coming of the enemy.</p> + +<p>Presently they caught sight of the redcoats approaching, but it was seen +a few moments later that it was only an advance guard. The redcoats had +heard the sound of the battle, and were cautious, and had sent a +reconnoitering party ahead, so as to avoid an ambush.</p> + +<p>The patriots, knowing they would be discovered before the main force +reached the spot, opened fire on the party as soon as it came in range, +and several of the redcoats were dropped, dead or wounded.</p> + +<p>The rest beat a hasty retreat, and rejoined the main force, and reported +the presence of the patriot force at the top of the ridge. The party +came to a stop, and the officers held a council.</p> + +<p>Two or three of the officers were for making an attack, but the others +thought differently, and so it was decided to make a detour and go +around the patriots.</p> + +<p>This was done, but the patriots learned of the movement, through Dick, +who had followed the reconnoitering party and kept watch on the British, +and the patriots managed to reach a point from which they could fire on +the British as they passed, and killed and wounded a few.</p> + +<p>The redcoats returned the fire, but did not stop to show fight. They +kept onward at as fast a pace as possible, until they reached the fort, +which they entered, and they received a hearty welcome from Major +Cruger, who had begun to think that he would have to surrender the fort.</p> + +<p>The patriots went into camp about a mile from Fort Ninety-Six, and it +was decided to wait and see what the British would do.</p> + +<p>“I believe that we could hold this position, here on the top of this +ridge,” said General Greene. “And I am in favor of staying and giving +them one battle, at any rate.”</p> + +<p>The other officers agreed with him in his view of the matter, and so +they put in the rest of the day, strengthening their position by +throwing up earthworks.</p> + +<p>When this had been finished, the patriots settled down to take it easy +and await some move on the part of the British.</p> + +<p>Dick and Tom and Ben were stationed near the fort, to keep watch and +report any move the enemy might make, and General Greene felt that his +force would be able to make a good showing, as the patriot youths would +send him word if the British emerged and started to come toward the camp +of the patriots.</p> + +<p>No such move was made that day, however, nor during the night, and the +patriots had an opportunity to get rested up, after their hard work +during the siege. It was a privilege appreciated by both officers and +men.</p> + +<p>Next morning, however, the British came forth from the fort, and began +to advance toward the point where the patriot force had taken up its +position.</p> + +<p>They advanced slowly, and Dick sent word by Tom that the redcoats were +coming, and General Greene began making ready to receive the enemy.</p> + +<p>Dick and Ben moved back slowly, till they came to the patriot position, +and then they informed General Greene of the nearness of the British, +who put in an appearance a few minutes later.</p> + +<p>The British made an attack, advancing swiftly and firing as they came. +They charged up the slope, toward the patriot position, but the +patriots, crouching in the ditch, with the earthwork before them, were +in a protected position, and as soon as the redcoats were within range, +they opened fire.</p> + +<p>The battle was on, and a lively battle it was, for a while. The rattle +of the musketry and pistols was loud, and the yells of pain from the +wounded British soldiers added to the din. The patriots were not injured +much, because the bullets from the enemy’s weapons did not penetrate the +earthworks.</p> + +<p>The British made a desperate attempt to enter the encampment and capture +the patriot force, but they failed, and finally retreated, taking their +dead and wounded with them.</p> + +<p>The patriots were very well satisfied with the result of the battle, but +they realized that they might not be successful again, and so General +Greene called a council and asked the officers if they did not think it +best to begin a retreat.</p> + +<p>The officers said they favored retreating, as the British were now too +strong for them, and so that evening, after supper was over and the +soldiers had rested a while, they broke camp and started on the march +toward the east.</p> + +<p>They marched onward till about midnight, and then they stopped and went +into camp. They were far enough away from the British, so that they did +not fear an attack, but there might be Indians around, though hardly in +strong enough force to make much trouble.</p> + +<p>The patriots did not break camp next morning till rather late, and they +had just got started, when a British force was seen approaching from the +direction of Fort Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>“They are coming in pursuit,” said General Greene.</p> + +<p>This was indeed the case, and during that day there was almost a +constant exchange of shots between the British and the patriots.</p> + +<p>A large party of Indians put in an appearance, also, and aided the +British in hindering the marching of the patriots as much as possible.</p> + +<p>The redskins were so good at concealing themselves behind trees that it +was difficult to injure them, and they did considerable damage.</p> + +<p>That night the patriot force went into camp on the top of a knoll and +made its position as strong as possible. Double the usual number of +sentinels were stationed, and it would not be possible for the British +to take them by surprise.</p> + +<p>The British did not make an attack that night, however, but instead +encircled the encampment of the patriots, and when morning came, the +patriots found that they could not proceed, unless they fought their way +through the British lines.</p> + +<p>What to do was the question. If they remained, they would probably +sooner or later be captured, as the British force was more than twice as +strong as their own, and to try to break through the enemy’s lines would +be to cause the loss of many patriot lives.</p> + +<p>It was decided, at a council, to remain on the knoll and hold the +British in check as long as possible.</p> + +<p>“If we can get word to General Sumpter, he will come to our assistance,” +said General Greene, and he summoned Dick Dare and asked him if he were +willing to make the attempt to slip through the British lines, after +nightfall, that evening, and carry a message to General Sumpter.</p> + +<p>As the readers of the Dare Boys stories know, and as they will see by +reading the next volume, entitled, “The Dare Boys With La Fayette,” Dick +Dare was always ready to attempt any feat, no matter how dangerous, if +it would benefit the patriot cause, so now he said promptly that he +would make the attempt.</p> + +<p>The British did not make a strong attack, that day, but contented +themselves with firing at the patriots whenever they caught sight of +one. The patriots returned the fire, and thus the day passed, and +evening came.</p> + +<p>And as soon as it was dark, Dick Dare started on his perilous +expedition, and worked his way slowly and cautiously through the British +lines. He had selected the weakest point of the line for his attempt, +and he succeeded in getting through, though he was discovered by a +sentinel as he was hastening away, and was fired at. He ran swiftly, +however, and although he was pursued, he managed to escape in the +darkness.</p> + +<p>He had received instructions as to the whereabouts of Sumpter, from the +man that had brought the news of the coming of the British force, and so +he did not have a great deal of difficulty in finding Sumpter.</p> + +<p>When Dick told Sumpter that the patriot force under General Greene was +surrounded by a superior force of British and that he needed assistance, +Sumpter said that he would go to the assistance of the patriot party at +once.</p> + +<p>He set out, with his force, consisting of about five hundred men, and +reached the vicinity of the encampment of the patriot force about the +middle of the afternoon of the next day.</p> + +<p>He advanced and attacked the British with great energy, and they, taken +by surprise, were thrown into great disorder. Then the patriot force on +the knoll charged out upon the British, and added to the confusion, and +for a while there raged about as fierce a battle as one would expect to +see.</p> + +<p>The British tried to rally and hold their ground, but could not do so, +and finally they broke and fled at the top of their speed, pursued by +the patriots, who were glad to turn the tables on the British.</p> + +<p>The British continued on in the direction of Fort Ninety-Six, and it +seemed evident that they did not intend to linger in the vicinity of the +patriots, now that they had a strong force.</p> + +<p>Generals Greene and Sumpter held a council, and after considerable +discussion, decided not to follow the enemy and try to capture Fort +Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>Instead they joined forces and went to another part of South Carolina, +where the redcoats and Indians were causing the patriot settlers a lot +of trouble, and made it so hot for the British and Tories and Indians +that they were glad to cease operations and head in the direction of +Fort Ninety-Six.</p> + +<p>The patriots were well satisfied with their work. They had stopped most +of the work of plundering by redcoats, Tories and Indians, and were +ready to start to make it lively for other gangs of Tories and Indians, +in other parts of the country.</p> + +<p>Dick and Tom Dare, and Ben Foster, having gotten through the campaign +without being wounded, were well pleased with their part in the +campaign, and were eager for further adventures.</p> + +<p>“I like the excitement of battling with the British,” said Tom, as they +sat in camp, at evening, and talked of the exciting adventures they had +gone through in the past few weeks. “I hope we will soon get started on +another series of adventures just as exciting.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t like fighting for the sake of the excitement of the fight,” +said Dick; “but I am always glad to be fighting when it is to be for the +benefit and good of the patriot Cause.”</p> + +<p>“That is the way I look at the matter,” said Ben. “I shall be glad when +the war ends, so far as I am concerned.”</p> + +<p>“And so shall I,” said Dick.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ it’s mesilf thot loikes foightin’ as well as the nixt wan,” +said Tim Murphy. “But Oi’ll be willin’ to settle down an’ take it aisy +whin the war is over.”</p> + +<p>“Yah, und dot is der vay I loog at id,” said Fritz Schmockenburg.</p> + +<p>“Well, there will likely be a lot of fighting yet, before the war is +ended,” said Tom.</p> + +<p>“There will be considerable fighting in the next few months, likely,” +said Dick.</p> + +<p>And he was right. The war did not end till more than a year later, when +the British were defeated at Yorktown.</p> + +<div class='nf-center-c'> + <div class='nf-center'> + THE END + </div> +</div> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Dare Boys with General Greene, by +Stephen Angus Cox + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE *** + +***** This file should be named 44631-h.htm or 44631-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/6/3/44631/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + + </body> + <!-- created with fpnh.py 1.00 on 2014-01-09 00:59:06 GMT --> +</html> diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..46d5482 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-039.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/illus-039.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..be2780d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-039.jpg diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-039f.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/illus-039f.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9574f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-039f.jpg diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-171.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/illus-171.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..01ef189 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-171.jpg diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-171f.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/illus-171f.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1b1cb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-171f.jpg diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-emb.png b/old/44631-h/images/illus-emb.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..13abeb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-emb.png diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c982598 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg diff --git a/old/44631-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg b/old/44631-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3a7ee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg diff --git a/old/44631.txt b/old/44631.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..60d8826 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4750 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Dare Boys with General Greene, by Stephen Angus Cox + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Dare Boys with General Greene + +Author: Stephen Angus Cox + +Illustrator: Rudolf Mencl + +Release Date: January 9, 2014 [EBook #44631] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + +[Illustration: Dick was taken by surprise.] + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + The Dare Boys + with + General Greene + + BY + STEPHEN ANGUS COX + + Illustrations by Rudolf Mencl + + NEW YORK + A. L. CHATTERTON CO. + PUBLISHERS + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + THE DARE BOYS + + Stephen Angus Cox, the author of the Dare Boys Series is + specially equipped through long study and research to write upon + the life and adventures of these two daring sons of the + revolutionary period. Every item of historical reference is + absolutely correct. The trials and inherent bravery of the + sturdy warriors of this epoch are always subjects worth while, + but here the dash and bravery of the two Dare boys adds + immeasurably to the interest. + + THE DARE BOYS OF 1776 + THE DARE BOYS ON THE HUDSON + THE DARE BOYS IN TRENTON + THE DARE BOYS ON THE BRANDYWINE + THE DARE BOYS IN THE RED CITY + THE DARE BOYS AFTER BENEDICT ARNOLD + THE DARE BOYS IN VIRGINIA + THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE + THE DARE BOYS WITH LAFAYETTE + THE DARE BOYS AND THE "SWAMP FOX" + + Illustrated, Cloth 12mo. Price per volume 50 cents. + + Copyright, 1910 + BY + The A. L. Chatterton Co. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + CONTENTS + + I. The Dare Boys and the Indians 9 + II. Peaceful Valley 18 + III. Riding the Flood 26 + IV. Dick and the Indians 34 + V. Gabe Gurley 42 + VI. In the Cabin 50 + VII. Tom Tries Woodcraft 57 + VIII. A Battle with a Wolf 63 + IX. In Search of Tom 70 + X. At Fort Ninety-Six 78 + XI. At the Stake 84 + XII. Fritz and the Indians 90 + XIII. Tom and the Redcoats 96 + XIV. Friends in Need 105 + XV. Preparing for Trouble 111 + XVI. The Search for Dick 121 + XVII. Ben Reconnoiters 129 + XVIII. Dick and the Panther 137 + XIX. The Settlers' Retreat 143 + XX. Dick Appears 151 + XXI. In the Fort 157 + XXII. Tom Makes a Discovery 164 + XXIII. The Siege 175 + XXIV. Lively Work 182 + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE + + + CHAPTER I + + The Dare Boys and the Indians + + +Three youths of perhaps twenty years of age were making their way +through the forest. The locality was about fifty miles from Ninety-Six, +in South Carolina, and Ninety-Six was so called because it was +approximately that number of miles from Fort Price George. This was the +nearest fort of any size. + +The three youths were no others than Dick and Tom Dare, and their +comrade, Ben Foster, who had been members of the patriot army of America +for a considerable period--for it was now May of the year 1781. + +These youths, who had done brave fighting, were also famous for having +done much good work as scouts, messengers and spies, and they were now +on a scouting and spying expedition, ordered by General Greene, their +company having been sent down from Virginia into South Carolina to help +General Greene. The objective point was Ninety-Six, but there had been +lots of fighting to do with parties of British and Tories, and the +advance southward had been slow. Hearing that the Cherokee Indians were +on the warpath, having been incited thereto by the British, and that +they were committing a good many depredations and killing patriot +settlers, were burning and pillaging, General Greene had sent the youths +to learn the actual facts, for, if the Indians were committing as great +a havoc as had been stated, he would push on down into that region as +quickly as he could move his forces, and try to put a stop to their +depredations. + +So here the youths were, and they were moving slowly and cautiously; +indeed a settler that they had met a few miles back had told them that +the Cherokees were in this vicinity, and had advised the youths to be +very careful or they would be interfered with. + +They came to the top of a knoll, and pausing, looked ahead with keen and +searching gaze. At first they saw nothing noteworthy, but presently, +Dick uttered a low exclamation indicating interest and indicating with +his extended arm, said: "I believe I saw an Indian over there!" + +"Where?" asked Tom, eagerly. + +Dick pointed in the direction in which he thought he had seen the +Indian, and the three youths all gazed eagerly. For a few moments they +did not make out any sign of a living being, but suddenly out from +behind a tree about a hundred yards distant appeared a bronzed face. The +head was covered with thick, straight hair, and topped, it was seen, +with eagle feathers. + +"There he is!" exclaimed Tom, excitedly, but in a low voice. + +"Sh," cautioned Dick. They stood perfectly still, and hoped that because +of the fact that they were pretty well hidden behind the underbrush upon +the top of the knoll, they would not be observed. They did not know how +keen-eyed a Cherokee Indian was, however, for suddenly a loud, thrilling +war-whoop escaped the lips of the redskin, and then from several +different directions the whoop was answered. + +"He's calling his companions!" exclaimed Ben. "We are in danger of +capture, Dick!" + +"Yes, I guess we had better get away from here." In a moment he added, +"Follow me, boys." + +Then Dick turned and started swiftly down the slope, Tom and Ben keeping +close at his heels, and from behind them came the wild, thrilling +war-whoops of the redskins. + +"They're surely after us!" exclaimed Tom. + +"Yes. We'll have to make good time if we get away from them," said Dick. +"They may be spread out, I should judge so from their calls, and it may +take them some time to get together." + +The patriot youths ran rapidly and glancing back over his shoulder, Dick +saw that at least one of the redskins was coming after them as fast as +he could travel. The brave patriot youth realized that they were going +to have a much harder time shaking these Indians off their trail than +they usually had with the redcoats. The British soldiers were rather +clumsy and slow, but these redskins were lithe as panthers, and as +speedy, almost, and could continue running for hours. + +"Do your best, boys," he told his companions. "For I believe that they +are gaining on us." + +"Run as fast as you can, Dick," panted Tom; "we'll keep up with you." + +"We'll try, at any rate," said Ben. + +On they dashed, and after them, whooping in a manner that would have +filled the hearts of less brave youths with terror, came the Indians. +Doubtless the red fiends thought they would easily surround the +fugitives, and make escape impossible. Presently Dick and his party came +to a deep gulch or ravine. The wall on their side was nearly +perpendicular, and they could not descend it. Here was a predicament +indeed. They paused, irresolute, and looked to the right and to the +left, only to see that the wall of the gulch was as steep everywhere +within sight. They could see for quite a distance too in either +direction, as the point where they were standing rather projected out +toward the other side. + +The yelling of redskins determined the fact that they were within a few +hundred yards and swiftly cutting down the distance. And, too, they were +spreading out, fan-shape, with the evident intention of hemming the +youths in and preventing them from going up or down the edge of the +gulch. Of course they knew full well the contour of the land and thought +they had their intended prey, as it were, in a trap. + +"There doesn't seem to be any escape for us, Dick," said Ben. + +"Gracious," cried Tom. "Look at that black cloud to the north." It had +not attracted their attention before, but now they saw that a terrible +storm was impending. + +Dick looked eagerly around, and suddenly he pointed to a very tall, +slender tree, of some growth he did not recognize, that stood close to +the edge of the precipice. The rains had washed out the earth from about +the roots and the tree was inclined at an angle well out over the +ravine. + +"Quick!" he cried. "Let's climb that tree and swing over the precipice. +It will bend and will let us down I think to within twelve or fifteen +feet of the bottom of the gulch." + +"That's an idea worth trying," cried Tom, and he was first to tackle the +task and was quickly followed by Dick and Ben. + +The three occasionally assisting one another made rapid progress and +Dick meantime further explained his project. Their united weight would +bend down the long slender trunk and at his command all were to drop at +once into the depth beneath. Where would they land? There was not time +to think. + +While the Indians were yet at some distance, the youths found that their +weight was effectively bending down the tree into the ravine. The change +was gradual at first, and then the more slender wood gave quicker +response to the strain, so that finally it bent so low into the depths +below that the boys instead of climbing up were sliding down toward the +tree top. Before the Indians reached a point where they could observe +the boys they had disappeared below the level of the ground which marked +the margin of the declivity. + +Down, farther and farther went the patriot youths, and as the redskins +came upon the scene they saw their intended victims slipping out of +their hands in a most peculiar manner. They gave expression to their +chagrin in yells of rage, brandished their tomahawks, and threatened to +discharge arrows, but did neither. It seemed evident, from this, that +they wished to capture the youths alive. Doubtless they knew the three +were newcomers in that region, and wished to find out why they were +there. Possibly they were working in co-operation with the British and +had been instructed to capture any strangers seen and bring them to the +officer in command. + +Anyhow, they did not discharge any arrows or throw any tomahawks, which +probably saved the youths' lives, for the Indians, being expert in the +use of those weapons, could hardly have missed at so short a range. + +Down lower and lower swung the three youths, and presently they came to +a point beyond which Dick deemed it not prudent to test the strength of +the wood. They were now within perhaps nine or ten feet of the bottom of +the gulch. "When I count three, let go and drop, boys," ordered Dick. +"The fall won't hurt us," he added encouragingly. + +One. + +Two. + +Three. + +The boys let go at the same moment and down they dropped, striking on +the rocks of the gulch-bottom with considerable force, and dropping to +their hands and knees, but they were not injured, excepting that they +were jarred somewhat. + +Then the Indians repeated their wild yells, and two of them began +climbing the same tree, it having sprung back to its original, more +nearly perpendicular, position. It was evidently the intention of the +redskins to duplicate the feat of the youths. + +"Quick, let's run down the gulch, till we come to a place where we can +climb the wall," ordered Dick. + +"Look!" suddenly yelled Tom, pointing up the gulch in the direction they +had before noticed the cloud denoting an impending storm. + +Dick and Ben looked, and saw a wondrous sight, a wall of foaming water +coming rushing down the gulch toward them at terrible speed. + +"There has been a cloud-burst up the gulch!" exclaimed Dick in dismay. +"We will be swept away in that torrent!" + +There was no time to say much, let alone do anything, for the torrent +was sweeping toward them with the speed of the wind, and as it advanced, +it roared like thunder. The youths now saw that there were logs in the +advancing waters, swirling and pounding, and grinding against one +another. + +The Indians that had started to climb the tree had slid back down to the +earth, and all stood at the edge of the precipice, staring down upon the +youths, whom they doubtless believed to be doomed. + +And there was reason for their thinking thus, for there was terrible +force in the volume of water sweeping irresistibly upon them. + + + + + CHAPTER II + + Peaceful Valley + + +In a beautiful little valley of some three miles in length by perhaps a +little less width, several farmers were at work. They were plowing up +the ground and getting ready to plant a crop. + +Over at one side was a little group of log houses, ten in number, these +being the homes of the families living in Peaceful Valley. The settlers +had built the houses near together, for protection against the Indians. +And in the center of the settlement was a very strong log building, +surrounded by a thick stockade wall, with a strong gate, and the +building in question was intended as a sort of fort, to retreat to, in +case of an overwhelming attack by Indians. In the building there was +kept constantly a goodly supply of provisions, so that it would have +been possible to stand quite a siege. + +When we introduce the scene to the reader's notice, the farmers were +working steadily, and quietly, and while they were on the alert, as was +their custom, they were not expecting trouble, for they had not heard of +any Indians being in their immediate vicinity, though there had been +depredations fifteen or twenty miles farther south. + +But suddenly a party of Indians numbering thirty or forty put in an +appearance and made an attack on the settlers, who seized their +rifles--which they always took to the field with them--and firing at the +redskins a few times, they ran to the settlement as fast as possible, +the Indians following, yelling in a blood-thirsty manner. + +The women and children at the houses had seen what was going on, and had +hastened to the fort, carrying such of their household goods as they +could manage handily, and they held the gate open for the men to enter. +Then, when all were within, the gate was closed quickly, and fastened. +The women and younger children entered the building, while the men +climbed to a platform that was built along the stockade-wall, on the +inside, and perhaps five feet from the top of the wall. From here they +could fire over the top of the wall, at the redskins, and then drop down +to avoid the arrows of the Indians. + +The redskins, finding that to attempt to break down the gate, or to +scale the wall would be to lose a number of their braves, turned their +attention to the houses, and began helping themselves to the contents. +When they had taken everything that they cared for, they set the houses +on fire, and the settlers were forced to stand there and see their homes +go up in flames. + +"The fiends!" growled James Holden, the leader of the colony. "Why +couldn't they have let the houses stand? They got most of our goods. +They might have been satisfied with that." + +"They'll stay till after dark and try to get in here at us, likely," +said Henry Perkins. "I know these Cherokee Injuns. They are mean when +they get their mad up, and these seem to be very much in earnest." + +"Yes," said Holden. "We wounded several of them when they were chasing +us into the settlement. This naturally aroused their anger." + +"It was bad enough to have to live in a neighborhood where there are a +good many Tories, without having to be bothered with the Injuns too," +said another of the settlers. + +"The redcoats have put them up to going on the war-path," said Perkins. +"It was a mean trick to do, to get them started." + +"You're right," agreed Holden, "but look at that terribly black cloud +over to the north. There is going to be a storm and that right quick or +I miss my guess." + +The Indians, having finished setting fire to all the houses, retired to +a little distance, squatted down on the ground, and watched the +structures burning. + +Then, when the buildings had burned down, the redskins began dividing +the plunder they had secured from the houses, and when this was +finished, they advanced as close to the fort as they dared. Here they +stopped and held a council, of some sort, evidently trying to decide +upon some plan for getting into the fort and at the settlers. + +They talked and gesticulated at a great rate, and were apparently not +agreed, or at a loss to determine upon any further procedure. + +"I don't think there is much danger of their making an attack during +daylight," said Holden, when they had watched the redskins a while. + +"No, but they'll try to get into the stockade to-night, without any +doubt," said Perkins. "Unless," he added "that storm drives them away. +Somehow the Indians don't seem to notice its coming at all." + +"They are lower down in the gulch and perhaps do not see about as well +as we do up here," said another. + +The other men all thought the same, but while they did not expect an +attack before nightfall, yet they did not relax their vigilance. They +kept their eyes on the enemy. + +"I wish that General Greene would come down this way, with his army," +said another of the settlers. + +"Mebby he will come down here," said another. "I heerd that he is up in +North Caroliny." + +"There are going to be terrible times around in the neighborhood of +Ninety-Six, pretty soon, I think," said Holden. "And it would be a good +thing if General Greene came here." + +"He'd put a stop to the Injuns' doin's, mighty quick," said another. + +The others agreed that General Greene's army would be able to put a stop +to the depredations of the Indians, and then make it exceedingly hot as +well for the redcoats in Ninety-Six and vicinity. + +Then they ceased talking for a few minutes, while they watched the +redskins, who had taken seats on the ground, with their faces toward the +fort. They were about three hundred yards distant, and behind them, at +about the same distance, was rough, broken country, with a deep gulch +running through it, the mouth of the gulch being almost opposite the +Indians' backs. + +Suddenly, one of the settlers, who happened to glance toward the mouth +of the gulch, exclaimed, excitedly: "Look yonder! Look at the mouth of +the gulch!" + +The others turned their eyes in that direction, and saw a sight that +made them all give vent to exclamations of astonishment. They saw, +indeed, an avalanche of water at least ten feet in height coming +sweeping down the gulch, foaming and, as it neared the end of the gulch, +roaring at a great rate. + +The Indians heard the sound, and leaped to their feet and turned, and +when they saw the wall of water rushing toward the mouth of the gulch, +they gave utterance to wild yells and started to run, to get out of the +path of the flood. + +They could not succeed, however, for the torrent came pouring out of the +mouth of the gulch and dashing on across the level, spreading as it +came, and before they could get out of reach, the water was upon them, +and had them in its swirling embrace. + +Some of them were struck by the logs and knocked senseless, and two or +three were drowned. Others were swept onward and landed against the +stockade-wall around the fort, while others still were carried past and +went on across the valley, with the waters. + +The settlers and the women and children, had watched this strange +happening with wondering eyes, and with a kind of pleasure, too, for it +had put an end to a problem that had been bothering them, had put the +Indians to utter rout, at least for the time being. + +"There must have been a cloud-burst up the gulch," said one of the men. + +"Yes, that was what happened," said Holden. "Well, it was a good thing +for us, for it has put the redskins to flight." + +"It has put some of them to death," said Perkins. "I see three bodies, +yonder." + +"They were hit by the logs, and then drowned afterwards," said another. + +"Yas. Well, it saved us the trouble of shooting them." + +"So it did," said Holden. + +"But, our houses are burned down!" murmured one of the women. "They have +burned our homes, and the flood has spoiled the ground that had been +fixed for planting." + +"Oh, well, we can do the work over again," said Perkins. "And we can +build new houses." + +"Yes, that's so," said Holden. "I'm mighty glad the flood happened along +and drowned a few of the redskins and scared the others away." + +By the middle of the afternoon the ground was dry again, the sun having +come out and shone brightly, and the settlers went out and buried the +three dead Indians. Then they returned to the fort, and when nightfall +came, they placed two men on guard, for they thought it possible that +the Indians might come back again. + + + + + CHAPTER III + + Riding the Flood + + +When the flood of foaming, seething water swept over Dick, Tom and Ben +and engulfed them, they thought at first that their time had come; but +Dick shouted; "Grab hold of a log and stick to it if possible." Each +managed so to do and by holding to the logs tightly, they were born +along with the rushing flood. They swallowed a good deal of water but +escaped being drowned. As the boys disappeared beneath the onrush of the +torrent, the Indians standing on the edge of the precipice, gazed down +with a look of awe on their bronzed faces. + +Onward down the gulch the boys were carried, however, with great speed, +and when they had gone what seemed like two or three miles from the +point where they had been overtaken by the flood, they came to a point +where the gulch split, becoming two gulches, one going off at right +angles while the other turned slightly to the left. As the one leading +to the right was wider, had lower banks and the water was not swirling +at such a terrible rate, the three youths were able to guide the logs +into the gulch on that side, and were soon being borne onward at a more +moderate pace. + +Onward they were swept, until finally they suddenly shot out from the +mouth of the gulch and found themselves in a good-sized river. + +They let go now their holds on the logs, swam to the shore and clambered +out upon the bank, which was low and sloping, and dropping down on the +sand, they lay there, panting and resting. + +"Well, didn't that beat any experience that we have ever had since we +joined the patriot army?" cried Tom, presently, when he had become +rested and was breathing normally again. + +"It wasn't a very pleasing experience," said Dick. + +"I should say not," remarked Ben. + +"That torrent certainly carried us away from the vicinity of the +redskins very quickly," said Tom. + +"Yes, it did that much good, anyhow," agreed Dick. + +"I wonder where we are," said Ben, presently. + +"In the land of the living," replied Tom, with a laugh. "And that is +more than I expected would be the case, an hour ago, when that torrent +struck us." + +The youths now doffed their outer garments, wrung them out and spread +them out to dry. By the time they were ready to wear, they themselves +were rested, and putting the clothing on again, they set out through the +forest, heading in a direction that would take them to about the same +point they were aiming for before they ran into the Indians. + +Till evening they tramped along, and they were beginning to think they +would have to sleep out in the woods, when they caught sight of a light +ahead of them. The next moment they emerged into open country, and made +their way toward the light. + +Presently they came to what looked like a fort, as seen in the +starlight, and they made out that there was a high stockade-wall around +the building. + +"Well, I'm glad we've found some place to stay for the night, anyhow," +suggested Tom. + +"Who comes there?" cried a voice, from above their heads. + +"Friends," replied Dick. He did not know that the inmates of the fort +were friends, but he thought it likely they were patriots, and hoped +that such was the case. + +"How many are there of you?" was the next question. + +"Three." + +"Who are you? You are not British, and of course not Indians?" + +"No, we are strangers, who were caught in the torrent from the +cloud-burst and have had a terrible time. Will you kindly let us in?" + +There was the sound of low conversation, and then the voice spoke up +again: + +"Yes, we'll let you in." + +Then a few moments later they heard the squeaking of the gate as it was +opened and they hastened around there and entered the stockade. + +The man that had admitted them, Mr. Holden, fastened the gate and then +said: "Come with me." + +He led the way into the fort, where the youths found themselves the +center of interest. The men, women and children of the families of the +settlers looked at the youths wonderingly and inquiringly. + +"You are strangers, sure enough," said Mr. Holden. + +"Yes," said Dick. "Are you folks patriots?" + +Holden nodded. "We are," he said. + +"Good. I'm glad of that. We are patriots also, and members of the army +of General Greene, who is about one hundred miles north of here." + +"Ah, we are glad to hear that," said Holden. "I wish that General Greene +would come down here and give the Indians a thrashing." + +"That is what he is figuring on doing if there is need," said Dick. + +"He sent us to do some scouting and reconnoitering," put in Tom. "He had +heard that there were lots of Indians down here, and that they were +murdering patriots and burning their homes, and if we learned that this +was the case, he would come down here and put a stop to their work." + +"Well, you can return to him and tell him that his presence in this part +of the country is sorely needed. The Indians are pillaging and burning +homes, and they have committed a number of murders. They attacked us, +here in Peaceful Valley, this afternoon, and drove us to the shelter of +this fort and then burned our houses." + +"That was bad," said Dick. + +"Yes, but they were overtaken by the flood, while they were sitting on +the ground, about halfway between here and the mouth of the gulch, and +three of them were struck by logs and knocked senseless, and were +drowned." + +"That was good," said Tom, his eyes shining. + +"We were in the flood, too, as we told you before you let us in," said +Dick. "We were chased by Indians, and were trying to escape. We swung +down on the end of a tall tree, and dropped into the gulch, then +suddenly a torrent came rushing down upon us and bore us a considerable +distance before emptying into a river several miles from here. We swam +ashore, dried our clothes and then came here." + +"You were fortunate, in that you were not hit by any of the logs," said +Mr. Perkins. + +"Yes, so we were," said Dick. "We grabbed hold of logs, and kept from +being swept underneath the water and drowned." + +There was some further talk, and then the youths were given something to +eat, after which all settled down to take matters as easy as possible. +The settlers rather expected an attack, but were prepared to offer +battle, and did not doubt but what they could drive the redskins away, +unless they came in much stronger force than when they made the attack +in the afternoon. + +Dick asked the settlers many questions, and gained a good knowledge of +the situation in that part of the country. He learned that Ninety-Six +was garrisoned by about five hundred British and Tory soldiers, and that +they were inciting the Indians to attack the patriot settlers, and when +he had gathered all the information possible, Dick said that he would +take his leave about midnight and start northward to carry the report to +General Greene. + +"Hadn't you better let me take the news to General Greene, Dick?" said +Ben. "You might be able to do good work here, scouting and spying on the +Indians, redcoats and Tories." + +"No, I guess I will take the news to the general," said Dick. "It is +going to be exceedingly dangerous getting back through the lines of the +Indians, and I have had more experience in woodcraft than you have, and +think I can slip through with greater ease and safety than you could." + +"I'll go, Dick," said Tom. "I can slip through the Indians' lines, all +right." + +"No, you and Ben stay here," said Dick. "I'll take the news to General +Greene, and we'll be back here pretty quick, with the army, and then the +redskins, redcoats and Tories will have to look out." + +"Good!" said Mr. Holden. "The quicker the soldiers get here, the better +it will be for the patriots in this part of the country." + +Shortly after midnight Dick said good-by to Tom, Ben and the settlers, +and passing out of the stockade he stole away in the darkness. + + + + + CHAPTER IV + + Dick and the Indians + + +Dick Dare had not gone twenty yards before he became convinced that +there were Indians in the vicinity. At once he realized that he would +have to be very careful, or he would be unable to get through the lines +without being captured. He had been successful, always, in getting +through the lines of British sentinels, but these redskins were a +different proposition. They were perfectly at home in this region, and, +too, they were used to being about at night. They possessed the ability +to know what was going on around them, even in the darkness, they +seemingly having the catlike faculty of seeing in the dark. + +But the knowledge that he was going to have a hard time getting past the +Indians only made Dick the more determined to do so. He was eager to +prove that he was a good scout and spy, and if he could get through the +Indians' lines without being discovered or captured, then he would have +done something to be proud of. + +So he settled down and began advancing very slowly and cautiously. He +would advance a few feet and then stop and lie flat on the ground, and +listen intently. Several times, while lying thus, silent and motionless, +he heard sounds in various directions that he knew were not made by wild +animals of the forest, but were made by Indians, without doubt. + +He heard the calls of night birds, which, so his keen and well trained +ear told him, were not made by birds, but were simply good imitations, +made by the redskins. Dick could imitate the majority of the birds of +the forest, in their calls to one another, himself, and so was able to +determine that these calls were not genuine. + +And this made him exercise the greatest possible care. He could tell, by +the various directions the sounds came from, that the fort was +surrounded, and he did not doubt but what an attack was contemplated. He +would have gone back into the fort and told them what he had learned, +had he deemed it necessary; but he knew that sentinels were posted, and +that the redskins could not spring a surprise on the settlers, so he +felt that it would do no good to take this trouble. It was more +important that he get through the lines and then hasten to reach General +Greene with the news that he was needed down in that part of the +country. + +Presently he discovered, by hearing a call close at hand, that at least +one Indian was almost in front of him. He paused and lay silent and +motionless for a few moments, and then he began moving around, in a +semi-circle. + +Cautiously he proceeded, and his every nerve was tense and ready for +instant action, in case his presence was discovered and he was attacked. +He had gone perhaps twenty yards, and was about opposite the point where +he had heard the sound that indicated the presence of the Indian, when +he heard a slight rustling, as of a body moving toward him, through the +grass. He listened, and became convinced that an Indian was approaching +him, and he guessed that the redskin had heard him. + +Dick lay still, his mind working swiftly. What should he do? Should he +wait and engage the redskin in a combat, or should he leap up and take +refuge in flight? + +It was a difficult question to answer, and as he was turning the matter +over in his mind, he heard the rustling coming closer and closer. He +must act quickly, or the Indian would be upon him. + +He suddenly decided that the best thing for him to do was to take refuge +in flight. True, he realized he might run right into the arms of the +Indians, but on the other hand, if he remained where he was, and was +attacked by the redskin, the sound of the combat would bring a score of +Indians to the spot quickly, and he would be captured. + +Having made up his mind, Dick acted. Leaping to his feet, he dashed away +at the top of his speed, and instantly he heard the sound of pursuit and +knew that the Indian he had heard slipping up on him had given chase. + +On the youth ran, and suddenly a peculiar, quavering cry went up from +his pursuer's lips. It was evidently a signal telling his brother braves +that a man from the fort was among them, and for them to try to capture +him. Realizing this, Dick was on the alert, and expected every moment to +feel himself seized by the hands of the redskins. + +He had reached the heavy woods, however, before he became aware of the +near presence of any redskins, and then he thought he heard several +right in front of him. + +Whirling, he ran toward the left, at the top of his speed, and then +began such a game of hide and seek as Dick had never engaged in before. +His quick ears would tell him when there were Indians in front of him, +and he would turn in some other direction, with the result that in going +a distance of two or three hundred yards, he must have gone at least a +mile. + +Two or three times he had felt hands clutching him, but he had managed +to tear himself loose, and finally he was enabled to continue his flight +straight ahead, not hearing any sounds to indicate the presence of +redskins in front of him. + +Behind him he heard the sounds of pattering feet, however, and the +guttural exclamations of the redskins, and knew he was being pursued. He +felt that now that he had succeeded in getting through their lines +without being captured he could escape, however, and did not feel very +much alarmed. + +[Illustration: "So ye think ye're safe, do ye, hey?"] + +Dick was an exceedingly swift runner, and it was to this that he owed +his success, so far, and to this fact he finally owed his good fortune +in getting away from his pursuers, for he gradually drew away from the +Indians, and when they had followed him a mile or so, they gave up the +pursuit and turned back. Doubtless they decided that it was of more +importance to be ready to attack the fort when the time came than to +keep on in pursuit of a fugitive that could run like the one they had +been after. + +And when he was certain that the redskins had ceased pursuing him, Dick +slackened his speed to a walk, went onward at a moderate pace, and +presently paused and stood listening intently. + +He did not hear a sound in the direction from which he had come, and he +drew a breath of relief, and murmured aloud: "They have given up the +chase and gone back. That is good. Now I am safe, and will take it a +little easier." + +"So ye think ye're safe, do ye, hey?" exclaimed a voice almost in Dick's +ear, and then he felt a pair of exceedingly strong arms encircle his +body, pinioning his arms to his side. He struggled fiercely, but could +not break the hold of the person who had seized him. + +"Oh, thar ain't no use tryin' to git loose," chuckled a gruff voice. +"I've got ye, an' ye kain't git erway." + + + + + CHAPTER V + + Gabe Gurley + + +About two hours after Dick Dare left the fort, the Indians made the +attack. They tried to take the settlers by surprise, by slipping up to +the fort, but were discovered and fired upon, and then they uttered wild +yells and made a desperate attack. + +The settlers made a strong and determined defense, firing as fast as +they could reload their rifles, and the calls of the redskins were +varied by yells and shrieks of pain, proving that some of the bullets +found lodgment in the bodies of the redskins. + +Then, suddenly a cry went up from the settlers, for they saw that the +stockade-wall was on fire. The Indians had not been able to break the +wall down, or to scale it, so they had set fire to it. + +There was a well inside the enclosure, however, and the settlers began +carrying water and pouring it down on the fire, from the platform on the +inside of the fence, and two or three of the settlers were wounded by +arrows while engaged in this work, but they finally succeeded in putting +the fire out. + +The Indians, disappointed, repeated their war-whoops and yells +betokening anger. Then they withdrew, having given up the attack, at +least for the present. But that they had given up the matter permanently +was not likely. + +The settlers were glad of the cessation of hostilities, however, and it +afforded them an opportunity for reloading their rifles, and, for needed +rest, a watch was set so as to be ready for another attack, if it was +made. + +Morning came at last, however, without a renewal of the onslaught, and +the settlers took a look around. They saw that the fort was surrounded +by at least a hundred redskins, and they realized that the Indians +intended to stay till they captured the fort. + +"They will put in the day planning, and to-night they'll attack us +again," said Mr. Holden, after looking at the Indians a while. + +"Yes, that'll be their game," said Mr. Perkins. + +"But they can't capture the fort, can they?" asked Tom Dare, who was +standing on the platform, beside the two men, taking a look at the +Indians. + +"I don't think they could capture the fort," said Perkins, "but likely +they'll lay siege to it and try to make us surrender, arter our grub +gives out." + +"But you have enough to last quite a while, haven't you?" + +"Two or three days, I guess." + +"Well, Dick will be back with General Greene and his army in four or +five days, I think." + +"Maybe we can hold out till then," said Mr. Perkins. + +"I think we can," said Holden. + +"We can fight them off, I feel certain," said another of the settlers. +"So all we will have to do will be to go easy on the rations till +General Greene gets here." + +"Yes, that is what we'll do," said Perkins. + +Tom and Ben were greatly interested. This was the first time they had +ever had anything to do with fighting Indians, and they were glad that +they had come down into this region of the Cherokees, for there was a +peculiar glamour to this kind of warfare that did not attach to fighting +against the redcoats. + +"Dick will miss most of the fighting by going on the trip," said Tom. + +"Yes, but there will be plenty of Indian fighting after he gets back," +said Ben. + +"Yes, likely. And it will be a great relief to the people of this part +of the country when the patriot soldiers get down here and get after the +redskins." + +"Yes, so it will." + +About the middle of the afternoon there was seen to be considerable stir +among the Indians to the northward, near the edge of the forest, and Mr. +Holden, who, with Perkins and two or three others of the settlers, and +Tom and Ben, were standing on the platform, watching, said: + +"Look. There's that renegade-Tory, Gabe Gurley." + +Sure enough, a white man was seen standing among the redskins, and it +could be seen that he was an exceedingly large man, a giant in size, in +fact. He was talking to the Indians, and gesticulating, and they were +listening with evident interest. + +"What a big fellow he is!" exclaimed Tom. + +"And a big scoundrel," said Perkins. + +"Yes, he's worse'n the redskins," said another of the settlers. + +"I don't like to see him there among the redskins," said Mr. Holden, a +sober look on his face. "He may put them up to some scheme to enable +them to capture the fort before General Greene and his army can get +here." + +"We'll have to be on our guard, sure enough," said Perkins. + +"I hope Dick didn't meet him," exclaimed Tom, + +"It isn't likely that he did," said Ben. + +Presently the renegade, Gabe Gurley, ceased talking to the Indians and +came striding toward the fort, holding up his hand, with the palm toward +the settlers. + +"He wants to talk to us," said Perkins. + +"Yes," said Holden. "I s'pose we might as well hear what he has to say." + +"Yes." + +Gurley advanced till within about fifty feet of the stockade-wall, and +then stopped. "How are ye, Holden? How are ye, Perkins?" he called out. + +"What do you want, Gabe Gurley?" asked Holden, rather gruffly. + +"I've come to ask ye to surrender," was the reply. + +"Then you are wasting your time, Gurley." + +"Ye mean thet ye won't surrender?" + +"Yes." + +"Ye'd better. We can stay here till yer grub gives out, an' then ye'll +have to surrender, an' ye might as well do et now." + +"We have provisions to last us till--" + +Holden hesitated, but Gurley finished: "Till Gin'ral Greene an' his army +gits here, ye was goin' to say, hey?" with a grin. "Well, they won't git +here as soon as ye think, I can tell ye that." + +"Why won't they?" asked Holden. + +"Because I captured ther young feller what ye sent frum here last night, +to bring Greene, an' I've got 'im a pris'ner, an' so he won't carry the +news, as ye expected, an' Greene an' his army won't be here--not for a +good while, anyhow." + +An exclamation escaped the lips of Tom Dare. "You big ruffian!" he +cried. "You say you captured my brother?" + +The giant looked at Tom and grinned. "I don' know whether I captured +your brother or not, but I do know that I captured a young feller what +was on his way to bring Gin'ral Greene here." + +"That was my brother," cried Tom, angrily. "Where is he, now?" + +"Oh, he's where I can put my han's on 'im whenever I want to," was the +reply. + +Tom jerked a pistol out of his belt and leveled it, and would have fired +at the ruffian, had not Mr. Perkins caught him by the arm. "Don' shoot, +my boy," he said. "Gurley's a villain, and needs shootin', but he's +there under a truce, and we must not shoot him." + +"Oh, all right," said Tom. "That's so. I won't shoot him now, but he +made me forget myself when he said he had my brother a prisoner." + +"An' that's another reason for not shooting him, Tom. If you only +wounded him, he'd most likely take revenge on your brother." + +"That's so. I never thought of that. But I'll get even with him for +capturing Dick." + +Gurley had watched this little episode with a slight show of alarm, at +first, but when he saw that the youth was not going to fire, he grinned, +and said: "Lucky ye didn't shoot, youngster." Then to Holden he went on: +"What about it? Are ye goin' to surrender?" + +"No," was the decided reply. + +"Ye'll have to sooner or later, ye know." + +"No, you won't," said Tom, in a low, eager voice. "I'll go out and away +to-night, and will try to find and rescue Dick. But if I can't find him, +I'll go and bring General Greene and his army." + +Holden nodded to Tom, and then replied to Gurley: "We will not +surrender, so you might as well go back to your friends, the redskins, +and tell them so." + +"Oh, all right," growled Gurley. "But, ye'll be sorry ye didn't +surrender, Holden." + +"I don't think so." + +With an angry exclamation, the renegade turned and strode back and +rejoined the Indians, to whom he talked energetically, gesticulating +vigorously the while. + +Then the Indians shook their bows and tomahawks at the settlers and gave +vent to a series of wild, thrilling war-whoops. + + + + + CHAPTER VI + + In the Cabin + + +Dick Dare was unable to break the hold of the man who had seized him. He +struggled fiercely, but as the man was a giant in size, and very strong, +he was thrown upon the ground and was utterly helpless. The man held the +youth without seemingly having to exert himself very greatly. + +"Who are you?" pantingly asked Dick. "And why have you seized me?" + +"My name is Gabe Gurley," was the reply. "I'm a loyalist, an' as I know +ye have been runnin' frum ther Injuns, what are helpin' the British, ye +must be a rebel, an' so I've grabbed ye, an'll hold ye till I fin' out +about ye." + +"You had better let me go," said Dick sternly. "You have no right to +hold me." + +"Wal, I'm goin' to hold ye ennyhow. I'll jest bind yer arms, an' then +ye'll come with me to my cabin." + +The fellow then bound Dick's wrists together, with a piece of rope that +he produced from a pocket, after which he allowed him to rise, then he +took hold of his arm and conducted him through the woods a distance of +nearly a mile, when they reached a rude cabin that stood in the depths +of a thick growth of bushes and timber. + +The fellow lighted a candle, and then Dick saw that his captor was a +ruffian in appearance, a huge giant of a fellow, who looked capable of +murder, if he took a notion. + +"He's a regular desperado," thought Dick. + +The ruffian turned and surveyed his prisoner. "Humph," he grunted +presently. "Ye're a youngster. Who are ye, ennyhow?" + +Dick decided that it would be best to give a fictitious name, so he said +that his name was Dick Fenton, and that he lived about one hundred miles +to the northward and was on his way to visit relatives who lived about +fifty or seventy-five miles farther south. + +"You have made a mistake in making a prisoner of me," he said. "I was +running from the Indians, awhile before you stopped me, true, but +anybody would run from a gang of Indians on the warpath." + +"Yas, thet's so," was the reply. "But I guess I'll hold ye a while, +ennyhow, till I fin' out whether ye are tellin' the truth or not." + +"How long will that be?" asked Dick, with a sinking of the heart, for he +did not like the idea of being delayed from reaching General Greene with +the news that the patriot settlers were needing his help. + +"I don' know. Ye'll stay here till I tell ye ye may go, ennyhow, so ye +might as well make up your mind to thet." + +"I don't see any sense in such a proceeding on your part," said Dick. + +"Uv course ye don'," with a grin. "I wouldn't expect ye to. But I do, +and here ye stay. In the mornin' I'll take a stroll an' see if I can +find out anythin' about ye, an' then we'll see about lettin' ye go." + +He put a bar across the door, and then, pointing to a bunk in one corner +of the room said: "You can sleep there. I'll lay on a blanket on the +floor." + +Dick knew it would do no good to argue with the ruffian, so he got into +the bunk, and lay down, after which Gurley blew out the light and lay +down on a blanket, and was soon snoring. + +Dick did not get to sleep. In fact, he began trying to get his hands +free, for he was eager to make his escape and go on his way to carry the +news to General Greene. + +Gurley had tied his wrists so securely he could not get them free, +however, and finally the youth gave up the attempt, and eventually +slept. + +Next morning Gurley cooked some corn cakes and potatoes for breakfast, +and after he had eaten, he untied Dick's wrists and gave him some of the +food. Then he bound the youth's wrists again, but not so tightly as +before, for the reason that Dick held his wrists in such a manner that +he could move them into a different position and the rope would be +loosened somewhat. + +An hour or so later Gurley said he was going away, and did not know how +long he would be gone. "As I can't fasten the door," he went on, "I will +tie yer feet, an' then ye won't be able to git away while I'm gone." + +He got another piece of rope and bound Dick's ankles, and then took his +departure. + +As soon as he was sure that Gurley was gone, Dick began working at the +rope binding his wrists. If he could get his wrists free, the rope about +his ankles could be quickly loosened. + +He worked hard at the rope binding his wrists, but was unable to make +much headway. The knots were tight, and the rope would not stretch. He +kept at it, however, and was pulling and tugging at a great rate, when +there was a thump against the door, and it flew open and into the room +came a huge timber wolf. + +At sight of the animal, Dick's heart sank, and a feeling akin to fear +took hold upon him. It was not pleasant to be lying there, bound hand +and foot, and a huge, hungry wolf sniffing about within a few feet of +him. + +Dick guessed that the wolf had been attracted by the smell of the food +Gurley had cooked for breakfast, and that the animal was hungry was +evident by the way it nosed around for edibles, and snapped up several +small scraps of food that had fallen on the floor. + +Then, presently the wolf approached the bunk, in which Dick was lying, +and sniffed at him. Dick lay absolutely still, till he felt the animal's +nose against his leg, and then, fearing he might be bitten, he gave his +leg a jerk, and yelled at the wolf: "Get out of here! Go away!" + +The wolf was startled into a snarl of surprise and fright, and leaped +backward to the middle of the floor, where it stood, glaring at Dick, +its eyes looking vicious indeed, its bared teeth showing. + +Again Dick yelled at the animal, and moved his legs in a threatening +manner, and the wolf shrank back somewhat, but after a few moments no +harm coming to him it began moving slowly forward, growling and showing +its teeth. + +Dick realized that he was in great danger, for the wolf was a big +fellow, indeed, and would have given the youth a good fight, even had +his hands and feet been free. As it was, with both hands and feet tied, +Dick felt that the chances were that he would be chewed up. + +Closer and closer came the wolf, and although Dick kept yelling at him, +and moving his legs as threateningly as possible, the animal would not +retreat. Closer and closer he came, until his nose was within six inches +of the youth's body; then, as he seemed on the point of springing upon +him, Dick pushed out his arms suddenly, in an effort to frighten the +wolf away. Instead, however, the wolf made a quick snap, and seized the +rope in its teeth. In some manner the teeth became fastened in the rope, +and as the animal leaped backward, in alarm, Dick was pulled off the +bunk, and came to the floor with a thump. + +This frightened the animal still more, and he went clawing backward +across the room, trying to get his teeth loose, and presently his teeth, +being sharp, cut through the rope, weakening it so that Dick was able to +snap the remaining strands, and his arms were free. + +The wolf, however, angered, again sprang at Dick, and the youth, being +unable to get out of the way owing to his feet being tied, seized a +stool that was at hand and struck at the wolf, causing the animal to +struggle back, with a snarl of rage. + +Then ensued a battle such as is seldom seen--a youth with his ankles +bound, fighting against a hungry wolf, his only weapon being a clumsy +stool. + +Snarling, snapping, springing at the youth, the now infuriated animal +kept at work, and Dick rolled over and over, now and then striking at +the wolf with the stool, hitting it too occasionally, but this seemingly +only serving to make the animal the more fierce and angry. + +It was indeed a fierce battle, and there was no telling how it would +end, for the gaunt, hungry wolf was a very dangerous antagonist. But +Dick fought on with desperate energy. + + + + + CHAPTER VII + + Tom Tries Woodcraft + + +The settlers in the fort watched the actions of the Indians and the +renegade with some anxiety. They realized that unless General Greene and +his army came to their assistance, they would sooner or later either be +captured, or else would have to surrender, owing to running out of +provisions. + +And, if Gurley told the truth, Dick Dare had been captured and would not +be able to carry the news to General Greene. + +They discussed the situation, and Tom Dare reiterated his statement that +as soon as it was dark he would leave the fort, attempt to slip through +the lines of the Indians and go in search of Dick. Failing of finding +his brother, after a reasonable length of time given to searching, he +would then go on to the encampment of the patriot army and tell General +Greene of the predicament of the patriot settlers, and get him to come +to their relief. + +"Very well," said Mr. Holden. "We shall be glad to have you do as you +suggest, my boy. But, it will be a difficult and dangerous matter +getting past those redskins. They have the fort surrounded, and will be +on the alert to prevent anyone getting away from here." + +"I think I can succeed, sir," said Tom, confidently. + +"I hope so, I am sure. In the meantime I will tell you as nearly as I +can where you will find Gurley's hut, for there probably is where your +brother is held prisoner." + +The rest of the afternoon passed quietly, the Indians making no move to +attack, but there could be little doubt but what they would make their +plans to execute some maneuver during the night. + +Soon after dark, Tom got ready to start on his dangerous undertaking. +Ben asked to be permitted to accompany him, but Tom said no, that he +could do better by himself. + +"I think I can get through the lines of the redskins, Ben," he said. +"Don't worry about me." + +"All right. But you must be careful, Tom." + +"I'll be careful. Good-by." + +"Good-by," said Ben, as they shook hands, "and good luck." + +Tom said good-by to the others, and then slipped out through the gate, +and stole softly away through the darkness. + +"Now, I will have to exercise care," said Tom to himself. "It is not +going to be very easy to get through the lines of the Indians, for they +are better woodsmen than the redcoats." + +He moved slowly and cautiously, till he was nearly to the edge of the +forest, and then he dropped onto his hands and knees and crawled +forward, slowly, pausing every few moments to listen. + +Finally he reached the margin of the woods without having heard any +sound of the redskins. Here he paused for a few minutes, leaning against +a tree, and listening intently for some sound from the Indians. + +He knew there must certainly be some of the redskins near at hand, and +so when he started onward again, he went slowly and exercised great +caution. He knew that the least sound would be heard, and he was careful +not to make any noise. + +On he went, moving as silently as a shadow, and without hearing any +sound to indicate the presence of the Indians. It was indeed trying to +his nerves, but Tom was a brave youth, and did not falter. + +How long it took Tom to make his way through the lines of the Indians he +did not know, but it seemed to him that several hours had passed by the +time he was at a point beyond the encircling line of redskins. Had he +not moved exceedingly slow, however, he would surely have been +discovered, and likely would have been captured. + +Rising to his feet, he moved onward, still slowly and cautiously, but he +did not hear any sounds to indicate the presence of Indians, and kept +steadily onward. + +When he had gone about half a mile, he paused and uttered a peculiar, +quavering whistle, low but penetrating in the stillness of the night. It +was a signal that he and Dick and Ben often used, when separated at +night. If Dick were within a radius of two hundred yards, he would hear +the whistle, and of course would answer it, unless gagged. + +Tom sounded the whistle three or four times, without receiving any +response, and then moved onward perhaps a quarter of a mile. Pausing +again, he sounded the signal as before. And as before, there was no +reply. He was not able to locate, in the dark, the cabin Gurley +occupied. + +So Tom moved onward, with occasional trips first to one side and then +the other, repeating the signal whistle, but he did not receive any +response, and finally decided that it would be useless to continue the +attempt to find Dick. + +"I would like to find him," murmured Tom, "but it is like looking for a +needle in a haystack, and so I guess I will head for the patriot +encampment, and carry the news regarding the danger of the settlers in +the fort, to General Greene. Then, if Dick isn't there, I will hasten +back and continue the search for him." + +Having so determined, Tom set out in as direct a course as he could +follow, and walked swiftly. On he went, keeping it up till morning, when +he came to a cabin in the woods, and stopped and asked the man, who +looked to be a hunter, if he could get breakfast there. + +"I reckon so," was the reply. And then the hunter asked, curiously: +"Whar ye goin', young feller?" + +"To see some friends about seventy-five miles north of here," was the +reply. + +"What's yer name?" the fellow asked. + +"Tom Dare," was the reply. + +"My name is Jeff Harkins. Come in an' set down. I'll hev the grub ready +purty soon." + +Tom entered and took a seat, and when the food had been cooked and was +on the table, they sat up to the rude board and ate heartily. + +Just as they had finished, into the cabin walked six British soldiers, +and they leveled pistols at the heads of the two, and their leader, a +lieutenant, cried sternly: + +"Surrender, in the name of the king!" + + + + + CHAPTER VIII + + A Battle with a Wolf + + +The battle between Dick Dare and the wolf went on fiercely, in the old +cabin in the forest. The wolf was lithe and nimble, and evaded the +majority of the blows aimed at it by the youth, but at the same time it +dared not get close enough to bite, for fear of getting hit. + +Had Dick's ankles been free, he would have been able to defend himself +much easier, and could soon have landed some telling blows, but his +ankles were tied, and he could not get around very well, having to stay +in one position, and merely keep turning his face toward the animal as +it made its rushes toward him. + +Finally, however, the youth managed to land a hard blow on the head of +the wolf, with the heavy stool, which knocked the animal off its feet. +Seeing his advantage, Dick threw himself forward, and struck the wolf +several blows, till finally the animal stretched out, apparently +lifeless. + +"Thank goodness!" murmured Dick, dropping to a sitting posture, and +panting at a great rate. "That was about the fiercest battle I ever had. +Now, to get my ankles free." + +He drew a clasp-knife from his pocket and cut the rope binding his legs. +Then he sat down and chafed his ankles, till he got the blood to +circulating again. This done, he went to the door and looking out, saw +that the coast seemed to be clear. + +"I guess Gurley won't be back for quite a while," thought Dick. "I will +set out at once and make my way to the patriot encampment." + +Dick left the cabin and made his way through the forest, heading +northward, and hastened onward as rapidly as he could. He had already +lost considerable time, and he was eager to reach the patriot encampment +as quickly as possible, and get General Greene and his army started to +the rescue of the settlers in the fort in Peaceful Valley. + +At noon Dick stopped at the house of a settler, and ate dinner there. He +learned that the settler was a patriot, and told him where he was going, +and why, and the settler told him he could have one of his horses to +ride. + +"Thank you, sir," said Dick. "That is kind of you. I'll leave the horse +here as we come back." + +"That's all right, Dick Dare. I am a patriot an' want to do all I can to +help get help to the patriot settlers in Peaceful Valley." + +Dick thanked him again, and a few minutes later was mounted on a horse +and riding northward proceeding now at a rapid pace. He believed that he +would be able to reach the patriot encampment by noon of the next day, +and by pushing onward nearly through the night, he was enabled to do so. + +As soon as he reached the encampment, he went to the headquarters tent, +and found General Greene and some of the other officers there, among +them Captain Morgan, of Dick's own company. + +"Ah, Dick, how are you?" greeted the general, shaking the youth's hand. + +"I am feeling well, sir," was the reply. And then Dick, after shaking +hands with the other officers, said: "I have important news for you, +sir." + +"Let's hear the news, Dick?" eagerly. + +"Very well, sir." And then Dick told about the desperate needs of the +settlers of Peaceful Valley, whose homes had been burned by the Indians, +and who were now in the little fort, surrounded by the Indians, who +would undoubtedly capture the patriots soon if help was not vouchsafed. + +"How far is the fort from here?" asked General Greene. + +"Nearly a hundred miles, I should judge." + +"A good three days' march from here," said the general. "I think we had +better break camp and start with the entire force. Give the orders to +your respective companies, officers. We will move at once." + +The officers saluted and hastened out, and Dick remained to answer the +questions that General Greene wished to ask about the location of the +fort, the number of the settlers, and particulars concerning the +Indians, etc. + +Within an hour after dinner, the little army was ready to start, and at +the word from General Greene, it set out on the march. + +In the lead rode General Greene and some of the officers, and Dick, +while behind came the soldiers, marching steadily, and with a grim, +determined look on their faces. They knew that they were going to the +rescue of a party of settlers surrounded by redskins, and were eager to +reach their destination and get a chance at the Indians. + +When evening came, they stopped for a brief interval on the bank of a +little stream. Here they built campfires, cooked and ate supper, and +after resting an hour, set out again, it being moonlight till after +midnight. + +They marched till the moon went down and it grew so dark they could not +see to make their way onward. Then they stopped and went into camp for +the rest of the night. + +They were up early next morning, however, these hardy patriots and after +having eaten breakfast, again set out, marching steadily onward till +noon, stopping then less than an hour, to eat a cold bite for dinner. + +They kept up the march till near midnight, again, with stops for supper, +and to rest a few minutes at a time. Then slept four or five hours, and +were up and away again. + +They arrived in the vicinity of Peaceful Valley about the middle of the +following afternoon, and stopped about a mile away, while Dick went +forward to reconnoiter and see what the Indians were doing, to ascertain +if they were still there and the fort had not been captured. + +Dick advanced at a moderate pace, keeping a sharp lookout around him, +till within about a third of a mile of the edge of the valley, and then +he made his way forward at a slower pace, pausing frequently, to look +about him, to see if there were any signs of redskins in the vicinity. + +Presently he paused and took a position behind a tree, gazing steadily +ahead. He had caught sight of the Indians. He got down on his hands and +knees and crawled forward, till he reached a point from which he could +see the fort, and after a careful survey, he came to the conclusion that +the Indians had not succeeded as yet in making the settlers surrender. + +"Good," thought Dick. "I'll return and make my report to General +Greene." + +As he started to turn, however, to make his way back to where he had +left the patriot soldiers, he heard a rustling sound, and the next +moment he was confronted by seven or eight Indian warriors, who had +appeared from behind trees. + +Dick was taken by surprise, but did not intend to permit the redskins to +capture him, if he could help it, and drawing his pistols, he fired two +shots quickly, dropping one Indian, dead, and wounding another. Then he +sprang forward, in an attempt to make his escape, but the redskins, +giving utterance to thrilling war-cries, leaped upon him and bore him +struggling to the ground. + +He fought fiercely, for he wanted to make his escape and get back with +the patriot soldiers and help make the attack on the savages, but the +redskins were too numerous and too strong. He presently, therefore, +found himself made a prisoner, his wrists being bound with a piece of +thong. + +Then he was dragged forward into the presence of the main party of the +tribe, who had appeared in all directions when they heard the shots and +yells, and were advancing toward the spot where the encounter had taken +place. + +Dick was a prisoner in the hands of the redskins, within a few hundred +yards of the settlers in the fort, and also within half a mile of the +patriot soldiers. + + + + + CHAPTER IX + + In Search of Tom + + +Dick's capture by the redskins resulted in making it possible for the +patriot soldiers to advance till close to the Indians without being +discovered, owing to the fact that the redskins were giving their +attention to their prisoner and were not keeping as sharp a lookout +around them as usual. + +When they did discover the soldiers, the latter were already within +range, and as the Indians started to flee, Dick, with rare presence of +mind, threw himself flat on the ground, at the same time yelling at the +top of his voice. "Fire, comrades! You won't hit me." + +The next moment a volley rang out, and ten or twelve of the Indians fell +dead or seriously wounded, while several of those who were able to run, +were wounded less severely. + +Then the soldiers came forward on the run, firing their pistols, and the +Indians fled at the top of their speed, their yells of fear, dismay and +anger commingled. + +They did not try to take their prisoner with them. Those unharmed were +glad to get away with their lives, and Dick's comrades quickly freed his +arms, as he explained how he came to be in the hands of the redskins. + +"Your shots were the signal for us to advance," said General Greene. "We +guessed that you had gotten into trouble, and so we hastened forward as +quickly as possible." + +The settlers now came forth from the fort, and greeted General Greene, +his officers and the army warmly. + +"We were about out of provisions," said Mr. Holden, "and could not have +held the redskins at bay much longer." + +"Wasn't there a white man among those Indians?" asked General Greene. "I +thought I saw one, a big fellow." + +"Yes," said Holden, "that was Gabe Gurley, a renegade. He is helping the +redskins plunder the homes of the patriots in this part of the country." + +"That's the scoundrel that captured me," put in Dick. "He left me a +prisoner in an old cabin, but I managed to escape." + +"He said he captured a young fellow, who he guessed was on his way to +carry news to the patriot army," said Holden. + +"Yes," said Dick. And then he looked around, and not seeing Tom, asked +Ben where his brother was. + +"Tom left here the night after you did, Dick," was the reply. "He said +he would try to find you and rescue you, but that if he failed in that, +he would go on and carry the news regarding the settlers' danger to +General Greene. You didn't see him then?" + +"No, I haven't seen him since I left here." + +A sober look settled on Dick's face, and it was evident that he was +worried. Ben looked anxious, also. + +"Where can Tom be, Dick?" asked Ben, after a few moments. + +"I'm afraid he has fallen into the hands of the Indians, or of a gang of +Tories," was the reply. + +Ben nodded. "I think likely you are right," he agreed. "What are you +going to do?" + +"Hunt for him, Ben." + +"When?" + +"I shall start at once." + +"All right. I'll go with you." + +"I'll explain matters to General Greene, and get permission to go in +search of him, Ben. I'll be back in a few moments." + +While Dick was talking to General Greene, Ben told the settlers about +Tom being missing, and that he and Dick were going in search of the +youth. + +The settlers, who had taken a great liking to the three patriot youths, +expressed sympathy, and several offered to accompany the two, but Dick, +when he joined them and they offered their services, said that he and +Ben would be able to find Tom, likely, without assistance, and then they +said good-by and set out, going toward the north. + +"I suppose we will return to Peaceful Valley, after we find Tom," said +Ben. + +"Yes, Ben. General Greene said he would remain there a while, and make a +campaign against the Indians, so his army will be camped there for a +while." + +"We may find Tom pretty quickly," said Ben, hopefully. + +"I hope so," said Dick. "But this is a big country, and if he has been +made a prisoner by Indians or Tories, we have no knowledge of the +direction the force might take." + +"True," said Ben. "Well, we'll do our best to find and rescue him." + +They proceeded northward, moving at a fair pace, and keeping a sharp +lookout all around them, for some signs of either redskins or Tories. + +They were sharp-eyed, and if there were any enemies, in view, they would +see them. + +When they had reached the cabin where Dick had been made a prisoner by +Gabe Gurley, they paused and rested a while, and Dick told Ben the story +of his fight with the wolf. + +They soon set out again, making an occasional inquiry and continued +onward till they had gone several miles farther toward the north. Then +they paused, held a council, and decided to turn to the left and go in +the direction of Ninety-Six. + +"It is likely," said Dick, "that if Tom was captured by Tories, he would +be taken to Ninety-Six, and so if we go in that direction, we may +succeed in learning something regarding his whereabouts. We'll inquire +at all the settlers' houses we come to." + +"That will be the best plan," agreed Ben. + +They headed westward, now, and walked at a moderate pace, keeping a +sharp lookout around them, for they realized that every step they took +in this direction led them deeper into the enemy's country. The nearer +they approached Ninety-Six, the more likely they would be to encounter +parties of Indians, Tories or redcoats. + +An hour or so later they came to a cabin in the woods, and knocked on +the door. It was opened presently, by a woman of middle age, who looked +at the youths somewhat wonderingly, and said: "How d'ye do?" + +"Good afternoon, ma'am," said Dick. "I wish to know if you have seen a +party of Indians or British soldiers around here, any time to-day?" + +"Ye're rebels, hain't ye?" the woman asked, a hard look coming over her +face. + +"No, we're not rebels," said Dick, guessing that the woman was a +loyalist. "Will you kindly answer my question?" + +"No, I won't," was the reply. "I'm sure ye're rebels, an' ye ain't goin' +to get any information out of me." Then she shut the door in the faces +of the youths. + +Dick and Ben looked at each other in rather a disconcerted manner, and +then Dick said: "Oh, well, perhaps we may secure some information at the +next house we come to." + +Then they set out, and the house was soon out of sight behind them. + +The youths kept onward till they came to another cabin, which stood in a +little clearing in the forest, and a woman opened the door when they +knocked, as at the other cabin. But this woman answered Dick's questions +without hesitation, stating that she had not seen any parties of Indians +or British soldiers. + +The youths then bought some provisions, and thanking the woman, went on +their way. They did not find another cabin before nightfall, however, +and went into camp soon after dark, on the bank of a little stream. + +They built a small campfire, cooked their supper, ate heartily, and +then, after sitting there, talking a while, Ben lay down and went to +sleep, while Dick sat up, it being their intention to take turns at +standing guard throughout the night. They were in a hostile country, and +might be approached and captured by redskins, Tories or redcoats while +they slept. + +Dick stayed awake till midnight, and then woke Ben and lay down in his +turn to get some sleep. + +Ben, although he had slept several hours, was still drowsy, and +presently he dropped off to sleep again--only to be awakened later on by +voices, and he looked up with a start, Dick awakening and rising to a +sitting posture at the same tune, and they gazed with consternation on a +party of redskins, fifteen or twenty in number, who had come upon them +unawares, and surrounded them while they slept. Their ugly, painted +faces looked fierce and threatening in the faint light from the moon, +which shone down upon the scene, through an opening in the trees. + +"Ugh," grunted one of the Indians, grinning fiendishly, and brandishing +a tomahawk threateningly, "we got young white man heap plenty. No try +fight, or we kill, ugh." + +The youths gazed at the redskins in silent dismay. + + + + + CHAPTER X + + At Fort Ninety-Six + + +The British soldiers had quickly tied the hands of Tom and Harkins, and +then set out through the forest with the two prisoners in their midst. + +"Where are you taking us?" asked Tom. + +"To Ninety-Six," was the reply. + +"How far is that from here?" + +"About fifty miles." + +"Why have you made us prisoners?" + +"Because you are rebels." + +"Why do you think I am a rebel?" + +"We have known that Harkins is a rebel for quite a while, and the fact +that you were in his company proves that you are one also." + +"That is poor reasoning," said Tom. "I was on my way up north to see +some of my folks, and stopped at Mr. Harkins' cabin for breakfast. He'll +tell you that I am speaking the truth." + +"Where do your folks live, that you were going to see?" + +"About a hundred miles from here." + +The redcoat laughed derisively. "I think it more than likely that you +are a rebel spy," he said. "We will take you to Ninety-Six in company +with Harkins, anyhow." + +Tom realized that it would do no good to talk to the redcoat, so he +ceased, and walked onward in silence. + +All that day they continued a steady tramp, and camped that evening +beside a stream, remaining there till morning. Then they resumed the +journey, and reached the fort at Ninety-Six about the middle of the +afternoon. + +Tom, knowing that it was General Greene's intention to attempt to +capture Ninety-Six, later on, took note of the surroundings with a keen +and critical eye, and he decided that it would be a difficult matter to +capture the fort, as it was strongly situated. + +"If they have a strong force in the fort, it will be a big job to get +the better of them," he thought. "Well, I will try to learn all I can +while I am here, and then if I succeed in making my escape, I will have +some information to carry to General Greene." + +Harking had not had much, to say during the trip to Ninety-Six, but it +was evident that he was not very well pleased at having been made a +prisoner. + +As soon as they were within the fort, the redcoats took Tom and Harkins +before the commander, Colonel Cruger, who eyed them sternly for a few +moments, and then said: + +"Who are these men, lieutenant?" + +"This man is Harkins, the outlaw that has been trying to organize a +company of rebels," was the reply. "And this young fellow says his name +is Tom Dare, and that he was on his way to see some of his folks up +north a hundred miles or so. He was at Harkins' cabin when we got there, +and so we brought him along." + +"H'm," said the colonel. Then to Tom's companion he said: "I suppose you +are sorry, now, Harkins, that you took the side of the rebels?" + +Harkins, who was a quiet, determined man, shook his head. "No, I'm not +sorry," he said. + +"You will be sorry that you're a rebel, before we get through with you," +sternly. + +"I am not a rebel." + +"What are you, then, if not a rebel?" was the query. + +"A patriot," was the dignified reply. + +"Bah," sneered the officer, "a distinction without a difference." + +"It makes considerable difference to me," said Harkins. "I do not +consider that the patriots are rebels. They are fighting for their +independence, which they are entitled to, which doesn't make them +rebels." + +"Well, they'll never get their independence," was the colonel's reply. +"They will lose the fight, and will have to again take up their +allegiance to the king." + +"Perhaps, but I don't believe it," was the reply. + +"If you will join a company of loyalists that I have formed, here, I +will overlook your past actions in trying to organize a company of +rebels," said the colonel. + +Harkins shook his head. "I will never take up arms in the service of the +king," he said. + +"Very well, then," exclaimed the colonel, angrily. "Take him to the +guard-house." + +A couple of soldiers conducted Harkins from the room, and then Cruger +looked sternly at Tom, and said: + +"You are a rebel, are you not?" + +Tom shook his head. "No," he said. + +"You are loyal to the king?" + +"I haven't given the matter much thought," said the youth. "I suppose I +am what would be termed neutral." + +"Then you would have no objections to joining the company that I spoke +of to Harkins?" + +Tom was silent a few moments. He was doing some swift thinking. He +quickly decided that he could learn more regarding the strength of the +fort, if he were to have the freedom that would come with being a member +of the company in question; and also he would have a better chance to +make his escape. So he said, quietly: "I will join the company, sir, +unless you will let me go on my way up north to see my folks." + +The colonel shook his head. "I think I shall hold you prisoner, unless +you join the company," he said, "so you had better join." + +"Very well." + +The colonel then ordered that Tom be conducted to the quarters occupied +by Captain Kane and his company of loyalists, and soon the youth stood +in the captain's presence. When the soldier that had conducted Tom +thither explained to Captain Kane that Tom was to be a new recruit, the +captain said: "Very well; glad to have all the recruits I can get. What +is your name?" + +"Tom Dare." + +The captain wrote this in a book. Then he asked: "Where do you live?" + +"About fifty miles south of here," was the reply. + +The captain then asked a few more questions, and told Tom he was a +member of the company and to make himself at home and get acquainted +with his comrades. + +"Very well, and thank you," said the youth. + +Then he began mingling with the other members of the company and +engaging them in conversation, and quickly got acquainted with quite a +number. He was a good-natured, jolly youth, and could make friends +easily, and he endeavored to make a good impression, now, for he wished +to learn all he could about the fort, and its strength, and also its +weaknesses, with a view to carrying the information to General Greene as +soon as he could make his escape. + +His only worry was, what had become of his brother Dick? + + + + + CHAPTER XI + + At the Stake + + +Dick and Ben were horrified, as well as amazed when they were confronted +by the encircling gang of Indians. + +That they could not escape was evident, for the redskins had them at +such a disadvantage it would be folly to try to do so. They would be +either cut down by tomahawks or pierced by arrows before they could draw +their pistols. + +The Indian who had spoken first now said something to his companion +braves in a guttural voice, and a couple advanced and bound the arms of +Dick and Ben together behind their backs. + +Then they were encompassed about by the redskins and conducted away +through the forest. They traveled westward for a period of two or three +hours, and then they reached the camp of the Indians. + +Dick and Tom were placed in a wigwam near the center of the village, and +guards were placed about the wigwam. + +"Well, this isn't very pleasant, Dick," said Ben, when they were alone. + +"No, it isn't, Ben," was the reply. + +"I wonder what they'll do with us?" + +"I don't know. Hold us prisoners, I suppose." + +"Do you think they are likely to burn us at the stake?" asked Ben, an +anxious note in his voice. + +"I hardly think so," was the reply. "I haven't heard that the Cherokee +Indians torture prisoners." + +"Indians are not to be trusted," said Ben. + +"Well, we'll have to wait till morning and see what they intend doing," +said Dick. Then presently he went on: "I wonder where Tom is?" + +"Possibly the Indians have got him a prisoner also, Dick." + +"Possibly, but I hope not. We must try to find out." + +They talked a while longer, and then lay down on the skins of wild +animals that constituted their beds, and presently went to sleep, and in +spite of their dangerous situation, they slept soundly till morning. + +Food was brought them, after a while, and a couple of braves stood guard +over them while they ate. Then their hands were bound again, and they +were left to themselves an hour or more. + +Then a couple of braves entered, and the two youths were conducted to a +point where a circle of Indians sat on the ground, while in the center +sat a big, ugly-looking Indian at least fifty years of age. This was the +chief, and the youths were taken in front of him. + +"Ugh," he grunted. "Young white men cause a lot uv braves to die over in +Peaceful Valley. Young white men's lives must pay for braves. You die +to-night, at the stake." + +The youths glanced at each other, and then looked at the old chief +searchingly. They were trying to see whether he meant what he said, or +not. And from the grim look on his face, they guessed that he did mean +absolutely what he said. The part the youths had played in the affairs +at Peaceful Valley had angered the Indians, and they intended taking +revenge, now that they had the two captives helpless and in their power. + +"Take um away," said the chief, with a wave of his hand, and Dick and +Ben were conducted back to the wigwam. As soon as they were alone, they +looked at each other for a few moments in silence, a look of dismay on +their faces. + +"The outlook is not very pleasing for us, Dick," said Ben, presently. + +"You are right, Ben. I wonder if we could escape?" + +Ben shook his head. "Not much chance of that," he said. "Our arms are +bound, and the wigwam is guarded. We couldn't get away." + +"I guess you are right. But I don't relish being burned at the stake, +Ben." + +"Neither do I." + +"Perhaps we can make a break and escape as we are being taken to the +place where they intend to conduct the ceremonies," said Dick, +thoughtfully. + +"I am for making the attempt, Dick." + +"Well, we will do our best." + +The time passed slowly, that day, but also it passed faster than the two +youths liked, for every hour that rolled away brought them nearer to the +torture-stake. + +After supper, that evening, they sat and waited in almost complete +silence. They did not exchange many words, for they did not feel like +talking. They reiterated their determination to try to make their +escape, however, if any opportunity presented itself. + +Presently it grew dark, and the youths heard considerable stirring +about. They judged that the Indians were getting ready for the ceremony +of burning them at the stake. + +Slowly the time passed, and then presently into the wigwam came four +Indian braves. They seized hold of the arms of Dick and Ben, and hustled +them out of the wigwam, and conducted them toward a point just outside +the edge of the village, where a fire was burning. As they drew nearer, +the youths saw that several piles of wood had been gathered, and they +knew that this was to be piled about them, and set fire to. In spite of +the fact that they were brave youths, they shuddered. + +They were led to a couple of tall, slender trees, about a foot in +diameter, and their backs were placed against the trees. The moment had +come when if at all the youths must make an attempt to get away, and +suddenly they gave a strong wrench and attempted to jerk away from their +captors' grasp and make their escape, but they were quickly seized by a +number of strong hands and held against the trees, while they were +securely bound there with thongs. + +Then the Indians began piling the wood around them, against their legs, +while all the members of the band gathered around, to watch the +proceedings. + +Then brands from the fire were brought and stuck in among the dry wood +that had been piled around them, and soon the wood was on fire and +burning at a brisk rate. + +Dick and Ben looked at each other, with despair in their eyes. They +could see no possible chance of escape. + +Louder crackled the burning wood, and as the flames neared the limbs of +the prisoners, the redskins began chanting a guttural song of triumph. + + + + + CHAPTER XII + + Fritz and the Indians + + +General Greene had a council with his officers, and with the settlers of +Peaceful Valley, and mapped out a plan of campaign against the Indians. + +He decided to send out three forces of one hundred each, and have them +go to the south, and west, and look for the bands of marauding redskins. + +"We must put a stop to such work as has been going on here," he said. +"Here in Peaceful Valley all the homes of the settlers have been burned +to the ground, and the Indians will be doing the same at other points, +unless they are prevented, and the only way to prevent them is to give +them such a rough handling that they will be glad to retire to their +villages and be peaceful and quiet." + +The other officers and the settlers agreed with him, and General Greene +named three officers to take charge of the three parties of soldiers, +Captain Morgan being one of the officers named, and he would, of course, +take his company. + +"I wish that I had the Dare Boys here, to go with me," he said. "I +always feel that I can get good reconnoitering work done if Dick Dare is +with me. But, it is not likely that he will be back in time to go with +my company." + +"Likely not," said General Greene, "but if he should come soon after you +leave, I will send him after you, if you wish." + +The three officers after making preparations took their departure, with +their companies, and went in diverging directions, so as to cover as +large a territory as possible. + +The company with Captain Morgan made its way slowly westward, keeping a +sharp lookout ahead, and to the right and the left, looking eagerly for +signs of Indians, but evening came and they had not succeeded. They were +then about twelve miles from Peaceful Valley, and they went into camp on +the bank of a creek, in the midst of the woods. + +Sentinels were stationed, for there was danger of an attack in the +night, and the soldiers proceeded to cook and eat their suppers, they +having brought sufficient provisions to last them several days. + +Among the soldiers of this company were Tim Murphy, a jolly, +good-hearted Irishman and Fritz Schmockenburg, a Dutchman, and they were +great friends, though they quarreled good-naturedly a fair portion of +the time. They were great friends of the Dare Boys, too, and were never +so happy when Dick and Tom were not with the company. + +"How you vos lige dis Injun fighdin', Tim?" asked Fritz, as they sat +beside each other on a log, eating their supper. + +"Foine," was the reply. "It is more excitin' than foightin' ridcoats, +Dootchy. Don't ye think so, yersilf?" + +"Yah, I lige id firsd rate. But they are ugliness to loog at, und dot is +so." + +"The only t'ing Oi don't loike about it, Fritz," said Tim, with a sly +wink at some of his comrades nearby, "is thot av the ridskins catch ye, +they'll scalp ye, an' then they'll tie ye up to a stake an' burn ye, +sure an' they will." + +Fritz looked worried. "Dot vould not be pleasantness, alretty," he said. + +"Oi should say not, Dootchy. Take care thot they don't capture ye, +Fritz." + +"I vill loog ouid dot dey don't catch me, Tim Murphies." + +"You had betther, me bye." + +An hour or two after supper Fritz was sent to do sentinel duty, and he +took his station about one hundred yards from camp, and stood, musket in +hand, trying to peer into the darkness that encompassed him about. + +Fritz was not a coward by any means, but he was always a bit fearful of +being slipped up on by an enemy in the darkness, and so he stood there, +looking eagerly around, and listening intently. + +He heard occasional sounds, such as are usually to be heard in the +timber at night, and at each sound he would grip his musket tightly, and +face in the direction the sound came from, ready to fire if an enemy +appeared. + +After a while, however, he became somewhat used to the noises, and did +not start or show signs of nervousness. Still, he was not very well +pleased with the work of standing sentinel. + +"I haf heard dot der retskins are so slyness dot dey gan slip up close +midout anybody hearin' dem," Fritz muttered. "I vouldn't lige to haf dem +slip up on me, dot vay." + +Slowly the time passed, and Fritz was standing leaning against a tree, +after a while, resting his hands on the muzzle of his musket. + +He had been standing this way perhaps ten or fifteen minutes, when +suddenly he heard a terrible racket in front of him. It startled Fritz, +who thought that of course the noise was made by Indians, and he leveled +his musket and fired a shot as quickly as possible, and then ran toward +the encampment, yelling loudly: + +"Injuns! Der Injuns are comin'!" + +He did not stop till he was within the encampment, and the soldiers were +up, muskets in hand, and many asked eagerly where the Indians were. + +"Dey're comin' bretty quickness!" cried Fritz. "I shot some uf dem, und +der rest vill be here quick, alretty. Be ready to shoot dem!" + +The soldiers stood there, peering into the depths of the forest, but +could not see any signs of Indians; nor was there any sound to indicate +the presence of redskins. + +"What kind of a noise did you hear, Fritz?" asked one of the soldiers. + +"Oh, id vos a terrible racket, lige a lot uf Injuns fighdin'." + +"Sure an' Oi don't belave ye heard inny Injuns at all, Dootchy," said +Tim. "Come wid me, an' we'll find out phwat made the racket." + +One of the soldiers seized a brand from the fire, and quite a number +made their way to the spot where Fritz had heard the noise, and there, +stretched on the ground, dead, they found a wildcat. + +"Ho, ho, ho!" laughed Tim. "Sure an' it's a woildcat ye wur afther +thinkin' wur Injuns." + +"He made a pretty good shot in the darkness, anyhow," said another +soldier. + +"Veil, I am alvays a good shot, alretty," said Fritz. "But der wildcats +made so much racket dot I though dere vos a lot uv redsgins comin'." + +"If there were any redskins in the vicinity, you scared them away," said +a soldier. + +"Yah, I guess dot dey vouldn't come back tonight, alretty," said Fritz. + +The soldiers jollied Fritz a while, and then went back to camp and lay +down and were soon asleep. + +Fritz remained on sentinel duty an hour or so longer, and then was +relieved from duty. But next morning the soldiers had quite a lot of +sport jollying Fritz about his wildcat that he thought was a gang of +Indians coming to surprise the camp. + + + + + CHAPTER XIII + + Tom and the Redcoats + + +The day after Tom Dare became a member of the company of British +soldiers, he went with a party of about twenty on a trip toward the +southward, where it was said the patriots were thick, nearly all being +patriots in fact. + +Captain Kane instructed Lieutenant Wicks, who was to have charge of the +party, to plunder the patriot homes and take prisoners, where the +patriots showed signs of resistance or anger. + +"Bring them here," he said, "and we will make them join our force and +fight for the king." + +"All right, Captain Kane," was the reply. + +"I have heard," went on the captain, "that General Greene is on his way +to Ninety-Six, with a force of about one thousand men, and if he has as +strong a force as that, then we will need all the men we can get, for we +have only about six hundred." + +Then the party set out, and made its way toward the south. For several +miles their route was through a region where the majority of the +settlers were loyalists, and these were not bothered. + +"There is a settlement about twenty miles from here, in among the +mountains," said the lieutenant to the soldiers nearest to him as they +made their way along, "and it is made up wholly of rebels. I have been +wanting to get a chance at them for a good while, and I am going +straight there. We will help ourselves to any of their belongings that +we care for, and will take the men prisoners and make them come back to +Ninety-Six and fight for the king when General Greene puts in an +appearance." + +"I know where that settlement is," said one of the soldiers. "They are +strong rebels, up there." + +"Yes, but we'll make them wish they were loyal to the king before we get +through with them," said the lieutenant. + +Tom listened to the conversation of the lieutenant and the soldiers with +interest, and he began wondering if he could not manage to in some +manner get word to the settlers of their danger. + +"I'll try to do so," he decided. "If any opportunity is offered to me, I +will slip away and try to get to the settlement ahead of the redcoats +and warn the settlers." + +The party of British soldiers did not hurry. They did not care to reach +the settlement until evening, anyway, and so they made their way along +at a moderate pace, and stopped an hour and a half at noon, and after +they had eaten, they proceeded at the same moderate pace, and it was +getting along toward evening when the lieutenant said they were within +two miles of the settlement, which was in a high valley, up in among the +mountains. + +At the point where they were when the lieutenant made this statement, +they were making their way along a path that wound around the side of a +mountain, and at one side the mountain stretched up hundreds of feet in +the air, while to the other side there was almost a precipice. The +descent for a hundred feet was quite steep, but not so steep but what a +man might descend it, by using care. Tom Dare, who had been trying to +think of some manner of giving the party the slip and getting to the +settlement ahead of the redcoats, decided on a plan. It was dangerous, +but he would try it anyhow, and his plan was to pretend to stumble and +then fall and go sliding down the declivity. He would then get to his +feet, make his way to the settlement and warn the settlers. + +He managed to work his way over till he was close to the edge of the +descent, and then suddenly he stumbled, gave a cry of seeming alarm, +fell and went rolling over and over down the steep mountain-side. + +The soldiers were greatly excited and yelled advice and encouragement to +the youth, but he was rolling so rapidly that their voices came to him +only in an inarticulate murmur. He did not understand their words, and +could not have acted on any of the suggestions had he done so. + +"Stop," yelled one soldier. + +"Grab hold of something," cried another. + +"Whirl your body around and stick your heels in the earth," was the +suggestion from another. + +On rolled Tom, and although he did his best to lessen his speed, he +could do little, and he went down the side of the mountain with terrible +speed. Fortunately, however, he was able to grasp a long trailing vine +and this enabled him to twist himself into a more perpendicular +position. Presently, when about one hundred feet down, he shot over a +little precipice and went fifteen or twenty feet downward, directly into +the top of a stunted fir tree. On through the branches he went, being +buffeted first one way and then the other, and finally fell to the +ground alighting upon the mossy bank of a little rivulet. Had he had in +advance the slightest conception of the danger of his undertaking, he +certainly would not have made the venture. + +Luckily the branches of the tree had broken his fall considerably, and +although he was somewhat stunned by the fall, and dazed by the swift +whirling, he was not seriously injured, and in a few moments he was +enabled to sit up, and a little later he rose to his feet, shook +himself, and began figuring on getting to the settlement ahead of the +redcoats. + +Then to his hearing came the words, from the lieutenant: "Tom Dare! Are +you alive? Where are you?" + +"They'll be looking for me in a few moments," thought Tom. "I must hurry +away from here." + +He set out in the direction of the settlement, picking his way along +carefully, and gradually he worked his way upward, and when he had gone +about a mile, he reached the path the soldiers had been following when +he rolled down the mountain-side. + +Tom looked back, but saw no signs of the British soldiers. He could see +only about two hundred yards, however, as the path bent around the side +of the mountain. + +Tom did not linger there, however, and after one swift glance back, he +set out along the path on the run, and in about ten minutes emerged from +the path into a high valley of perhaps three or four miles long and a +mile and a half in width. At a point near the center he saw a group of +log houses, and toward these he hastened. + +It was now about supper time, and Tom decided that the settlers were all +at their homes. This would be better than if the men were scattered +about, in the fields, at work, for they could make preparations for +defense quickly. + +Tom kept glancing back over his shoulder as he ran toward the houses, +and each time he looked, he expected to see the British soldiers coming. +He had gone about halfway to the houses, however, before he caught sight +of the redcoats. They were just entering the valley, and they must have +caught sight of Tom and guessed what he was intending to do, for a yell +went up from their lips that came to his hearing. + +"They have seen and recognized me," thought Tom. "Well, I have the start +of them, and will reach the settlement in time to make it possible for +the men to get ready to show fight." + +On ran the youth, and the redcoats could be seen to be running also, but +they were not so swift-footed as Tom, and he reached the settlement +while the redcoats were still more than half a mile distant. + +Tom stopped at the first house he came to, and opened the door without +ceremony and called out: + +"A party of redcoats is coming to attack the settlement, sir. Get the +men together quickly, if you want to make a fight." + +A man came hastily to the door, and cried: "What's thet you say, young +man? Redcoats comin' here?" + +"Yes, sir. You can see them, yonder, and--" + +"Why, ye're one yourself!" exclaimed the man, noting Tom's British +uniform. + +"No, I'm a patriot that was forced to join their force. I was with that +party, but got ahead of them, and came to warn you. Get the men +together, quickly. How many are there in the settlement?" + +"About twenty-five." + +"There are only twenty of the redcoats. We can whip them. Get the other +men at once." + +"All right. I'll go to part of the houses and give the alarm, you go to +the rest." + +Then they hastened from house to house, warning the settlers, and in a +less number of minutes than it takes to tell, the men were gathered at +the edge of the settlement, rifles in hand, ready for the redcoats. + +The women and children were told to leave the houses and retire up the +mountain-side, in the shelter of the rocks, and they promptly did so. + +"We'll protect ourselves by hiding behind the houses and fire at the +redcoats, and hold them back or drive them away," asserted one of the +settlers, who seemed to be looked upon as the leader. "If we can save +our houses and household goods, we will do so; but if they are too +strong for us, we can retreat up the mountainside." + +"We can drive them away, I think, sir," said Tom. + +"I hope so, young man." And then the settler added: "We thank you for +bringing us warning of the approach of the British." + +"You are welcome, sir. I am a patriot, and a member of the patriot army +under General Greene, whose army is about sixty or seventy miles east +and north from here. I was captured by the British and made to join +their force, but did so with the intention of making my escape at the +earliest possible moment." + +"Well, it is lucky for us that you brought us the news of the coming of +the redcoats just when you did." + +"They are almost within rifle-shot distance now," said one of the +settlers. + +"All right," replied the leader. "Keep your eyes on them, and as soon as +they are within range, begin firing. Take aim, and make every shot +tell." + +A few moments later, the British soldiers were close enough for the +bullets from the rifles to reach them, and the settlers began firing. + +Yells of anger went up from the lips of the redcoats. + + + + + CHAPTER XIV + + Friends in Need + + +Dick Dare and Ben Foster were never nearer death's door than at the +moment when the flames of the fires built around them, as they stood +tied to trees, began to scorch their clothing. + +Both youths were very brave, but there was something so terrible about +being burned at the stake, that a feeling of horror took hold upon them. + +The Indians now leaped to their feet and began jumping about, and +uttering cries, evidently of enjoyment at the spectacle that they were +about to witness. + +Then, just as the flames were about to begin burning the clothing of the +youths, they felt the ropes that bound them to the trees loosen, and to +the ears of each came the words: "When I say, 'now,' leap away from the +tree and run for your life." + +The voices were strange to the youths, but they realized that the words +were uttered by friends, and each replied, cautiously: + +"All right." + +Smoke was going up from the fires, and when there came a moment that a +thick sheet of smoke lay for a few moments between the youths and the +redskins, they heard the word, "Now!" + +The youths acted instantly. They leaped out from the midst of the piles +of wood, and turned and ran with the swiftness of the wind in the +opposite directions from where the Indians were dancing and singing. + +Then the smoke lifted and the redskins caught sight of the vacant +positions so recently occupied by their intended victims. Instantly +their singing changed to wild yells of rage and chagrin, followed by +war-whoops, and then the braves dashed in among the trees, in pursuit of +the fugitives. + +Dick and Tom did not see anything of their rescuers. In fact, it was so +dark, in the midst of the timber, now that they were away from the light +of the fires, that they could not see anything, and they had to run at +random. In so doing, they ran against trees, through clumps of bushes, +and stumbled over fallen trees, but managed to make pretty good headway, +even under such circumstances. And they were urged on by the wild yells +of the pursuing redskins, who were wild with rage because of the +inexplicable escape of their intended victims. + +The youths kept together, and plunged recklessly onward. They were +determined to escape, if possible, for they realized that to be +recaptured would be to be again fastened to the trees and burned to +death. The Indians would keep them surrounded, next time, likely, and +thus prevent them from escaping again. + +On the two youths dashed, through the underbrush, and suddenly Dick felt +emptiness beneath his feet, and went plunging downward, alighting on +hard ground with a thump, his head struck something hard, causing him to +see a lot of stars and flashing meteors, and then he knew nothing. He +had been knocked senseless by the fall. + +Ben, running swiftly, did not miss his comrade at once, but when he had +gone perhaps fifty or seventy-five yards farther, and no sound of Dick +running near him came to his hearing, he stopped, listened a few +moments, and then called out, cautiously: + +"Dick! Oh, Dick! Where are you?" + +The sound of the shouting of the pursuing Indians came to his hearing, +but although he listened intently, he did not hear any reply from Dick. + +"Where can he be?" Ben murmured, anxiously. "Can anything have happened +to him?" + +Ben stood there a brief moment, called again, and then, not receiving +any response, he set out through the forest as fast as his legs could +carry him, and that, with a pursuing foe of savages determined upon his +life, was pretty fast. His idea and hope was, that Dick was still +hastening onward, and that he would escape from the disappointed +redskins. + +And Dick was lying senseless in a pit that had been made by hunters, for +the purpose of trapping wild animals, for food and skins. + +When Dick regained consciousness, he could not think for a few moments +what had happened to him. Then he remembered being tied to the trees in +the Indian village, with the fire burning about him, remembered having +been freed by somebody, and that he and Ben had been running for their +lives through the underbrush, pursued by the Indians, when he had taken +a tumble and had got a bump on the head that had rendered him +insensible, and the question now was: Where was he? + +And then the thought came to him: Where was Ben? + +He listened intently, but heard no sound to indicate Ben's presence, nor +did he hear the yells of the Indians. He judged, from this, that he had +been in his present situation some time. + +He rose to a sitting posture, and reached out and felt around him. He +made out what seemed to be a solid wall of earth, at his back. Then he +rose to his feet, and reached upward, trying to stretch to the top of +the wall, but could not. Then he started to make his way along the wall, +feeling with his hand, for guidance, and he had taken only five or six +steps when he heard a low, menacing growl right in front of him. + +Dick paused and gazed ahead, trying to penetrate the darkness, and then +he saw what looked like two gleaming balls of fire, and then as another +low, fierce growl came to his hearing, he realized the truth--that he +was confronted by a wild animal of some kind, and from the sound of the +growl he judged that the animal was likely a panther. + +Dick had had considerable experience in hunting and trapping, and knew +that pits were often dug for the purpose of trapping wild animals, and +he guessed that he was in one of those old pits, and that he had for a +companion a wildcat or panther! + +Dick Dare realized that his situation was indeed a dangerous one. True, +he had the use of his hands and feet, but what could he hope to do +against the animal without weapons of any kind? + +He felt that his danger was great, that his situation was indeed +desperate, and he stood there, almost frozen to the spot, trying his +best to think what he should do. Truly he had fled one danger but to +encounter another. "From the frying pan into the fire." + +Again the low, but fierce and threatening growl came to Dick's ears. + + + + + CHAPTER XV + + Preparing for Trouble + + +Tom Dare and the settlers managed to hold their own against the +redcoats, and the latter, after two or three attempts at forcing their +way into the houses sheltering the marksmen, retreated about half a mile +and evidently held a council, for they gesticulated quite a good deal. +Then the settlers saw one of the soldiers take his leave, hastening down +the valley, and Tom Dare exclaimed: + +"He's going back to the fort after reinforcements." + +"Do you think so?" asked Mr. Hicks, the man who was looked upon as being +the leader at the settlement. + +"Yes, that is what he is going to do. They know that they can't capture +the settlement with their present force, and as we have killed one or +two of them and wounded several, they are determined to capture the +settlement." + +"Well, they will be able to do so, if they have a strong enough force, I +guess." + +"Yes. And that fellow will bring enough soldiers so that they will have +no trouble in getting the best of you." + +The settlers looked sober and thoughtful. They realized that while they +had gotten the better of the affair, so far, they would not be able to +hold their own against overwhelming odds. + +"What shall we do, anyhow?" remarked one of the settlers. + +"I'll tell you what," said Tom, who had been doing considerable +thinking. "Let's take the offensive, and go out and attack those +redcoats and drive them out of the valley." + +"What good will that do?" asked Mr. Hicks. "That soldier yonder will +return with a strong force, and then we will have to retreat into the +mountains." + +"No, I think we can arrange a trap for them," said Tom. + +"How?" with interest. + +"I'll tell you. You know that the path leading into this valley extends +for several miles along the side of the mountain, with a steep descent +on one side, and almost a perpendicular wall at the other." + +"Yes, we know that." + +"So do I," mused Tom, rubbing some of the sore spots resultant from his +precipitous departure from his British comrades. + +"Tell us your plan, Tom." + +"Well, after we have driven these redcoats out of the valley and back +along that path, we will climb up to the top of the precipice-wall, and +will gather a large number of rocks of good size and place them right +along the edge of the precipice. Then when the redcoats come, we will +roll the stones down upon them." + +The settlers looked at one another, and it was easy to see that they +thought the idea a good one. "That will likely be effective," said Mr. +Hicks. "I believe that we can put a stop to the advance of any force, no +matter how strong, in that manner. We can move along the edge of the +precipice, keeping above the redcoats, and keep rolling rocks down on +them, till they are all annihilated or take the back track." + +The others said they thought Mr. Hicks was right, and so they began +making preparations at once to attack the redcoats. They loaded their +rifles and as many pistols as they could find, and then they withdrew +from the houses, entered the woods and made their way along till they +were opposite the point where the redcoats were stationed. Then they +slipped to the edge of the covered wood land and suddenly rushed out +upon the British soldiers, firing as they went, and yelling at the top +of their voices. + +The redcoats, taken by surprise, were seized with a feeling of terror, +and sprang to their feet and ran toward the end of the valley at the top +of their speed, leaving two or three seriously wounded soldiers behind +them, however. + +The settlers pursued the fleeing soldiers, and kept after them till they +left the valley and were making their way along the path on the side of +the mountain. Then the settlers paused and held a council. + +"Now what shall we do next?" asked one of the settlers. + +"A few of us will stay here and guard the entrance to the valley," +replied Tom. "And the rest will climb to the top of the precipice and +gather stones and place them where they will be handy to roll down on +the heads of the redcoats when they come." + +"That is good advice, I think," said Mr. Hicks. "We will do that." + +Then he named six of the settlers, and told them to remain on guard at +the entrance to the valley, after which the rest of the party climbed to +the top of the precipice and began collecting rocks and placing them +along the edge of the precipice. + +"Those rocks will beat firearms as destructive weapons," said Mr. Hicks. + +"Yes, I think so," replied Tom. + +The soldiers who had been driven from the valley kept onward along the +path till they reached the fairly level country at the end, a distance +of about three miles, and then they stopped and went into camp, as the +reinforcements from the fort would not reach there till about noon of +the next day. + +The settlers worked hard the rest of the afternoon, and when evening +came they had a string of rocks piled along the edge of the precipice +for a distance of a couple of miles, and they felt that they were now in +a position to make it exceedingly hot for the British soldiers when they +put in their expected appearance the following day. + +The settlers now made their way back again and rejoined the six men on +guard at the entrance to the valley, and after informing them that they +would send six men to relieve them, so that they could come to the +settlement and get supper, the main party made its way to the +settlement. The women had supper ready, and the settlers ate, after +which six of their number went and relieved the six at the entrance of +the valley, and the three wounded redcoats were brought and placed in +one of the houses. Their wounds had already been dressed by one of the +settlers, an old man and a sort of doctor, who had not accompanied the +party in its attack on the British, so the wounded men had been taken +care of. + +The settlers felt very well satisfied with the situation. Two or three +had been wounded, but not seriously, and they felt that they had so far +had much the better of the fight. + +They got a good night's sleep, and were up bright and early, ate +breakfast, and then got ready for the work that was to be performed that +day. Leaving the settlement, they made their way to the entrance of the +valley, climbed to the top of the precipice, and then proceeded to the +farther end of the string of stones, where they paused and settled down +to await the coming of the British. + +Tom Dare, however, who was never satisfied to remain quiet, said that he +would go and reconnoiter and see if he could locate the party of +redcoats that had been driven out of the valley. + +"Very well," said Mr. Hicks, "but be careful, my boy. Don't let them +capture you." + +"I won't, sir. I will keep my eyes open." + +Then Tom made his way down the steep slope of the mountain, and into the +heavy timber, and he made his way along, slowly and cautiously, for he +believed that the party of redcoats was somewhere in the vicinity. + +Tom advanced a few yards at a time, pausing then to look all around him, +and when he had gone about half a mile he caught sight of the +encampment. + +"I thought I would find them somewhere around here," thought Tom, "Well, +now by keeping watch on this party of redcoats, I will know when the +others join them, and when they start toward the valley, and can hasten +and warn the settlers and they can be ready to begin the bombardment +with the stones." + +Tom selected a good place from which to keep his eyes on the redcoats, +and then settled down to take it easy. It was a warm morning, and Tom +presently became somewhat drowsy. He would watch the encampment a little +while, then he would nod slightly, but would presently rouse up again. +It was during one of his nodding periods that Tom suddenly felt strong +hands seize hold of him. Startled, he made an attempt to get free from +the grasp, but could not do so, there being two of his assailants, and +to Tom's surprise they were Indians. + +"That accounts for their being able to slip up on me without my hearing +them," thought Tom, with some bitterness. + +His hands were quickly bound together behind his back with a thong, and +then the Indians dragged Tom down to the British encampment, where he +was given a rather grim reception. + +"So, here you are again, eh, Tom Dare!" exclaimed Lieutenant Wicks. +"Good. I am glad to see you. You played us a nice trick when you +pretended to fall, rolled down the slope and then hastened on ahead and +gave the settlers warning, didn't you. Very good, I will settle with you +for that, now that we have got you in our hands!" And he glared at the +youth in a manner that showed he was very much wrought up, as indeed he +had cause to be. + +The truth was, that he was one of those who had been wounded by the +bullets from the weapons of the settlers. His wound was not serious, but +it was painful, and did not have a good effect on his temper. + +"What are you going to do with me?" asked Tom, somewhat defiantly. + +"I'll show you at the proper time," was the reply. "You will be very +sorry that you acted as you did." + +"Perhaps so, perhaps not," replied the patriot youth. + +"You will find that it does not pay to try tricks on soldiers of the +king," said the lieutenant, sternly. "You will wish that you had +remained a member of the British army." + +"No, I won't," said Tom. "I am a patriot, and I wouldn't fight for the +king." + +"You will be glad to fight for the king, before I get through with you, +you blasted rebel!" cried the lieutenant, fiercely. Then he went on: +"Just wait till the reinforcements get here. We will return to the +valley and thrash the settlers and plunder their houses, and you are +going to go along and help. Do you hear?" + +"Yes, I hear," replied Tom, "but I won't do much helping, I can tell you +that." + +He thought of the rocks that were to be rolled down on the redcoats, and +did not like the prospect of being taken along with the force when it +made its way along the path, in going to the valley. + +Would the settlers roll the stones down, he wondered? They would, unless +they knew that he was among the party. But would they discover this +fact? If they did not, Tom would likely be killed by a rock, the same as +if he were a redcoat. + + + + + CHAPTER XVI + + The Search for Dick + + +Ben Foster kept struggling on through the woods and darkness for quite a +while, and then, not hearing any sounds of pursuit, he paused and +listened intently for a few moments, after which he gave a low, but +penetrating whistle, the same signal that the three youths often used. +If Dick were within two or three hundred yards, he would hear and reply +to the signal. + +There came no reply, however, and after waiting a few minutes, Ben +whistled again, with the same result. + +Then he set out through the forest, but did not go far, before stopping +again. + +"I'm not going any farther till I know where Dick is," he murmured, "He +may have gotten into trouble, may have fallen and knocked his head +against a tree and fallen into the hands of the redskins again. I'll +stay here till morning, and then see if I can find him." + +Ben found a place at the foot of a big tree, and lying down, was soon +asleep. He slept till morning, and then sat up and looked around him. + +All was quiet, and there were neither redskins nor redcoats in sight. + +Ben drew a sigh of relief. He had feared that he might see enemies in +the vicinity. + +But, what should he do? In which direction should he go? He did not know +where to look for Dick, and so he decided to start back in the direction +from which he had come in escaping from the Indian village. It would be +somewhat dangerous to venture back to the vicinity of the village, but +Ben was determined to find Dick, if possible. He feared his comrade had +been recaptured by the redskins, and if this were the case, it should be +his business to rescue him. + +Ben had taken only a few steps, however, when he caught sight of a party +of patriots coming toward him, as he could tell by their blue uniforms. + +"There comes one of the parties sent out by General Greene!" thought +Ben, with a feeling of delight. "Now I can guide them to the Indian +village, and they can put the redskins to rout and rescue Dick, if he is +there." + +He hastened to meet the soldiers, and when he met them, he found that +one was his own company, under the command of Captain Morgan. The +captain was naturally somewhat surprised to see Ben, but was glad, and +asked if he could give him any news regarding the whereabouts of +Indians. + +"Indeed I can," was the reply. "Dick and myself were captured by a party +of redskins, and they were about to burn us at the stake, but somebody +slipped up and cut the ropes binding us to the trees, and we managed to +get away. But we got separated in the darkness, and I don't know where +Dick is." + +"When was that?" + +"Last night." + +"How far is the Indian village from here?" the captain asked. + +"About ten or twelve miles, I should judge, sir." + +"You can guide us thither?" + +"I am sure that I can, sir." + +"Very good, lead the way, and we will get to the village as quickly as +circumstances will permit. If Dick Dare was recaptured and taken back to +the village, he may be in danger, and we will endeavor to rescue him." + +"True, sir." + +They set out at once, with Ben in the lead, as guide. Captain Morgan was +right behind Ben, and then after them came the soldiers, Tim Murphy and +Fritz Schmockenburg being close to the captain and Ben. These two liked +Dick immensely, and were worried for fear something serious had happened +to him. + +After a walk of about three and a half or four hours, Ben called a halt +and said that the Indian village was within half a mile of the spot +where they were standing. + +"We had better advance slowly and cautiously," he advised, and the +captain so ordered. + +Presently they came in sight of the village, and at the same moment they +were discovered and a wild yell went up from the lips of an Indian brave +that had been standing guard. This was the alarm signal to his fellow +braves in the village, and instantly there was a great skurrying around +among the redskins, as they hastened this way and that, trying to get +together for the purpose of offering battle to the soldiers. + +When they saw how large a number they had to contend with, however, they +quickly decided that prudence was the better part of valor, and took to +their heels, and after them went the patriot soldiers, firing as they +ran, and dropping quite a number of the savages, dead or wounded. + +The soldiers pursued the Indians as long as they could see any of them, +and then they returned to the village, and began looking in the various +wigwams, to see if Dick Dare was there, a prisoner. + +They did not find him in any of the wigwams, and when Captain Morgan +made inquiries of an old Indian, who had remained behind with the squaws +and papooses, and who could speak a few words of English, he was +informed that neither of the white young men who had been at the torture +stake the night before, and had escaped, had been recaptured. Captain +Morgan was somewhat relieved to hear this. But he was still anxious +regarding the fate of Dick. He felt that the youth had gotten into +danger of some kind. + +The soldiers buried the Indians that had been killed, carried the +wounded ones into the wigwams, and left them there for the squaws to +doctor up. Then the soldiers again set out, with the intention of trying +to locate Dick Dare, and rescue him, if he had fallen into the hands of +another party of Indians. + +They made their way slowly through the woods, and spread out, fan-shape, +so as to cover as large a territory as practical. If Dick were anywhere +in that part of the country, they would find him, they were certain. + +But although they put in the rest of the day, practically searching for +Dick, they did not find him, nor did they encounter any Indians. It is +likely that the redskins had heard about the attack on the village, and +kept out of the way. + +Ben was greatly worried about their failure to find Dick or learn +anything regarding his whereabouts. He was worried, too, about the +whereabouts of Tom. He and Dick had started out to look for Tom, and had +themselves been made prisoners, had very nearly been burned at the +stake, had become separated in their flight from the redskins, and now +Dick's whereabouts was not known. Thus both the Dare boys were missing, +and their friends feared that both were in serious trouble, somewhere, +though where, was the difficulty. + +"Perhaps we may find Dick to-morrow," said Ben. + +"Sure an' Oi hope thot we may foind 'im, Ben," replied Tim Murphy. "It's +a foine bye Dick is." + +"Yah, Dick and Tom are both fine poys, alretty," said Fritz +Schmockenburg. "Und I hope dot ve find dem to-morrow." + +"Oi wish we could foind thim as aisy as ye can foind woildcats whin +standin' guard, Fritz," chuckled Tim, and then he told Ben the story of +how Fritz had heard a noise, thought the Indians were coming to attack +the camp, and had fired a shot and rushed into the encampment, yelling +that the Indians were coming, and that when they had gone and looked at +the point where Fritz had fired the shot, they had found a dead wildcat. + +Ben laughed, and then said: "Well, if it had been an Indian, you would +have settled his account, Fritz." + +"Yah, dot is so," nodded Fritz, grinning. + +Next morning the patriot soldiers again began searching for Dick, at the +same time keeping their eyes open for Indians, but did not find either, +and after eating their luncheon at noon, they set out toward the patriot +encampment in Peaceful Valley, as they were expected to report there +that evening. + +It was almost dark when they arrived at the encampment, and the other +two companies were already there. They had found two or three Indian +villages, had killed and wounded a number of Indians and put the rest to +flight, as Captain Morgan's force had done. They had not seen anything +of Dick or Tom Dare. + +General Greene was somewhat worried over the fact that Dick and Tom were +missing, for he liked the youths, and feared that they had met with +death at the hands of the redskins. + +"We will break camp here in the morning, however," he told his officers, +"and will march upon Fort Ninety-Six. Possibly we may find the Dare Boys +somewhere in that neighborhood. Dick may have continued onward in that +direction to look for his brother Tom." + +"True," agreed Captain Morgan. "I hope we may find them alive and well." + + + + + CHAPTER XVII + + Ben Reconnoiters + + +The encampment was astir early next morning, and the soldiers cooked and +ate breakfast, and then began making preparations to get ready for the +march. + +They were ready in about an hour and a half, or two hours, and then +having said good-by to the settlers of Peaceful Valley, they marched +away toward the west. + +They continued onward steadily during that day, stopping an hour at noon +for luncheon and to rest, and when evening came they went into camp at a +point perhaps thirty miles east of Ninety-Six. + +They stationed sentinels, so as to prevent a surprise by Indians or +redcoats and the night passed quietly, no enemy appearing. + +They were up and away again early in the morning, and by marching hard, +managed to reach the vicinity of Ninety-Six by evening, They went into +camp only about two miles from the fort. + +Ben Foster was eager to take a look at the fort, for he feared that +possibly Dick and Tom were prisoners there. He went to General Greene +and asked permission to go on a reconnoitering expedition, and the +permission was granted. + +"I shall be glad to have you go and secure all the information possible +regarding Fort Ninety-Six, my boy," said the general. "But, be careful +and don't let them capture you." + +"I will be careful, sir," and then saluting, Ben took his departure. + +He made his way cautiously through the timber, for he did not know but +there might be redcoats or redskins in the vicinity, and he did not want +to fall into their hands. + +On he went, pausing frequently to listen, but hearing no suspicious +sounds, he drew nearer and nearer to the fort, and at the end of an hour +he arrived at the open space in the center of which the fort stood. + +It was a moonlight night, and Ben could see the fort with tolerable +distinctness, and he stood there for some time, looking at the building +and wondering if Dick and Tom were there. + +Ben stood there for perhaps half an hour, looking at the fort and the +lay of the land with critical eyes. He was sizing the fort and +surroundings up, and trying to figure out what chance for success the +patriot army would have, if an attack was made. + +"It is impossible to judge of the strength of the fort at a distance," +thought Ben. "I believe that I will try to reach the wall around the +fort and see how strongly-constructed it is. General Greene will be glad +to secure all the information I can get." + +Ben felt that he would be running considerable risk in advancing across +the open ground on an evening when the moon was shining, but he was +brave, and decided to take a closer view, anyhow. + +Having decided, he at once set to work. He advanced from among the +trees, and just before getting out where the light would encompass him, +Ben dropped on his hands and knees, and began slowly crawling along, +after the fashion of an Indian. + +He was not quite as expert at this kind of work as an Indian, but he did +very well, advancing slowly, and keeping his body close to the ground, +thus not being so likely to attract the attention of a sentinel at the +fort. + +It was about a third of a mile to the stockade-wall around the fort, and +Ben was at least half an hour in going that distance, and as he drew +near the fort, he was in momentary expectation of hearing the crack of a +musket and feeling the sting of a bullet. + +Ben was not discovered, however. At any rate, there was no musket-shot +or outcry. All was quiet, and on reaching the wall, Ben sat down, with +his back against the logs, and rested a while. It had been rather trying +on his nerves to crawl across the open space under the light of the +moon, faint though it was. + +When he had got rested, Ben turned and began making an examination of +the wall. He found that it was made of large logs, flattened at the +sides and placed on top of one another. The wall was, he judged, about +twelve feet high. + +Ben worked his way slowly along the wall, feeling between the logs, for +openings, as he wished to learn how thick the wall was, and whether it +would be possible to batter it down with the field-pieces that General +Greene had brought with the army. + +Presently Ben found an opening, through which he pushed his hand, and +his fingers came in contact with another log on the inside. The wall was +at least two logs in thickness, and this would make it difficult to +batter it down with the field-pieces. + +The patriot youth continued to work his way along the wall, and on +reaching the corner, he turned it and made his way along the wall on +that side. He kept on till he had made the circuit of the stockade-wall, +and he guessed the wall as being about two hundred feet in each +direction. + +Near one corner of the wall Ben had found a place where there were +several openings between the logs, and he believed that he could climb +to the top of the wall, there. He decided to make the attempt, anyway, +as all was quiet. He wished to get a look into the enclosure, if he +possibly could. + +He made his way to the point in question, and then he began the work of +climbing to the top of the wall. This proved to be more difficult than +he had expected, and he began to think he would not be able to reach the +top, after several unsuccessful attempts, but presently he managed to +get high enough up the side of the wall so that he could get hold of the +top log, and then he slowly and cautiously pulled himself up till his +head was a little above the top of the wall. + +Now he exercised great caution, lifting his head slowly, a little at a +time, till he was enabled to look into the enclosure. He could see the +building constituting the fort, and at the farther side he saw a +sentinel pacing slowly back and forth on the platform built against the +wall, and about five feet from the top. + +The sentinel's side was toward Ben when he was pacing back and forth, +however, and when he paused to look away from the fort, his back was +toward the youth, so Ben did much fear being seen by him. But there +should have been a sentinel on the side where Ben was, and he wondered +where the sentinel could be. + +He presently found out, for suddenly the head of a British soldier +appeared above the top of the wall, and almost in front of Ben's face. +The sentinel had evidently been down below when Ben first climbed up +there, and had just returned to his post. He caught sight of Ben at the +same moment the youth caught sight of him, and his exclamation of +amazement was not unnatural. + +"Who are you?" he cried. + +At the same moment he made a grab for the youth's throat, but Ben was +too quick for him, and evaded the grasp by dropping to the ground with +all possible dispatch. + +"Spies! Rebels!" yelled the sentinel, loudly, and then grabbing up his +musket, he leaned over the top of the wall and looked eagerly for the +youth who had given him such a surprise. + +Ben was running across the open ground at the top of his speed, and the +sentinel caught sight of him, leveled his musket, took a quick aim, and +fired. + +Crack, the shot rang out, and Ben heard the bullet go buzzing past his +ear. Had the bullet gone a few inches to the right it would have put an +end to his career as a patriot soldier and spy. + +Ben ran onward as swiftly as he could, and was soon out of musket-shot +range, but he heard sounds of loud and excited voices back at the fort. +He realized that he had caused a commotion within its walls, and thought +it likely that some of the British soldiers would emerge from the fort +and come in pursuit of him. + +And such proved to be the case. The gate was thrown open, and out came +about a score of redcoats and started on the track of Ben. They yelled +to him to stop and surrender, but of course he paid no attention to +them, but ran onward as fast as possible. He was not much alarmed, as he +was sure he could reach the edge of the forest before the redcoats could +get within musket-shot distance, and then he could evade his pursuers in +the underbrush and darkness, he felt certain. + +He was not long in reaching the desired haven, and he dashed in among +the trees, drawing a breath of relief as he did so, and slackened his +speed, somewhat, as he did not think it necessary to run so fast. He +could give the redcoats the slip, now that he was in among the trees. + +He was soon out of hearing of his pursuers, who doubtless did not follow +him very far into the forest. In less than an hour's time he was at the +patriot encampment, and had made his report to General Greene. + +The information he gave the general, about the size of the fort, and the +extent and thickness of the walls, was of considerable interest and +value, and the general thanked the youth for having secured the +information. + +"I hope to capture the fort in a few days," the general said. + + + + + CHAPTER XVIII + + Dick and the Panther + + +Dick Dare had no doubt that the animal in the pit with him was a +panther. He judged by the growl, which was stronger than would have been +the case had the animal been a wildcat. + +He felt that he was indeed in a serious predicament. Had he had his +pistols, or even a knife, he would have stood some chance to hold his +own against the animal, but he had no weapons of any kind. + +So he simply stood still, at one corner of the pit, and kept his eyes on +the two balls of fire. + +There was silence for a few moments, and then Dick saw the two red spots +move, and he was confident they were advancing toward him, slowly but +surely. + +Dick guessed that the animal had likely been but a short time in the +pit, and was not hungry, still he realized that he had before him a +dangerous antagonist. + +What should he do? What could he do? He did not feel that he could do +anything, but he was tired of standing still, and so he began moving +slowly along the wall, his back against it. + +When he had taken a few steps, his foot struck against something, and +feeling down, he found that it was a limb of a tree perhaps as large as +his arm. Instantly his heart gave a leap of delight. Likely this was a +limb that had been used by the person who dug the pit, to climb up out +of the pit on, after shooting an animal that he had trapped, and if Dick +could get the limb leaned up against the wall, he might be able to climb +out, though he would likely be attacked while trying to do so. + +He would try, however, and he lifted the limb, and leaned it against the +wall, at the corner, and at the same moment he heard the low, menacing +growl of the animal. He whirled about, quickly, and yelled "Scat," +waving his arms frantically. The animal slunk away, with a snarl of +fright. + +Then Dick turned, and seizing hold of the stick, began climbing with +desperate energy and swiftness. He expected every moment to feel the +claws of the animal, but did not, and to his delight he succeeded in +reaching the top of the pit and getting out on solid ground. + +He did not know how long he had been in the pit before regaining +consciousness, but guessed it was not long. + +He heard the growls of the animal and its footfalls as it went running +around the pit, but this did not worry Dick now. He was at a point the +animal could not reach, and safe from attack. + +Dick stood there a few moments, listening intently. He did not hear any +sounds to indicate the presence in the vicinity of any Indians, or of +his friend, Ben. + +Dick presently gave the signal whistle, the same as Ben had done when +searching for him, and listened intently, but heard no response. Again +he repeated the signal, with the same result, and he knew that Ben was +not within hearing. + +Dick pondered a few moments. What should he do? Which way should he go? +Should he return to Peaceful Valley, or should he go on toward +Ninety-Six. What would be Ben's course? + +After giving the matter considerable thought, Dick decided to continue +onward toward Ninety-Six. He believed that Ben would do the same, and he +was eager to find Tom, and was somewhat anxious regarding his fate. + +"Yes, I'll go on in the direction of Ninety-Six," murmured Dick. "Likely +Ben will do so, and I will meet him again, and if not, I may find Tom." + +So Dick set out through the forest, heading toward the west. He walked +steadily for two or three hours, and then, feeling tired, he lay down at +the foot of a tree and was soon asleep. + +When he awoke it was morning, he rose and looked about him. On all sides +was the wilderness, the timber being all around him. Nowhere were there +any signs of Indians. + +"I wish I could find a settler's home," murmured Dick. "I am feeling the +need of some food. Well, perhaps I may happen upon one, soon." + +Then he set out, still heading westward, and walked steadily onward an +hour or so, when he came to a little cabin in an open space in the +forest. + +"Good," thought Dick. "Now, I shall be able to get something to eat, +likely." + +Dick advanced and knocked on the door, which was opened a few moments +later by a tall, roughly-dressed man, who looked like a hunter and +trapper. + +"Good morning, sir," greeted Dick. "I would like to get something to +eat." + +"All right, stranger; come right in," was the reply. "Ye are welcome to +all the grub ye can eat, such as it is." + +"Thank you," said Dick, and he entered and took a seat, while his host +placed some meat and corn cakes on the rude table at one side. + +"Now set up here, and eat all ye want," said the man. + +Dick did so, and when he had talked with the man a few moments, he +learned that he was a hunter, but that he was a patriot, and the youth +learned that it was about forty miles to Ninety-Six. + +"If ye're going over in that part of the country, ye'll have to keep +your eyes open," said the hunter. "The redcoats and redskins both are +thick over thar. Only yesterday the savages caught a couple of young +fellows and were going to burn them at the stake. I was about an' with a +friendly Indian's aid crawled up just in time to cut loose their bonds +or they would be on the road to kingdom come before now." + +"My kind preserver," gasped Dick, "I thank you for myself and for Ben, +my comrade." + +Naturally there was a long talk, and Dick repeated time and again his +words of appreciation. Finally with a last grasp of the kindly hunter's +hand he took his departure. + +The man insisted on Dick taking a package of food with him, which the +youth did, and he was glad afterward that he did so, for he did not come +upon another cabin during that day, and would have had to go hungry, but +for the supply he had brought with him. + +He camped that night at a point which he judged was perhaps ten miles +from Fort Ninety-Six, and slept quietly till morning. + +He ate the last of the food the hunter had given him, and then set out +in the direction of Ninety-Six. + +About three hours later, he came to a wide open space, and looked with +interest at what he knew was Fort Ninety-Six, standing near the center +of an open space of goodly size. + +"There's Ninety-Six," murmured Dick, gazing at the fort eagerly. "I +wonder if Tom is a prisoner there?" + + + + + CHAPTER XIX + + The Settlers' Retreat + + +Tom Dare realized that he was indeed in great danger, for the rocks +would be as likely to strike him as not, if he accompanied the redcoats, +and it looked as if he would have to accompany them. + +Slowly the time rolled away, and when the British reinforcements, to the +number of about seventy-five, reached there, it was decided to start at +once for the valley. + +They could reach there easily before evening, they felt certain. So they +set out, with Tom among them. + +As they entered upon the path that led along the foot of the mountain, +Tom looked upward quickly, as if expecting to see some of the stones +come rolling down upon them. + +If the settlers did not know he was with the redcoats, they would soon +begin rolling the stones down, and Tom did not like the idea of being +there among the British. + +They continued onward perhaps two hundred yards, and then Tom looked +upward again, an apprehensive expression on his face, and one of the +soldiers, noticing this, glanced upward a moment later, a look of +curiosity on his face. The look quickly changed to one of terror, +however, and he yelled, loudly: "Look out for the rock, comrades! Be +ready to dodge!" and he pointed up the mountainside. + +His comrades, and Tom also, glanced upward and saw a big rock coming +bounding down the steep descent. It was now not more than one hundred +yards distant, and coming with the speed of the wind. Down it came, +leaping, bounding, rolling, and the next moment it struck in the midst +of the soldiers, knocking a couple of them down, and causing the others +to tumble over one another in their attempts to get out of the stone's +course. + +"So that is what you were looking upward for, eh?" cried the redcoat who +had noted Tom's action and who had glanced upward and seen the rock +coming. "The rebels have piled stones along the top of the precipice, +comrades, and they'll annihilate our party if we try to make our way +along this path to the valley." + +"There comes another rock!" yelled another soldier at that moment, and +there was a lively scrambling to get out of the rock's course. + +They managed to keep from getting hit, this time, but realized that if +they continued onward along the path, they would be crushed and knocked +to pieces by the stones, and so the lieutenant gave the order to +retreat, and the soldiers hastened back along the path, to the point +they had left only a short time before. + +Here they paused, and held a council. It was decided to ascend to the +top of the precipice and attack the settlers there, if they stood their +ground and showed fight. + +"We can reach the valley by going that way," said the lieutenant. + +So they set out, and made their way slowly up the steep ascent leading +to the top of the mountain. Tom was taken with them, but he did not mind +it so much, now, for he did not fear the bullets from the settlers' +rifles as much as he did the rocks. + +Presently the party of redcoats were almost to the top of the mountain, +and suddenly there came the sound of rifle-shots, and then the bullets +came whizzing among them. One or two of the redcoats were wounded, but +they pressed onward as rapidly as the rough conditions would admit, and +soon caught sight of the settlers, who had taken up positions behind the +rocks. + +The British soldiers opened fire, and then advanced, slowly and +steadily, and the settlers, knowing that they could not offer successful +resistance to such a strong force, turned and retreated hastily. + +They kept on retiring till they came to where there were a lot of large +boulders, and here they stopped to reload their rifles, and waited for +the British to come within range again. + +The lieutenant, observing this action, placed Tom Dare right in front, +so that a volley could not be fired without hitting the patriot youth. + +The settlers must have recognized Tom by this time, for they turned and +hastened onward again, having evidently decided not to fire the volley +as planned. + +"That scheme worked all right," the lieutenant said, with a smile. "We +will simply keep you in front, Tom Dare, and will thus be able to walk +into the valley in safety. I am glad that we got hold of you." + +But Tom wasn't glad. By permitting himself to fall into the hands of the +enemy, he had spoiled the plan to roll rocks down on the redcoats, and +had made it impossible for the settlers to fire upon the British without +being in danger of killing him. He wished that he could do something to +change this state of affairs. + +But what could he do? He was a prisoner, with redcoats all about him, +and he did not see how he was to do anything to help the settlers. + +He thought of trying the plan of falling down the precipice, as he had +done once before, but the precipice in this instance was too steep. He +would surely be killed, as it would be a fall of at least one hundred +and fifty feet. + +He decided that there was nothing that he could do, and so he walked +onward at the head of the party, though he did not feel very happy. + +The settlers did not stop again. Evidently they did not wish to take the +chances of killing or wounding Tom by firing at the British, and had +made up their minds to retreat to their village in the valley. + +They moved considerably faster than did the redcoats, and Tom, who +shrewdly guessed that the settlers would like to have as much time as +possible, for the purpose of removing their household goods to a safe +place in the mountains, walked slowly pretending lameness, which did not +seem unreasonable and thus kept the redcoats from advancing, for a time +at least, at a fast pace. + +They kept telling him to increase his speed, but he did not hasten his +steps and presently a couple of soldiers seized him by the arms, at an +order from the lieutenant, and he was made to walk faster. + +They went on, and finally reached the entrance to the valley. Then they +moved faster, as the ground was level and the walking easier. They did +not see the settlers, so judged they had already reached their homes in +the village. + +"Likely the rebels intend carrying some of their household goods and +valuables up into the mountains," said the lieutenant. "We must try to +get there in time to prevent them from doing that." + +So they hastened, and closer and closer to the village they drew. +Finally they were at the edge of the village, and all was quiet. They +did not see any signs of the settlers. + +"They're gone," said the lieutenant. + +Then the redcoats scattered and entered the houses, and searched for +valuables, but found nothing of much use, the settlers having indeed +taken pretty much everything out of the houses. + +"They've gone up into the mountains," said the lieutenant. "Let's fire +these houses, and then follow." + +With cries of satisfaction, for they were angered by being cheated out +of their plunder, as they looked at it, the soldiers set fire to the +houses, and soon the village was going up in flames. + +"Now head up into the mountains, men," said the lieutenant. "We'll run +the rebels to earth and help ourselves to their valuables, anyhow." + +The soldiers hastened into the forest, and began ascending the mountain. +The ground was rough, but they made pretty good headway. They spread +out, fan-shape, so as to cover as much ground as through this alignment +they could obtain, and looked eagerly in all directions for the patriot +settlers. + +"They must have a hiding-place somewhere up the mountain," said the +lieutenant. "Make a thorough search." + +But, although they searched till nightfall, they did not find the +hiding-place of the settlers, and they finally went back down to the +village, or rather, where it had stood, for the houses were now burned +to the ground, and there camped for the night. + +And next morning they set out on the return to Ninety-Six, reaching the +fort about the middle of the afternoon. + +Tom was placed in the guard-house, and the lieutenant went to Major +Cruger and reported the result of the expedition. The Major expressed +satisfaction at the burning of the settlers' houses, but was sorry they +had managed to make their escape and carry their household goods with +them. + + + + + CHAPTER XX + + Dick Appears + + +The morning after the patriot force reached the vicinity of Fort +Ninety-Six and went into camp, who should appear but Dick Dare! He went +at once to the headquarters tent, and was given a cordial greeting by +General Greene. + +"We were in hopes that you would turn up here," said the general. "Where +have you been, my boy?" + +"Is Ben Foster here?" asked Dick. + +"Yes," was the reply. + +"Then he told you, doubtless, that we got separated while running from +some Indians." + +"Yes." + +"Well, I supposed that he would go on toward Ninety-Six, and so I did +that." + +"Ah. And have you learned anything of importance?" + +"Nothing regarding the fort, as yet. But I have learned where my brother +Tom is." + +"That is good. Where is he?" + +"A prisoner in the fort." + +"Indeed?" + +"Yes, sir. He was captured by some British soldiers and brought to the +fort, and pretended to join the force. He was sent with a foraging +force, to attack a patriot village up in the mountains, and he managed +to get away and reach the settlement ahead of the redcoats and warn the +settlers, and they managed to get to a hiding-place up in the mountains, +with their household goods, but the British burned the houses. I was +there, and saw the settlers, and they told me about the affair. They +said that Tom was recaptured, while reconnoitering, and that the British +took him to Ninety-Six. When we capture the fort, we can free him." + +"I think we shall be able to capture the fort. Ben Foster made a +reconnoitering trip last night, and learned considerable about the +strength of the walls. I believe we can batter them down with the +field-pieces." + +"I hope so. Is there anything you wish me to do?" + +"You may reconnoiter and gain all the information possible. There is no +hurry, and by taking our time, we may be able to make the capture of the +fort more certain." + +"I will do my best to secure information that will be of value to you, +sir." + +Then Dick saluted and withdrew, and was soon with Ben Foster, at the +quarters occupied by Captain Morgan's company. + +They shook hands, and then Ben asked: "What became of you after we got +separated, Dick? I hunted around quite a good deal for you, and +signalled, but you did not answer." + +"Likely if you were near me when you uttered any of the signals, it was +while I was insensible, and I did not hear you, of course." Then Dick +explained that he had fallen into a pit that had been dug as a trap to +capture wild animals, and that he had fallen so hard as to knock him +senseless. And then he told of there being a panther in the pit, and Ben +uttered an exclamation. + +"Phew!" he murmured, "that wasn't very pleasant, was it?" + +"No, indeed," said Dick. "But I managed to climb up a limb that I found +there, and make my escape, and then I headed toward Ninety-Six." + +Then he told Ben the same story that he had told General Greene, and Ben +was glad to know that Tom was alive and probably well, though a prisoner +in Fort Ninety-Six. Full particulars he gave too, of the kindly hunter +to whom they owed their life and opportunity to escape from the savages. + +"We'll have Tom out of there before very long," said Ben, reverting to +the problem at hand. + +"General Greene said for me to reconnoiter," said Dick, "and I guess +that I will take a look at the fort to-day, and then visit it to-night." + +"There isn't much that you can learn," said Ben. "I found out the +strength of the stockade-walls, and that is about all there is to learn, +from the outside. If you could get within the walls, you could secure +definite information regarding its strength, but you can't do that." + +"I suppose not," said Dick. + +A little while after luncheon, Dick left the encampment and made his way +in the direction of Fort Ninety-Six. He reached the edge of the timber, +presently, and stopped and gazed across at the fort. He could not +venture out into the open ground without being seen by the sentinels, of +course, and so he did not advance farther. + +He made his way along the edge of the forest quite a distance, however, +and sized up the fort from different directions. Then he turned and +walked slowly along through the woods. + +He was heading for the encampment, and when about halfway there, he +crossed a rude wagon-road, which wound this way and that among the +trees, and Dick suddenly caught sight of a man approaching, driving a +team and wagon. + +Dick had crossed the road at the edge of the timber, and knew it led to +the fort, and now he stopped and waited till the wagon approached, when +he stepped out and stopped the man, who looked like a typical settler of +the vicinity. + +"Where are you going?" queried Dick. + +"To the fort," was the reply. + +"What for?" + +"I'm takin' some meat an' vegertables thar to sell to ther sojers," was +the reply. + +"Ah!" exclaimed Dick. He had been struck by an idea. "Say," he remarked, +eyeing the man searchingly, "are you a king's man, or are you a patriot? +Or are you neutral?" + +"Wal," was the reply, "I kain't say thet I'm a king's man, but ther +redcoats pay me well fur my garden truck. Why d'ye ask?" + +"I'll tell you why," said Dick, eagerly. "I wish to enter the fort, and +why can't I go with you? They'll not be suspicious if I'm with you, and +that will give me a chance to get a look at the inside of the fort." + +"Ye're a patriot, then, hey?" + +"Yes." + +"All right Ye can go inter ther fort with me, an' can help me sell ther +truck to ther sojers, an' ye can look aroun' while ye're doin' thet." + +"Thank you. That will be very kind of you." + +Then Dick climbed up on the seat beside the man, who drove onward and +half an hour later they were at the entrance to the stockade, the big +gate swung open, and the man drove into the enclosure. + +Dick, seated on the seat beside the man, looked around him with eager +interest, but with all evidence of eagerness carefully kept from +showing. He seemed careless and indifferent. + +Then the farmer began selling the meat and vegetables, and Dick helped +him, and all the time he was sizing up the interior of the fort as best +he could. + + + + + CHAPTER XXI + + In the Fort + + +Dick had not noticed the fact, but while he was helping the farmer hand +out the meat and vegetables to the others, a soldier had been standing +near, gazing keenly and searchingly at him. + +Suddenly a low exclamation escaped the lips of the soldier, and he +turned to one of his comrades and said something, and they conversed a +few moments, after which the soldier spoken to hastened into the fort. +Presently he returned, accompanied by a soldier wearing a captain's +uniform. + +The captain advanced to the side of the wagon, and looking up at Dick, +said: "Who are you, young man?" + +"I am working for Mr. Boggs," replied Dick. + +"What's your name?" + +"Dick." + +"Dick what?" + +"Dick Rogers." + +The captain pointed a finger at the young patriot, and exclaimed in a +stern, threatening voice: "You are Dick Dare, the rebel spy!" + +Dick had expected something of the kind, after seeing the threatening +look on the captain's face, but at the same time it rather took him +aback. He gazed steadily at the officer, however, and said: + +"Why do you think I am Dick Dare, sir? And who is he?" + +"Why do I think you are Dick Dare? Because one of the soldiers here, was +stationed up in Virginia a few months ago, and saw you there, and he +recognized you and told me who you were. And now, you are my prisoner. +Climb down out of that wagon." + +On driving into the enclosure, the farmer had made a circle, and the +horses were now standing with their heads toward the gate, which was +still open. Dick had noted this fact, and when he heard the captain's +command, a daring plan came into his mind. He would attempt to drive out +of the enclosure and make his escape. + +So he quickly grabbed up the lines and whip, and yelling to the horses, +and giving them a couple of cuts with the whip, Dick sent the team out +of the enclosure on the gallop, knocking down and running over two of +the soldiers, who at the command from the captain had tried to stop the +horses. + +The farmer had been thrown down in the bottom of the wagon by the +suddenness of the start, and he lay still, for he thought it likely that +there would be bullets flying soon. + +And in thinking thus he was correct, for the captain, wild with rage, +gave the command for his soldiers to fire, and they did so, the bullets +whizzing around Dick, who was still plying the whip and yelling to the +horses. + +On across the open ground dashed the team, and the soldiers came running +forth from the enclosure like bees from a hive, and many of them came +running after the wagon, but could not gain on it. + +Dick drove on, and presently the wagon was in among the trees. Here the +road wound and twisted, and the progress was slower than when in the +open ground, but still they went at a pretty rapid rate. + +The soldiers gave up the pursuit, and then Dick slowed the horses to a +walk, and turned to the farmer, and smiling rather grimly, said: "I am +sorry to have had to take matters in my hands, Mr. Boggs, but the +redcoats would have captured me, otherwise." + +"Oh, that's all right," was the reply. "I had sold most all my truck, +ennyhow." + +"But the redcoats will have it in for you, after this, won't they?" + +"I guess not. I'll tell 'em I didn't know ye was a rebel." + +"That will be a good idea." + +"Yes." + +The farmer now took his seat beside Dick, and took the lines, and drove, +and presently Dick said: "I guess I'll leave you, now, Mr. Boggs. This +is about the nearest point to the patriot encampment." + +"All right, Dick Dare." + +Dick leaped to the ground, shook hands with the farmer, thanked him for +his kindness in doing what he had, and then said good-by. His mission +ended he set out through the woods in the direction of the encampment. + +When he reached there, he went to the headquarters tent, and was given a +cordial greeting by General Greene. + +"Have you been reconnoitering the fort, Dick?" the general asked. + +"Yes, General Greene," was the reply. "And I have been within the +stockade-walls." + +The general started and looked surprised. "How did you manage that, my +boy?" he asked. + +Dick explained, then, the general listening with interest, and when Dick +had described the interior of the enclosure, and the fort, the officer +nodded, and said: "You have done pretty well, Dick. A knowledge of the +interior arrangements at the fort is worth considerable." + +"So I thought, sir, and that is the reason I was so eager to see the +interior of the fort." + +After he had asked a few questions, General Greene told Dick he might +go, but that any further information he could secure would be +appreciated. + +"I'll reconnoiter the fort to-night," said Dick. "I may be able to learn +something further." + +Dick then rejoined his comrades, and told them the story of his +adventure at the fort. They listened with interest, and uttered +exclamations of wonder. + +"Sure an' they came moighty near to grabbin' ye, thot toime, Dick," said +Tim Murphy. + +"Yah, dot is so," nodded Fritz Schmockenburg. + +"But I was able to get a look at the interior of the fort," said Dick, +"and that was worth while." + +"Yes, indeed," said Ben Foster. "Of course, you saw nothing of Tom?" + +"No. If he is there, he was in a building somewhere, and so I would not +have seen him." + +They talked about the adventure quite a while, and were agreed that Dick +had acted in a daring manner in venturing into the fort. + +"That was the only way I could secure any information regarding the +arrangements of the buildings within the enclosure," said Dick. + +After supper, Dick again set out. He made his way at a moderate pace, +and finally reached the edge of the open ground shortly after dark. He +stopped just within the edge of the forest and looked across at the fort +for a few minutes. Then he began making his way toward the fort, slowly. + +It was a rather dark night, and he could just make out the fort, looking +like a faint shadow, and he felt certain that the sentinels could not +see him. + +He was at the wall of the fort in about fifteen or twenty minutes, and +began making his way along it, feeling for a place where he could climb +to the top, as Ben said he had done. + +He had nearly reached the corner of the enclosure when he heard a +commotion within the enclosure. The sound of excited voices came to him, +and the clatter of weapons, and then he heard a noise above his head. He +looked upward quickly, and as he did so, a human form came over the top +of the wall and dropped down, striking Dick and knocking him to the +ground. + + + + + CHAPTER XXII + + Tom Makes a Discovery + + +Tom Dare did not like the idea of being a prisoner in the hands of the +British, but he was in what seemed to be a pretty strongly-built +building, and his chances of getting out seemed pretty slim. And even if +he were to get out of the building, he would have difficulty in getting +out of the enclosure. + +But Tom as we know was a determined youth, and he made up his mind to do +all he could to make his escape. It was not until about dark of the +evening on which Dick had come to the fort, however, that Tom discovered +that there was a loose board in the floor, and when he had lifted the +board, he discovered that there was a considerable opening underneath +the floor. + +He had already had his supper and did not think that anyone would enter +the room, so he crawled down through the opening, replaced the board, +and worked his way along till he came to the edge of the building. Here +he found that an embankment of earth had been piled up against the side +of the building, and he proceeded to dig through this. It was slow work, +but he persevered, and finally he managed to get a large enough hole +made so that he could crawl through. + +This he did, and presently stood erect beside the building. He looked +around him, sizing up the situation carefully. It was already pretty +dark, and Tom could not see very well, but this would be more to his +advantage than to the advantage of the sentinels, for they could not see +him unless they were close to him. + +Tom slipped away from the building, and presently reached the wall, and +located a set of steps that the soldiers used in climbing to the +platform on the inside of the wall. He climbed these steps, and reached +the platform, and at that moment he heard footsteps advancing, and the +form of the sentinel loomed up indistinctly. + +Tom realized that he was about to be discovered. What should he do? He +did not like the idea of being recaptured, and discovery and capture +seemed unavoidable and indeed imminent. + +He stood there, hesitating, only a few moments, and then suddenly he +heard an exclamation from the sentinel, who asked: "Who is there?" + +There was no time to lose, if he were to escape. Tom realized this, and +did the first thing that occurred to him, which was to climb to the top +of the wall and leap to the ground. + +He dropped down outside the enclosure, but instead of striking the +ground, he struck something which he realized was a human form. And with +the realization came the belief that the person in question was a +British soldier. + +With this belief in his mind, he leaped to his feet and started to run +away as fast as possible, while from above came the command: "Halt! +Stop, or I'll fire!" + +Then to his hearing came the words, "Is that you, Tom?" It was the voice +of his brother Dick, and Tom replied joyously: + +"Yes, Dick." + +Crack! It was a musket-shot. The sentinel, hearing the voices, and +thinking, perhaps, that an attack was about to be made, fired, as much +to give the alarm as with the expectation of hitting the person that had +escaped from the enclosure. + +The bullet did not hit Tom, who had stopped, and as soon as he was +joined by Dick, they hastened onward, and were quickly at a point of +safety and out of range. There they paused and stood listening. + +There was considerable noise and excitement at the fort. Lights showed +in the upper room of the fort, and presently the gate opened and it was +evident that some soldiers had come forth, with the intention of +pursuing the fugitive. + +"I guess we had better go in the direction of the patriot encampment, +Tom," decided Dick. "Those redcoats will be here in a few minutes, and +it will be best for us to be somewhere else." + +They made their way through the forest, and told their stories as they +went. By the time they had finished relating their remarkable +experiences they were at the encampment, and Tom accompanied Dick to the +headquarters tent, for he had a better knowledge regarding the interior +of the fort than Dick. He had been in all the rooms when he was supposed +to be a member of the British force, and the information he gave about +the building was received with pleasure by General Greene. + +Then, having given all the information in their possession, Dick and +Tom, went to their quarters, where Tom was given a cordial greeting by +his comrades. + +Next morning General Greene called a council of war. When the officers +were all in the tent, the general told them that he had made up his mind +to begin the attack that morning, if the idea met with the approval of +the officers. + +There was not much discussion, for the members of the staff were all +eager to advance on Fort Ninety-Six and attack the fort. As soon as it +had been decided as to the details, the soldiers broke camp and advanced +slowly, dragging the field-pieces with them. + +When they reached the edge of the wood, they halted and planted the +field-pieces for effective use and began firing on the fort. + +The little six-pound balls did not make much impression on the heavy +logs, however, and it seemed doubtful if they would damage the +stockade-walls very much. + +This firing was kept up pretty steadily, but did not have much effect, +and it was decided to wait till nightfall, and try to set fire to the +fort. + +Slowly the hours rolled away, and when evening came, the soldiers began +gathering dry wood, with the intention of carrying it and placing it +against the wall, and then when it was set on fire, there would be a big +blaze, by the light of which redcoats could be shot if they attempted to +put out the fire. + +Luckily it was a dark night, and the soldiers were enabled to carry the +wood and pile it against the walls without being seen, though they had +to exercise great care to avoid discovery. + +Among those who were most active in this work were Dick and Tom Dare and +Ben Foster, and they were eager to see the fire started, for they hoped +it would result in the capture of the fort. + +Slowly the work went on, and at last a sufficient amount of wood had +been piled against the wall, and now the next move was to set fire to +the wood. + +This would be a very dangerous undertaking, as the moment the fire was +started, the person or persons starting it would be revealed by the +light of the flames, and would be in danger of being shot before they +could get out of range. + +General Greene did not like to name anyone for this dangerous work, and +so he called for volunteers. A dozen of the soldiers, Dick and Tom Dare +and Ben Foster among them, stepped forward at once, and offered their +services. + +"I expected that there would be plenty who would be willing to risk +getting shot in order to render a service to the patriot Cause," said +the general. "But, how shall I choose from among you?" + +"By lot," suggested a soldier. And this was done, and the result was +that Dick Dare and Tim Murphy were the ones who were to venture up to +the wall of the fort and set the fire. + +"Sure an' we are the byes phwat can do thot work, all roight, Dick," +said Tim. + +"We will do the best we can to make a success of setting the wood on +fire," replied Dick. + +They provided themselves with flint and steel and tinder, and then set +out in the direction of the fort. + +Slowly they made their way to the point where the wood was piled against +the wall, and, reaching there, they crouched down, got out their flint +and steel and tinder, and got ready to start the fire. + +[Illustration: Suddenly these sparks caught in the tinder.] + +Slowly and carefully they began striking the flint with the steel, and +with each blow they expected to hear a commotion from the sentinels on +the platform along the wall. + +Click, click, click. With each click little sparks flew from the flint, +and suddenly these sparks caught in the tinder, which blazed upward +quickly, revealing the two brave patriots who were thus risking their +lives for the good of the patriot Cause. + +The light from the tinder was seen by the sentinels above, and the next +moment there was a great outcry, and the sentinels, looking over and +catching sight of the two patriots, who were now running away from the +fort as fast as possible, opened fire, and several musket-shots were +fired at the fugitives. + +Luckily, however, none of the shots were effective, the bullets going +wide of the mark, and Dick and Tim kept on running and were soon in the +timber and among their comrades. + +Then the patriots watched the growing fire eagerly, and the soldiers +that had been instructed to shoot the redcoats if they tried to +extinguish the fire, waited eagerly for the attempt to be made, their +muskets held in readiness for instant use. + +Then suddenly the gate of the fort was thrown open and out rushed a +large number of British soldiers, bringing water with which to put out +the fire. + +And as they appeared, the patriot soldiers opened fire, and a rain of +bullets was poured in among the British. + +Crash! roar! Loudly the volleys rang out, and yells of pain and rage +went up from the lips of the redcoats struck by the bullets. + +And then to the rattle of the musketry was added the boom-boom of the +field-pieces. + + + + + CHAPTER XXIII + + The Siege + + +Doubtless the patriots would have been able to keep the redcoats from +putting out the fire, and it would have burned the stockade-wall and +perhaps the fort, but a thunder-storm came up just as the affair was at +its height, and a heavy rain beating down on the fire, put it out. + +The patriots, realizing that it would be useless to try to set the fort +afire when the wood was wet, returned to their encampment, and made +themselves as comfortable as they could for the night. + +Next morning work was resumed, but no very rapid progress was made. They +kept pounding the stockade-wall with six-pound cannon balls, but they +did not seem to make much impression. Nor did General Greene deem it +wise to try to storm the fort, for the structure was too strong to break +through, and the wall was too high to scale. + +It began to look as if the siege was to be a long one, and the patriots +settled down to take it as easy as possible, and make a thorough job of +the affair. They were determined that they would capture the fort sooner +or later. + +When the siege had been going on four or five days, a patriot settler +came to the encampment, and told General Greene that a British force was +coming to reinforce Fort Ninety-Six, and it was about fifty miles +distant, and coming from the coast. General Sumpter had sent the patriot +to warn General Greene. + +The general called a council of the members of his staff, and then they +questioned the patriot closely. + +"How long will it take the British to reach here?" asked General Greene. + +"About three days, I think," was the reply. + +"And how strong a force is it?" + +"The man that brought the news to General Sumpter said there was about +five hundred soldiers in the force." + +"That number, in addition to the force that Major Cruger already has in +the fort will make his army too strong for us," said General Greene. + +"We must capture the fort before the reinforcements get here," said +Captain Morgan. + +"Yes, so we must," agreed the general. "That is, if we can." + +"We are weakening the stockade-walls," said another officer. "I believe +that in another day of pounding the wall with six-pound shots we will be +able to make an opening, and then we can storm the works." + +"We will try to force our way into the enemy's works, anyhow," said +General Greene. "We will get to work early in the morning, and keep at +work till we succeed." + +The patriots were up early next morning, and soon after breakfast the +bombardment of the fort with the six-pounders was begun, and was kept up +steadily throughout the day, but when evening came the wall still stood +firm. + +The patriots began to believe that they would not be able to break down +the wall and get at the enemy. + +Still, they were determined, and next day they worked as hard as ever, +but when evening came the wall still stood firm. The patriots were +disappointed, but made preparations to continue the work as +energetically as ever on the morrow. + +After an early breakfast next morning, they went at it, and kept the +field-pieces busy till noon, and then as the wall still withstood the +fire from the six-pounders, General Greene began figuring on storming +the fort anyway. + +"The British reinforcements may get here this afternoon," he said, "and +we haven't much time in which to work. We must try to effect an entrance +at the point where we have been trying to cause a breach with the +field-pieces." + +The other officers agreed with him, and so about the middle of the +afternoon an attempt was made to storm the enemy's works. For a while +there was a desperate battle, and the patriots came very near effecting +an entrance, but finally they were repulsed, and had to retreat to the +edge of the forest. + +It was now getting along toward evening, and the dead and wounded +patriots were removed under a flag of truce, the dead being buried and +the wounded taken care of. + +Dick Dare had gone to General Greene as soon as the patriot force had +retreated, and he suggested that he should go and reconnoiter and see if +the British reinforcements were anywhere near, and the general had told +him to go ahead. + +"That is a good idea," he said. "The British may be near here now." + +Dick set out, and made his way eastward at a rapid pace, and kept onward +till nightfall, when he stopped at a farmhouse and asked if any redcoats +had been seen in that vicinity. + +The settler said no, and Dick went on his way, but when night came, he +had not seen any signs of the British. + +"They are not far away, I am certain," was his thought. "Well, I'll keep +on till I get them located. They will be in camp, likely, somewhere near +here." + +A few minutes later he caught sight of the glimmer of a campfire in the +distance, and he advanced slowly and cautiously, and when about one +hundred and fifty yards from the camp, he paused and stood there, gazing +at the scene with interest. + +It was the British force, sure enough, and when he had sized it up +closely, he decided that there was nearer one thousand men than five +hundred. + +"Our force could not hope to capture Fort Ninety-Six after this force +gets there," he murmured. "And this force will reach there easily by +noon to-morrow." + +Having sized up the British force, Dick turned and made his way back in +the direction of the patriot encampment, reaching there about half-past +ten o'clock. He went direct to the tent occupied by General Greene, and +found the general still up. + +"I found the encampment of the British, sir," said Dick, after +exchanging greetings. + +"Ah, indeed. How far from here is the encampment, Dick?" + +"About ten or twelve miles." + +"How strong a force have they?" was the next question. + +"There is nearer one thousand men than five hundred, sir." + +"Ah. Then the force is stronger than the messenger thought." + +"Yes, sir." + +The general asked a number of questions, all of which Dick answered, and +then the youth went to the quarters occupied by his company, and told +Tom and Ben about the British. + +"That means that we will have a big battle to-morrow," said Tom, his +voice trembling with eagerness. + +"Likely," said Dick. + +"But they will outnumber us greatly," said Ben. + +"Yes," said Dick, "but we will make a strong fight, and if we could +manage to capture the fort before the reinforcements get here, I believe +we could hold it." + +"I wish we could capture the fort," said Tom. + +Then they lay down and were soon sound asleep. + + + + + CHAPTER XXIV + + Lively Work + + +The patriot force was up very early next morning, and had eaten +breakfast before daylight, and as soon as they could see, they began the +attack on Fort Ninety-Six. + +They fired with the field-pieces as rapidly as possible, and about the +middle of the forenoon they charged upon the fort and made another +attempt to force an entrance, but the British fought desperately, and +the patriot force was driven back. + +And soon afterward word was brought by a messenger that had been sent to +keep watch for the coming British reinforcements, to the effect that the +force in question was close at hand. + +It would be useless to try to attack the fort again, and so General +Greene ordered that they advance, take up as strong a position as +possible, and resist with persistence the approaching force of British. + +The patriot soldiers made their way to the top of a sort of ridge about +half a mile east of Fort Ninety-Six, and here they stationed themselves +behind trees and awaited the coming of the enemy. + +Presently they caught sight of the redcoats approaching, but it was seen +a few moments later that it was only an advance guard. The redcoats had +heard the sound of the battle, and were cautious, and had sent a +reconnoitering party ahead, so as to avoid an ambush. + +The patriots, knowing they would be discovered before the main force +reached the spot, opened fire on the party as soon as it came in range, +and several of the redcoats were dropped, dead or wounded. + +The rest beat a hasty retreat, and rejoined the main force, and reported +the presence of the patriot force at the top of the ridge. The party +came to a stop, and the officers held a council. + +Two or three of the officers were for making an attack, but the others +thought differently, and so it was decided to make a detour and go +around the patriots. + +This was done, but the patriots learned of the movement, through Dick, +who had followed the reconnoitering party and kept watch on the British, +and the patriots managed to reach a point from which they could fire on +the British as they passed, and killed and wounded a few. + +The redcoats returned the fire, but did not stop to show fight. They +kept onward at as fast a pace as possible, until they reached the fort, +which they entered, and they received a hearty welcome from Major +Cruger, who had begun to think that he would have to surrender the fort. + +The patriots went into camp about a mile from Fort Ninety-Six, and it +was decided to wait and see what the British would do. + +"I believe that we could hold this position, here on the top of this +ridge," said General Greene. "And I am in favor of staying and giving +them one battle, at any rate." + +The other officers agreed with him in his view of the matter, and so +they put in the rest of the day, strengthening their position by +throwing up earthworks. + +When this had been finished, the patriots settled down to take it easy +and await some move on the part of the British. + +Dick and Tom and Ben were stationed near the fort, to keep watch and +report any move the enemy might make, and General Greene felt that his +force would be able to make a good showing, as the patriot youths would +send him word if the British emerged and started to come toward the camp +of the patriots. + +No such move was made that day, however, nor during the night, and the +patriots had an opportunity to get rested up, after their hard work +during the siege. It was a privilege appreciated by both officers and +men. + +Next morning, however, the British came forth from the fort, and began +to advance toward the point where the patriot force had taken up its +position. + +They advanced slowly, and Dick sent word by Tom that the redcoats were +coming, and General Greene began making ready to receive the enemy. + +Dick and Ben moved back slowly, till they came to the patriot position, +and then they informed General Greene of the nearness of the British, +who put in an appearance a few minutes later. + +The British made an attack, advancing swiftly and firing as they came. +They charged up the slope, toward the patriot position, but the +patriots, crouching in the ditch, with the earthwork before them, were +in a protected position, and as soon as the redcoats were within range, +they opened fire. + +The battle was on, and a lively battle it was, for a while. The rattle +of the musketry and pistols was loud, and the yells of pain from the +wounded British soldiers added to the din. The patriots were not injured +much, because the bullets from the enemy's weapons did not penetrate the +earthworks. + +The British made a desperate attempt to enter the encampment and capture +the patriot force, but they failed, and finally retreated, taking their +dead and wounded with them. + +The patriots were very well satisfied with the result of the battle, but +they realized that they might not be successful again, and so General +Greene called a council and asked the officers if they did not think it +best to begin a retreat. + +The officers said they favored retreating, as the British were now too +strong for them, and so that evening, after supper was over and the +soldiers had rested a while, they broke camp and started on the march +toward the east. + +They marched onward till about midnight, and then they stopped and went +into camp. They were far enough away from the British, so that they did +not fear an attack, but there might be Indians around, though hardly in +strong enough force to make much trouble. + +The patriots did not break camp next morning till rather late, and they +had just got started, when a British force was seen approaching from the +direction of Fort Ninety-Six. + +"They are coming in pursuit," said General Greene. + +This was indeed the case, and during that day there was almost a +constant exchange of shots between the British and the patriots. + +A large party of Indians put in an appearance, also, and aided the +British in hindering the marching of the patriots as much as possible. + +The redskins were so good at concealing themselves behind trees that it +was difficult to injure them, and they did considerable damage. + +That night the patriot force went into camp on the top of a knoll and +made its position as strong as possible. Double the usual number of +sentinels were stationed, and it would not be possible for the British +to take them by surprise. + +The British did not make an attack that night, however, but instead +encircled the encampment of the patriots, and when morning came, the +patriots found that they could not proceed, unless they fought their way +through the British lines. + +What to do was the question. If they remained, they would probably +sooner or later be captured, as the British force was more than twice as +strong as their own, and to try to break through the enemy's lines would +be to cause the loss of many patriot lives. + +It was decided, at a council, to remain on the knoll and hold the +British in check as long as possible. + +"If we can get word to General Sumpter, he will come to our assistance," +said General Greene, and he summoned Dick Dare and asked him if he were +willing to make the attempt to slip through the British lines, after +nightfall, that evening, and carry a message to General Sumpter. + +As the readers of the Dare Boys stories know, and as they will see by +reading the next volume, entitled, "The Dare Boys With La Fayette," Dick +Dare was always ready to attempt any feat, no matter how dangerous, if +it would benefit the patriot cause, so now he said promptly that he +would make the attempt. + +The British did not make a strong attack, that day, but contented +themselves with firing at the patriots whenever they caught sight of +one. The patriots returned the fire, and thus the day passed, and +evening came. + +And as soon as it was dark, Dick Dare started on his perilous +expedition, and worked his way slowly and cautiously through the British +lines. He had selected the weakest point of the line for his attempt, +and he succeeded in getting through, though he was discovered by a +sentinel as he was hastening away, and was fired at. He ran swiftly, +however, and although he was pursued, he managed to escape in the +darkness. + +He had received instructions as to the whereabouts of Sumpter, from the +man that had brought the news of the coming of the British force, and so +he did not have a great deal of difficulty in finding Sumpter. + +When Dick told Sumpter that the patriot force under General Greene was +surrounded by a superior force of British and that he needed assistance, +Sumpter said that he would go to the assistance of the patriot party at +once. + +He set out, with his force, consisting of about five hundred men, and +reached the vicinity of the encampment of the patriot force about the +middle of the afternoon of the next day. + +He advanced and attacked the British with great energy, and they, taken +by surprise, were thrown into great disorder. Then the patriot force on +the knoll charged out upon the British, and added to the confusion, and +for a while there raged about as fierce a battle as one would expect to +see. + +The British tried to rally and hold their ground, but could not do so, +and finally they broke and fled at the top of their speed, pursued by +the patriots, who were glad to turn the tables on the British. + +The British continued on in the direction of Fort Ninety-Six, and it +seemed evident that they did not intend to linger in the vicinity of the +patriots, now that they had a strong force. + +Generals Greene and Sumpter held a council, and after considerable +discussion, decided not to follow the enemy and try to capture Fort +Ninety-Six. + +Instead they joined forces and went to another part of South Carolina, +where the redcoats and Indians were causing the patriot settlers a lot +of trouble, and made it so hot for the British and Tories and Indians +that they were glad to cease operations and head in the direction of +Fort Ninety-Six. + +The patriots were well satisfied with their work. They had stopped most +of the work of plundering by redcoats, Tories and Indians, and were +ready to start to make it lively for other gangs of Tories and Indians, +in other parts of the country. + +Dick and Tom Dare, and Ben Foster, having gotten through the campaign +without being wounded, were well pleased with their part in the +campaign, and were eager for further adventures. + +"I like the excitement of battling with the British," said Tom, as they +sat in camp, at evening, and talked of the exciting adventures they had +gone through in the past few weeks. "I hope we will soon get started on +another series of adventures just as exciting." + +"I don't like fighting for the sake of the excitement of the fight," +said Dick; "but I am always glad to be fighting when it is to be for the +benefit and good of the patriot Cause." + +"That is the way I look at the matter," said Ben. "I shall be glad when +the war ends, so far as I am concerned." + +"And so shall I," said Dick. + +"Sure an' it's mesilf thot loikes foightin' as well as the nixt wan," +said Tim Murphy. "But Oi'll be willin' to settle down an' take it aisy +whin the war is over." + +"Yah, und dot is der vay I loog at id," said Fritz Schmockenburg. + +"Well, there will likely be a lot of fighting yet, before the war is +ended," said Tom. + +"There will be considerable fighting in the next few months, likely," +said Dick. + +And he was right. The war did not end till more than a year later, when +the British were defeated at Yorktown. + + THE END + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Dare Boys with General Greene, by +Stephen Angus Cox + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DARE BOYS WITH GENERAL GREENE *** + +***** This file should be named 44631.txt or 44631.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/6/3/44631/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/44631.zip b/old/44631.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f1ba90e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44631.zip |
